Home

File - LSC Lighting Systems

1. i Select the attribute s to which you want to add dynamic effects then click OK See Dynamics real time effects section 17 for more details Page 109 nen e L S C ORAR Operator P 18 17 RECORDI NG MATRI X SETTI NGS Matrix Settings are recorded as a cue in a cue list just like recording cues for regular lighting fixtures The values that you set are grabbed in the current programmer together with any timing values that you might set in the timing tab and are included in any cues by clicking on the Record button See Record section 23 for details Page 110 Clarity S9 LS C c J2REN Media Operator Manual V2 0 19 Media 19 1 OVERVI EW Media servers provide video and graphics playback for visual projection on video screens or LED walls Clarity allows you to control media servers and program them just as if they were another lighting fixture Therefore their output can be tightly integrated into a complete lighting and visual show 19 2 PATCHI NG MEDI A SERVERS Media servers that you control from Clarity must be patched just like you would patch a lighting fixture Many media servers use a master fixture that controls global aspects of the server such as brightness contrast mask keystone etc Each layer of the media server is also patched as a separate fixture Servers usually require that the master and layers are patched in a contiguous fashion This means that the last DMX chann
2. Beam Framincg Media Server Two Pages Media Server General Media Server Keystone Keystone X 1 Keystone Y 1 Keystone X 2 Keystone Y 2 Keystone X 3 Keystone Y 3 Keystone X 4 Keystone Y 4 The following shortcuts are available if you right click on any control on the screen You can save a shortcut to a page and row allowing you to navigate to it with a single key press See section 8 5 1 for details See also section 8 3 for more information on Universal mode Page 89 Direct 2 a e c enns LX300 Operator Manual V1 14 Direct 14 1 OVERVIEW When you have selected a fixture s Direct mode provides attribute controls for the selected fixture as specified for that fixture in the fixture library For example the fixture being controlled might have a colour wheel with a colour mode attribute and a colour index spin attribute When you use the Direct mode you control these attributes directly so if you want to spin the colour wheel you would need to set both attributes to the appropriate values This is different to Universal mode where you only need to set a single control and Clarity sends the appropriate values to both attributes Direct mode also allows you to control any unusual attributes that a fixture might have that aren t covered by the controls in Universal mode The Direct controls are divided into groups of Intensity Position Colour Gobo Effects Groups and rows a
3. option it contains hard values for all attributes that have been touched changed since the previous cue in the cue list was recorded but it also takes all of the tracked values that would exist on the output of the playback as if the cue list had been played back and converts them into hard values then automatically adds them to the cue When a Block Cue exists in a cue list subsequent edits that are made to previous steps in the cue list will not track through and affect the Block Cue or the cues following it For example Here is a cue list played back in Tracking mode Cue 3 is a Block cue that contains hard values for all attributes so it blocks any tracked values Page 205 Operating Concepts amp Terminology HC L S C C Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Cue 1 100 50 25 Output 100 50 25 Cue 2 80 Output 50 50 25 Cue 3 BLOCK 50 75 25 Output 50 75 25 Cue 4 25 Output 25 75 25 Cue 1 contains hard values for attributes 1 2 and 3 so when it is played back the attributes go to 100 50 and 25 respectively Cue 2 only contains a hard value for attribute 1 so when it is played back attribute 1 changes to 80 and attributes 2 and 3 track through and remain at 50 and 25 Cue 3 is a block cue so it contains hard values for all attributes Cue 4 only contains a hard value for attribute 1 so when it is played back attribute 1 changes to 25 and attributes 2 and 3 track through and remain at 75
4. Palettes tab Auto Mask For example A CB preset appears in both the Colour Presets and in the Beam Presets When Auto mask is ON applying the CB preset from the Colour Presets pane only applies the preset to Colour attributes of the selected fixtures Applying the CB preset from the Beam Presets pane only applies the preset to Beam attributes When Auto Mask is OFF activating a Preset from a category pane applies the preset to all types of attributes contained in that preset Hint You can achieve the same result as Auto Mask OFF by right clicking and selecting Activate unmasked Presets and freesets in Favourites panes are applied to all of the attributes shown in their individual icons 20 13 APPLYING DYNAMIC PRESETS Presets and freesets in the Dynamic Presets pane are applied in the same manners as other Presets and Freesets above but you can also choose the following options that affect how the dynamics are applied and maintained 20 13 1 Masking Dynamic Presets If a Dynamic Preset or Freeset controls multiple IPCB Intensity Position Colour Beam attribute groups the IPCB filters in the Palettes window allow you to activate only the selected IPCB aspect of the effect When an IPCB button is green the dynamic will be applied to that attribute group Click either I P C or B to select only that attribute group Hold Function whilst clicking to select multiple groups The IPCB sel
5. Trim knock out remainder clears all unselected fixtures in the current Programmer session 21 9 3 Remainder Dim When Remainder Dim is clicked all unselected fixtures that are currently grabbed in the programmer have their intensity in the programmer set to zero To reverse the Remainder Dim command use the Undo button 21 9 4 Controls Controls shows or hides the Universal Control Panel controls at the bottom of the Programmer window 21 9 5 Renumber Fixtures Renumber Fixtures opens a dialog box allowing you to change the unit number Unit s of selected fixtures See section 22 Command Line Programming for more details 21 9 6 Grab DMX Grab DMX opens a dialog box allowing you to grab DMX values from an external universe and apply them to the selected fixtures in Clarity s current programmer See DMX Input below for more details 21 9 7 Copy Copy copies the attribute values of the currently selected fixture or multiple fixtures to the clipboard 21 9 8 Paste Paste pastes the attribute values from the clipboard to the currently selected fixture or multiple fixtures Hint There are also Copy and Paste buttons on the front panel command centre Copy and Paste is a powerful function It allows you to duplicate attribute settings between different types of fixtures with just a few clicks or keystrokes For example you have 12 fixtures that use Red Green Blue additive colour mixing and 12 fixtures t
6. 12 4 FIXTURE I CONS Two different styles of icons are available for displaying fixtures e Detailed Separate areas for Intensity Colour Position and Beam are shown e Combined Compact All attributes combined into a compact display Page 84 Operator Manual V2 0 L S C c JETEN Intensity Colour Intensity Colour Beam Position 4 e T Beam Ft unit T Beam F3 number Detailed Icon Combined Compact Icon Fixture icons can be individually set by selecting the fixture s and right clicking then selecting either Detailed or Combined Compact You can also choose which type of icon will be used as the default icon for each view in the Configure View dialogue described below The Fixture Unit Number displayed in the icon is the fixture s number used in command line programming Screen size can be varied with the and 100 or fit to screen buttons on the menu bar It can also be zoomed with the mouse wheel 12 5 MULTIPLE VIEWS You can create multiple views In each view you can name the view delete or add fixtures and groups change the arrangement of the fixtures and groups display the fixtures as either detailed icons or combined compact icons and select a different background image For example e A Stage View might show a plan of the stage with the stage fixtures positioned on the lighting battens A FOH View might show a plan of the auditor
7. 16 2 2 Timing Tab The Programmer timing tab displays the timing of the attributes that are grabbed in the Programmer and provides a means of altering the times M Compact Z Capped gt Expanded The Filter Attribute buttons allow you to filter your selection by the attribute groups of Intensity Position Colour and Beam Attribute groups can be further filtered to individual attributes by clicking the attributes to be included You can select them individually or they are multi selectable with Function click Below the filter attributes are the Timing Controls The detail shown in the Timing Control can be varied by clicking on either e Compact one line is used for all devices of that type e Capped the height of the Timing Control is limited to a maximum of 5 lines the individual value rectangles are compressed to fit into the available space e Expanded the Timing Control is expanded to suit the number of selected devices See section 10 8 for more details e Clicking on the Fade Curves icon reveals a range of fade curves to choose from as described below e Clicking on Menu reveals a range of choices to set reset align and straighten times and to recall preset times or save preset times as described below 16 3 SETTING TIMES The delay time fade time and total time delay fade are shown in the Timing Control When times are altered the display automatically zooms to show the entire duration Page 94 Clarity
8. Merging options e Dropping a cue between two cues selects the Inserting options e Holding Function whilst dragging and dropping between two cues selects the Copy option You can change any of the pre set options if applicable by clicking on them If you are copying or replacing a cue you can enter a name for the new cue The settings of the state of the resultant cue Tracking or Cue only will be automatically set by Clarity depending upon the playback setting of the destination cue list e Include tracked information from source cue check box When checked the copy contains the hard values in the source cue and any tracked values from previous cues in the cue list When unchecked the copy only contains the hard values in the source cue The four Radio Buttons are mutually exclusive Selecting one deselects all others e Exclude redundant state changes only tracking Hard values from the source cue will be copied or merged into the destination cue with the exception that Clarity will exclude any hard values from the source cue that are not required redundant because they would exist in the destination cue due to tracking from an earlier cue e Include unchanged information non tracking Hard values from the source cue will be copied or merged into the destination cue e Blocking incoming fixtures only The cue contains hard values for all attributes of all fixtures in the cue list e Blocking all fi
9. The bottom right of the properties window shows the cues of the currently selected cell 26 6 THE METRONOME The metronome toolbar at the top of the Performance window provides control over Clarity s internal musical time base Cue lists and chases can be locked to tempo and the Programmer s Dynamics real time effects can be synchronized to the metronome so that the playback rates keep a uniform time and achieve perfect synchronization Cue lists in the Performance window can use the metronome to synchronize triggering to the next boundary which is given by the metronome s Quantize setting For example if quantize is set to 1 bar then the next boundary is when the song position reaches the start of the next bar If quantize is set to 1 4 note then the boundary is the next down beat Page 172 Clarity tH L S G C SEN Performance Window Operator Manual V2 0 26 6 1 Metronome Settings e Time sig Time signature allows you to select the number of beats within a bar 2 4 3 4 or 4 4 e BPM Beats Per Minute is the tempo of the metronome Set the tempo by either entering a BPM number or by using the lt tap gt button to set the tempo rhythmically The first tap sets the down beat and subsequent taps will modify the tempo The more taps in succession the more accurate the tempo will be You can also use the keyboard s Ins insert key to tap the tempo e Stop Metronome stops and the song position will start from 0 0 the next tim
10. To start Clarity double click on the Clarity icon on your desktop or browse to the LSC menu from your Start button 3 11 LOADING A SHOW When you start Clarity it prompts you to load a show Clarity 2 0 Load show The Mode function allows you to run Clarity as a normal desktop version or to emulate a console version of Clarity LX300 LX600 or LX900 on your computer If Mode is left as Auto then the mode is determined from the show file that is loaded For example if you load a show saved on a LX600 then Clarity will start up in LX600 emulation mode Clicking the dropdown box allows you to make a selection Page 12 Clarity H L S C OPEN Desktop Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Selecting a console mode is particularly useful when you are creating or editing a show on the desktop version that will be loaded onto a console version of Clarity Once you have made your selection e Clicking Last Show loads the last show to be saved e Clicking Open shows a standard file navigator allowing you to select any show e Clicking Recent opens a drop down box containing your most recent shows e Clicking New Show starts a new show 3 11 1 Show Tab You can always start a new show change to an existing show save or rename a show from the Show tab on the top toolbar Selecting Change show allows you to also change the Mode as described above and below Rowe Patch Rigg Pro New show Change s
11. When multiple attributes are being controlled by dynamics you can select which attributes to alter by touching them Combinations of attributes can be selected by dragging Page 102 OPEN Dynamics CLEAR Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Mew Stop Resync Mull Intensity Shutter Strobe Fan Tilt Cyan Selected Magenta _ Attributes Yellow Each selected attribute s can have its own waveform and modifiers selected For example select the pan and tilt attributes of a fixture and set them to a sin waveshape running at 15 cycles min Click on pan only select a different waveform and double the pan speed to 30 cycles min You now have a figure of eight effect 17 4 1 Stopping Dynamics To remove the current dynamics from an attribute select the attribute then select Stop 17 4 2 Resync Selecting Resync Re synchronize forces all current attribute waveforms to the same starting offset Resync is useful if different waveforms are being used and you have adjusted the rate of one of them causing it to get out of sync If you then set it back to the original rate it will possibly still be out of sync with the other waveforms Selecting Resync will restore the synchronization of the waveforms 17 4 3 Attribute Control Dynamics Indicators In the Universal Direct or in the Programmers Attribute tab any grabbed attributes that are currently being modulated by a Dynamic effect have a sine wave symbol on
12. e Start cue list edit blind Default ticked If ticked when a cue list is edited Clarity will open a blind edit session to edit the selected cue De selecting blind on the edit session will cause the edit session to jump to the current cue if the cue list is active If un ticked when a cue list is edited it will open a live edit session so that the changes edits that you make will be seen on the output If a playback advances the cue list to the next cue the edit session keeps track so that the current cue can be instantly edited by the Programmer If you release the cue list then the edit session is automatically sent to blind See Channel Controller Mode below for more details e Connect fader for cue list edit Default ticked If ticked the level fader of any playback whose cue list is being edited live lt on stage gt will control the output level of the live edit session See Channel Controller Mode below for more details e Programmer follow selected playback Default un ticked If ticked and if multiple cue lists are being edited at the same time you can automatically switch the programmer to any playbacks edit session by selecting that playback Press Select and then press any of the required playbacks flashing buttons See Channel Controller Mode below for more details e Mask intensity when recording presets Default ticked A preset is usually recorded with only specifically se
13. Note If you edit the levels in a cue it can alter the times Clarity will attempt to apply suitable timing derived from the current cue contents by examining the timing of existing parameter types and falling back to less filtered types For example if you Page 165 LSC ne Operator Manual V2 0 touch RGB it will use existing RGB timing if there is any otherwise it will use any pre existing colour timing else if will use overall cue timing else it will use 2s Clarity also tries to match ranged timing For example if you have fanned delay or fade values it will try and apply the same fan on the incoming fixtures 25 3 1 Saving the Edit When finished editing there are several choices e To save the edited cue press Save on the command centre or click Save on the Programmer toolbar instantly saved without warning e To save the edited cue with a new name click Save As on the Programmer toolbar and enter a name e Click Close on the Programmer toolbar or right click on the cue list in session control and click Close You can then choose either Save Save as or Discard e To Record as a new cue or in a new cue list press Save As on the command centre then name the new cue or click the drop down box beside Save As on the Programmer toolbar Choosing Record opens the Record Cue dialog box 25 4 EDITING CHANNELS TO BE CUE ONLY There might be occasions where you do not want the values in a cue to track into later cues in the c
14. Set aa Firer Pm ne A n n innaka ES ER ES Oe a ra a era Fes ea es ed ee 0 laa ee ee ee The Contents pane automatically includes any attribute types that have been grabbed by the programmer by enabling the appropriate mask Intensity Position Colour or Beam You can change the attribute masks by clicking on them When an attribute mask is Green it is included A name for the preset can be entered in the name box Note that Intensity is excluded by default unless you are recording an intensity only preset Selected Fixtures only When this check box is ticked the attribute values that are recorded into a preset are only those of the selected fixtures in the programmer Un tick the box to record all grabbed attributes in the programmer If you applied any dynamics to the attributes the Preset or Freeset that you recorded will automatically be placed in the Dynamics pane of the Palettes window Clicking the drop down arrow beside the name box and selecting one of the existing preset or Freeset names allows you to choose the appropriate Update option to either Merge with Remove or Replace an existing preset or Freeset To record as a Freeset tick the Record as a free preset Freeset check box When this option is selected you can also select the Freeset Application mode as either Permutate or Scale Scale is available when only 2 fixtures have been selected See Scaling Freesets above for more details Activate recorded pr
15. The top toolbar has tabs allowing you to switch between the main windows of Patch Programmer Palettes Control Booth Performance and Levels All of these windows are fully described in their own sections of this manual Page 66 Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 LX Console Controls Show ue Lew Programmer Tab The right end of the top toolbar on the desktop version has buttons for Clear All Release All and DBO e Clear All clears all fixtures from all Programmers Clear All ease All OBO e Release All releases all fixtures from all Playbacks See the Programmer and Control Booth sections for more details on Clearing and Releasing e DBO Dead Black Out instantaneously blacks out all fixtures and dimmers This is a momentary action When the button is released all output is instantly restored When you hover the mouse over the DBO button the Grand Master GM appears You can click on O Black Out or 100 Full level or drag the virtual fader to set an overall intensity level The DBO button flashes red if the Grand Master is set to any level below 100 It stays red when the Grand Master is set to 0 Page 67 Basic Operation Ler EN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 9 Basic Operation 9 1 OVERVIEW Clarity is a programmer and playback lighting controller and uses tracking playback by default If you are unfamiliar with these terms it is recommended that you read the Op
16. This includes the settings in the User Preferences and the playback settings for a new cue list in the control booth e To open a new show with your preferred default settings click Show Settings Preferences then tick the Store preferences globally check box Set your required preferences in the User Preferences dialog box and also set your playback preferences in the control booth Re start Clarity then when Load show appears click Close e To open a new show with the standard default settings click Show Settings Preferences then un tick the Store preferences globally check box Re start Clarity then when Load show appears click Close Page 193 i OF j los SESC ORAR Operator ua 33 2 ABOUT CLARITY Selecting Show About LSC Clarity displays the About LSC Clarity dialog box About LSC Clarity Here you can find information about your version of the Clarity software Page 194 Opera ORAN LX Tool Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C JRE 34 LX Tools 34 1 OVERVI EW LX Tools is a utility program that provides access to hardware configuration help files and software upgrades on the LX consoles 34 2 STARTI NG LX TOOLS e To start LX Tools from the console press Function Fine Fine at the same time e To start LX Tools from the keyboard press Ctri Alt L at the same time The LX Tools utility appears on the encoder wheel touch screen What would you like to do
17. Time Presets and Freesets allow you to create building blocks of timing patterns for use in programming or to use them in live playback from the Palettes window 16 10 1 Recording Time Presets Select a fixture s and alter an attribute value Alter the times to the values that you require then click To Time Preset which is located under the Menu button of the Timing mode screen or the Programmer s Timing tab The Record Time Preset dialog box opens and various options exist to control how these times are recorded and how they apply Record Time Preset ma The Source pane allows you to filter the timing data that will be recorded by Intensity Position Colour and Beam It also allows you to record the time data of the Selected fixtures only The Options pane allows you to name the Time Preset and to specify the Application mode Choose either e Permutate If the Time Preset was recorded using 3 fixtures and it is then applied to 12 fixtures it will apply the Time Preset to the first 3 then apply it again to the next 3 the next 3 and so on Permutate is the default setting e Scale A scaling Time Preset is created by selecting only two fixtures and setting one s attribute values to the start value and the other s attribute value to the end value When this Time Preset is applied to a quantity of destination fixtures the start value is applied to the first fixture in the selection and the end value is
18. VX20 Playback masters The area of the LCD screen adjacent to each playback shows the name of any cue list that is on the playback and also the names of the current cue and the next two cues in the cue list e GM Grand master controls the overall intensity of all fixtures on the output If more than one VX wing is connected the Grand Masters work on a Lowest Takes Precedence basis Page 23 Desktop Clarity Pe L S C c SREN Clarity DA Operator Manual V2 0 e DBO Dead Black Out Whilst held down it blacks out all intensity of all fixtures on the output e Intensity fader that controls the overall intensity of all fixtures on the output of its playback Playbacks 1 to 10 only e Flash button Instantly flashes the intensity of all fixtures on the playback to full level Playbacks 1 to 10 only e Pb Go Plays the next cue in the cue list or restarts a paused fade Pressing will start the fade to the next cue even if the current fade has not finished Press Function gt to snap to the next cue o The indicator in the button lights during the transition to the next cue o The indicator in the button slowly flashes if any of the attributes in the cue have been overridden If the playback contains a chase pressing will start the chase If you continue tapping gt to the beat of the music it will automatically adjust the chase speed to the beat e Il iK Pauses any fades in progress If no fades are in progress i
19. cue only The channels in the cue are tagged by Clarity as q only When a cue containing q only channels is played back in tracking mode the current state on the output of the playback is the hard values of the q only channels plus any tracked values from the previous cues When the next cue is played back the state from the most recent non q only values is restored automatically plus any new values in the incoming cue are used In other words when the next cue is played back the output tracks the values as if the cue only values did not exist You can also edit existing cues or channels within a cue to be cue only Page 206 Clarity H O L S G C JAREN Operating Concepts amp Terminology Operator Manual V2 0 37 8 3 Mark Cues Move in Black A Mark cue is a special type of cue that you can insert in a cue list Mark cues are also known as move in black and are used to pre position fixture attributes without their movements or changes being seen on stage When you insert a Mark cue Clarity looks at the previous cue and selects any fixtures that have an intensity of zero Then using that fixture selection it looks at the following cue and copies all the attributes of those fixtures except intensity from the following cue and inserts them into the new Mark cue which is placed between the two cues When the cue list is played back and the cue prior to the mark cue finishes its fade the Mark cue i
20. 20 Dimmer 5 22 6 1 Changing Fixture Unit Numbers Fixture unit numbers can be easily changed to assist programming via keypad number entry e Select the fixtures to be renumbered in the order that you want to renumber them e Inthe Programmer window click on the Toolbox and from the drop down menu select Renumber Fixtures Use the dialog box to set the new Start Unit number The End Unit number is automatically Shown The OK button is disabled if the currently specified range clashes with existing unit numbers 38 Dimmer 15 Alternately individual fixtures can have their unit numbers changed in the Patch window See section 11 for details Page 145 a ORAR V2 0 y LSC JERR Operator Manual V2 0 23 Record 23 1 OVERVI EW The looks that you create with the programmer can be recorded into Cue lists for later playback A cue list can contain any quantity of individual cues The transition from one cue to the next in the list can be set to be either manually started or automatically started at the completion of the previous cue Each cue can have its own in and out delay and fade times A cue list can be set to automatically chase through the cues at a set rate Chases can be synchronized to a common tempo Metronome or to a tapped beat that you enter The cues that you record can also include dynamics real time effects They might also contain values that you have created for Matrices LED arrays
21. Layer Full 1 0 ect Directory Layer input Effect Director MeMaLF10 4 MeMaLF10 4 MeMaLF10 4 MeMaLF10 4 MeMaLF10 4 Media Server Controls tab Click on a layer to select it then use the Attribute Controls to adjust that layers settings The available attributes will vary depending upon the type of Media Server that has been patched Typical attributes are effects rotation zoom copy mode masks transitions etc etc These are varied by dragging in the Attribute Controls just like controlling lighting fixtures 19 6 RECORDING CUES Media server settings are recorded as a cue in a cue list just like recording cues for lighting fixtures The values that you set are grabbed in the current programmer together with any Page 112 ae Osner Media Operator Manual V2 0 L S C CLEAR timing values that you might set in the Timing tab and dynamics set in the Dynamics tab and are included in a cue by clicking on the red Record button See section 23 Record for details 19 7 SUPPORTED MEDIA SERVERS Clarity currently supports the open standard CITP MSExX protocol as well as the Hippotizer HMAP protocol for thumbnail exchange The following media servers are supported by Clarity Green Hippo s Hippotizer ArKaos VJ DMX ArKaos Media Master Pandoras Box Catalyst ROBE Digispots Page 113 Palettes Pa OPEN Clarity e L S C oe Operator Manual V2 0 20 Palettes 20 1 OVERVIEW
22. Name field allows you to enter a name for each page e To change the order of a page tap and drag the page to a new position in the order The page numbers are automatically updated when you Apply the changes 8 6 10 Page Bookmarks Page bookmarks allow instant recall of pages on all connected control surfaces LX console or VX wings You create a page bookmark by switching to the desired page s on the control surface s and then either pressing Bookmark in Control Booth or pressing Record to bring up the record dialog where you can switch to Page Bookmark mode To record a Page Bookmark select the required left and or right pages then either e Inthe Control Booth press Bookmark e Press Record Using the buttons at the bottom of the touch screen select Page Bookmark Page 60 Clarity Came C ena LX Console Controls Operator Manual V2 0 Record after making your selections below Page Bookmark The Create Page Bookmark dialogue appears Create PageBookmark Gee matt L Set as Favourite V LX300 LHS Page 3 It allows you to e Name the bookmark e Give it a number e Tick or un tick the page groups that you want included in the bookmark A page group is the left or right side of a VX10 or VX20 wing or a split page section on an LX console See below for more details on page groups e Add the bookmark to your favourites e Choose to Restore activity to the playbacks
23. See section 12 for details Clicking on fixtures or groups in the Programmer window Selection sidebar Touching groups in Palettes or the LX600 LX900 Action buttons Typing a fixture s number on the keypad and pressing Enter Typing a group s number on the keypad and pressing Enter Clarity provides many methods of programming your selected fixtures On the LX console s encoder wheel touch screen e Universal or Direct modes using the encoder wheels e Graphical mode using the touch screen The Programmmer tab on the touch screen or external monitor Adjust the attributes of the fixtures to get the desired look To record the look as the first cue in a cue list press Record on the LX command centre or in the Programmer e To record this new cue list directly to a playback press any button on that playback e To record this new cue list to memory press Record again Select fixtures and adjust attributes to set the next look e To record this look as the next cue in the Cue list on the same playback press any button on that playback e To record it to the cue list in memory press Append Last in the Programmer Repeat until all cues in the cue list have been recorded Press Clear to clear all attributes from the Programmer The Programmer is fully described in section 21 9 4 PLAYBACK If you recorded your cues directly to a playback you can see them on the playback touch screens where they were recorded If you recorded them d
24. Typical Pan Attribute Quick Menu Typical Gobo Attribute Quick Menu 21 13 2 Fixture Quick Menus The Menu button in the top corner each fixture type can be clicked to access the fixture quick menus These menus provide rapid access to common attribute settings for all selected fixtures of the same type For example Dimmer Channel 6 devices Dimmer 1 Dimmer 2 Dimmer Dimmer 5 Dimmer 6 Studio Spot 575 Pan Fi o E A Weel w AmeetFz o Wheel h Gobo Whee Mode 2 fale bo Index Rotate 2 63 A 21 13 3 Attribute Control Size The Attribute Controls can be re sized to allow you to trade off between screen area and detail by clicking either e Compact One line is used for all devices of that type e Capped The height of the Attribute Control is limited to a maximum of 5 lines e Expanded The Attribute Control is expanded to suit the number of selected devices See section 10 8 for more details Page 141 P r OPEN lari _ _ a L C Oe Operator font ae 21 13 4 Attribute Control Order The order in which the Attribute Controls appear can be sorted by clicking the left hand toolbar button Logical immon e Logical This uses standardized attribute ordering grouped into Intensity Position Colour and Beam e Common When multiple fixture types are selected only the attributes that are common to all selected types are displayed It uses the same ordering as for Logical e Natural Each fixture ty
25. Use the MIDI channel drop down box to select the MIDI channel on which your MIDI transmitting device is sending its messages Selecting Omni receives on all 16 channels simultaneously 30 2 3 MIDI Note On Messages The MIDI protocol uses many different types of messages Note on is one type of MIDI message Each note on the MIDI keyboard has a number assigned to it and when that note is played MIDI sends a note on message for that note You can assign any note s note on message to control the Go next Pause Back Release and Jump buttons of the selected playback Clicking on the drop down box beside each button name allows you to select the note that will activate it The currently assigned note is shown beside each button See also Learn MIDI below When Clarity receives a MIDI note on message that is assigned to a playback function button it triggers that function on the selected playback Page 180 Operal Oscar MIDI Operator Manual V2 0 Y L S C CLEAR 30 2 4 MIDI Control Function Control Change is a type of MIDI message This message consists of a function and a value The value that is sent with that message is used by Clarity to pre select a cue in the currently selected cue list Then when the next MIDI note on message assigned to the Jump button is received Clarity will jump cross fade to that pre selected cue Clicking on the drop down box beside Control Function
26. You can even copy between fixtures with different feature sets and Clarity will simply ignore the missing functions For example you can also paste the above look into 200 RGB LED pars and Clarity will look after the color conversion whilst ignoring the Pan Tilt parameters that don t exist on the par cans 38 19 FANS BUTTONS The LX consoles provide dedicated Fan End and Fan Centre buttons located right next to the encoders to allow quick one handed fanning of any parameter So Pan Tilt fans take mere seconds to create and adjust to perfection You can even use the fan buttons in the graphical colour picker to enable almost instant colour fans When used in conjunction with the quick sort controls it is easy to do Mirrored Selected Order Random and other fan orders without taking your eyes off the stage The Buddying and Subgroup controls allow the fans to be repeated across specific numbers of fixtures or in pairs triplets or whatever combination you require 38 20 MULTI PLE PROGRAMMERS Clarity has the ability to have an unlimited number of programmers in operation This allows you to quickly jump between different tasks without needing to save things to temporary cuelists It is ideal for parking some work lights Just switch to the next programmer adjust the Pan Tilt and intensity then switch back to the default programmer The lights will stay where they are and any cues recorded whilst working in the default programmer will ignore the
27. buttons on the playbacks The connector is wired to accept 6 inputs in the form of contact closures VX10 VX20 emt u 1 gt E 1 B 1 se gt a gt H a ua Jiili Tb abba The external inputs control GO buttons 5 to The external inputs control GO buttons 15 to 20 10 The pin assignments on the 9 pin D SUB connector are Pin To remotely operate a Go button provide a contact closure short circuit from its control pin to the common pin Pin 1 Bd Pin 9 Circuit to operate Go button 5 on a VX10 or Go button 15 on a VX20 3 24 VX20 MIDI A MIDI signal connected to a VX20 wing can be used to remotely control the playback of the selected playback that wing A playback is selected on a wing by pressing Select then any of the flashing buttons of that playback The cue list name of the currently selected playback is displayed in black text on a white background e MIDI Note ON messages can be assigned to trigger the Go Pause Back Release and Jump functions of the selected playback on a VX20 wing e MIDI Control Change messages can be used to pre select a cue in the cue list of the selected playback that will be triggered by the next Note on message to be received that is assigned to the Jump function See section 30 for details on the VX20 s MIDI functions Page 29 Desktop Clarity c ye PEN Clarity s L SC JERAR Operator Manual V2 0 3 25 DESKLAMP I NTENSITY The brightness o
28. declares that the LX QX and VX products comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment can radiate radio frequency energy and if not properly installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures gt reorient or relocate the receiving antenna gt increase the separation between the equipment and receiver gt connect the equipment into an outlet on a different circuit from that to which the receiver is connected gt consult your local LSC dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help END Page 214
29. e 30 Frames non drop Non drop Timecode for NTSC video rate e 30 Frames drop frame Drop frame Timecode for NTSC video rate The Simulator can also be accessed directly from the Show Timecode menu Page 184 Clarity Ler EN Remote Control Operator Manual V2 0 31 Remote Control 31 1 OVERVI EW Clarity uses OSC Open Sound Control which is a protocol for real time control between computers and multimedia devices This allows Clarity to control OSC devices and also to be controlled by OSC devices Clarity can also be configured to playback cues at a specific date and time 31 2 CONTROLLI NG CLARITY VIA AN I PHONE Clarity can be controlled by an iPhone running the TouchOSC app and a dedicated Clarity touchosc template The LX300 needs to be connected to a Wireless access point via one of it s Ethernet ports To setup the phone e Purchase and install the TouchOSC app from the app store e Go to HEXLER net download and install the TouchOSC editor e Go to Isclighting com download the ClarityiphoneTemplate touchosc file and load it into the ToucOSCeditor e Press Sync then browse from the TouchOSC app to install the template e Open Clarity s OSC server from the Show Settings OSC settings menu and tick the Enable OSC server e Setup the Outgoing port to match the Incoming port on the Iphone e Setup the Incoming port to match Outgo
30. e Hardware 34 2 10 Restart GUI The LX Tools Restart GUI provides a quick re start for the GUI Page 198 Opera JERAN LX Tool Operator Manual V2 0 L S G C2558 35 Technical Support If you are experiencing problems with Clarity either contact your local LSC agent or post a message on the LSC forum at http www sclighting com forums LSC technical support staff can remotely interrogate any LX console that is connected to the internet This is accomplished using a Remote Desktop application called TeamViewer that is pre installed on LX consoles To use this facility e Connect a network cable from your network with internet access to the console s Ethernet 2 connector e Start LX Tools by pressing Function Fine Fine at the same time e Select the Networking page and ensure Ethernet 2 right panel is configured as DHCP e Select the System Information page and select Remote Support This will start TeamViewer When TeamViewer connects to the internet it will populate Your ID field with a 9 digit number and Password field with a 4 digit number e Send Your ID 9 digit number to LSC Leave the console running and connected to the internet until contacted by LSC Page 199 Fixture Editor YorEeEn LX300 p L S C ORAR Operator Manual V1 36 Fixture Editor 36 1 OVERVIEW Clarity s contains a fully integrated fixture library of over 2000 fixtu
31. e If you choose 3 columns then the next playback to the right controls that cue lists Playback Rate e If you choose 4 columns then the next playback to the right controls that cue lists FX Effects Rate e If you choose 5 columns then the next playback to the right controls that cue lists FX Effects Amplitude 7 Saris Det t dib Orare Kate Pls beteck Sbp 10036 100 100 HOLD PLeaStH HOLD PLAS HOLD PLAS HOLO PLease Controls Cue list Controls Controls Controls being Chase Playback Effects Effects Rate Rate Amplitude controlled Rate The buttons and fader on each of these playbacks columns now perform the following functions e Pressing Play or Pause steps the values up or down respectively If you hold the button it will auto repeat after a delay e Holding the Flash button when pressing Play or Pause makes them step in larger increments e Pressing both Play and Pause together resets to the default value e Holding the Flash button allows you to use the fader to make fine adjustments to the value If you reach a fader end stop but you need to more range you can release the flash button and move the fader to the opposite end then hold flash and move fader to continue adjusting the value This is known as scooting the fader The user preference Invert flash button operation on rate faders changes this operation so that you just move the fader without hol
32. of memory LX600 See section 8 for descriptions of the Encoder Wheel Touch Screen Encoder wheels and modifier buttons Keypad and Command centre and the Grand Master There are 15 motorised fader playbacks each with a Flash button below the fader and gt Go ll K Pause Back and Select button above the fader A coloured contents function indicator Surrounds the fader and the playback status contents is shown on the touch screen above it There are 99 pages of Playbacks available split into left and right banks with an adjustable bank divider See section 8 6 for descriptions of the Playbacks There are 60 Action Buttons each with a touch screen beside it There are 4 pages of Action buttons for a total of 240 actions See section 1 1 for descriptions of the Action buttons Page 40 Clarity tf OPEN 1X900 Operator Manual V2 0 7 LX900 Console 7 1 OVERVIEW LX900 The LX900 has the following features Pivoting monitor panel One 10 4 inch encoder wheel touch screen Two 17 touch screens 30 motorized Fader Playbacks in two banks of 15 playbacks Each playback has a fader with integral RGB mode indicator plus Select Go and Pause Back buttons 99 pages of playback memory for each bank split into left and right pages 60 Action Buttons for Group Palette Preset Cue each with LCD touch screen for labelling and advanced control 4 pages of memory Dedicated split crossfade motori
33. or Media Servers Times Dynamics Matrices and Media Servers are all described in their relevant sections 23 2 RECORDI NG A CUE There are many options to consider when recording a cue These options control exactly what is recorded in each cue and its suitability to different modes of playback When you have selected and programmed your fixtures for the desired look you press Record or click the red Record button on the monitors Programmer window The Record Cue dialog box appears ay Clarity A deus Crete Existing Auta Te ENE E ET pe X EAR Bookmark __ keer settings a so Cancel nF Record Record New Cue list The tabs on the top left allow you to choose to record a New Cue list or to add a cue to Existing Cue lists 23 2 1 New Cue list To create a new cue list and record the first cue select the New Cue list tab To accept the default settings and record the first cue press Record The default settings are e Cue list name New Cue list e Playback Mode Tracking e Cue name Cue Page 146 Opera ERR Record Operator Manual V2 0 L S C c JETEN e Fade in 0 seconds e Fade out 2 seconds Prior to pressing Record you can enter your own names and settings as described below 23 2 2 Cue list Playback Settings and Options When recording a New Cue list setting Playback to either Tracking Default or Cue Only is very important as it will automatically select the appropriate
34. reset align and straighten times and to recall preset times or save preset times See section 16 for information on times Page 52 Clarity S9 L S E C JAREN LX Console Controls Operator Manual V2 0 8 4 9 Dynamics Dynamics mode provides real time effects for the attributes of selected fixtures by adding modulation variation to any attribute or combination of attributes See section 17 for more details 8 4 10 Matrix Matrix mode allows you to place fixtures on a two dimensional grid and then display static or moving imagery on them This is typically used with LED arrays Therefore the fixtures output can be tightly integrated into a complete lighting and visual show Clarity allows you to control and program the imagery just like any another lighting fixture See section 18 for details 8 4 11 Media Media mode allows you to control media servers that provide video and graphics playback for visual projection on video screens or LED walls Clarity allows you to control media servers and program them just as if they were another lighting fixture Therefore their output can be tightly integrated into a complete lighting and visual show See section 19 for more details 8 4 12 Palettes Palettes mode is the home of groups presets and freesets that you create and also for Clarity s in built library of groups presets and freesets ready for you to use Freesets are fixture independent and store values that can be generica
35. the Page buttons are described earlier in this section 3 20 WING GROUP MASTERS You can configure any of the VX wing fader playbacks or Control Booth playbacks as fixture Group Masters When a playback is converted into a Group Master it no longer controls its previous cue list if any but instead controls the intensity of the selected group as determined by your choice of either Additive Scale Inhibiting or Limiting mastering as described below To create a Group Master on a wing in the Control Booth window Right click on the LCD window of the virtual wing playback and select Set as Group Master Page 24 Clarity C Jon EN Desktop Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 See above for details on how to display the virtual wing CreateGroupMasterDialop Every StgScn L Every Dimmer Every Mac300m4 Every CBlastl2 Every Satelli3 ennio Every MeMaLF10 Limiting Every MeMaMF10 LED Wall All Matrix Every FixSrc On the Create Group Master Dialog select the required fixture Group to master then choose the Master Type to use e Additive The fader level is added to the current intensity level of all fixtures in the group For example if the fader is at 50 each fixture would get 50 added onto its current level So fixtures at 25 50 and 75 would end up at 75 100 and 100 percent e Scale This scales each intensity level between its current level and full For example if the fader is at 50 a fixture at
36. them When an existing list or chase is dropped onto a cell the cue list is referenced instead of being duplicated so that any future edits to that cue list will propagate to any cells where it is being used Most importantly each cell can be optionally configured to have different playback characteristics from the source cue list and to only use a selected range of cues from within the cue list For example you may have a cue list that has a nice sequence of position moves between cues 11 to 14 that you would like to re use as a separate chase You can drop this cue list onto a new cell and change the cell properties to operate as a chase and to limit the range of cues to start at 11 and end at 14 You can also restrict the cell to only use fixtures from a specific fixture group and to ignore all colour and beam information These changes do not affect the source cue list in any way In fact the same source cue list can be used on multiple different cells all with different playback chase options ranges of cues IPCB Intensity Position Colour Beam filtering and fixture groups Lead Halt oe iP Band Halt oe IP BallyLead Halt on IP 26 4 1 Sync FX If a cue contains dynamic effects created in the dynamics tab of the programmer or applied by a dynamic preset or freeset the rate of the effect can be kept relative to the performance window s metronome Page 169 Performance Window LR EN Clarity P Operator Ma
37. www lsclighting com forums Page 2 eee C eeam Latest Features Operator Manual V2 0 ud L S C JAREN 2 Latest Features 2 1 OVERVI EW Both LSC Lighting Systems Aust Pty Ltd and OpenClear Pty Ltd have a corporate policy of continuous improvement covering areas such as product design and documentation To achieve this goal we undertake to release software updates for all products on a regular basis The latest features to be added to this version of Clarity are listed below 2 2 VERSION 2 Clarity Version 2 contains the following new or enhanced features 2 2 1 Rig Mode Rig mode is a fixture selection tool and two dimensional visualiser It shows a geographical view of the patched fixtures and groups which you can arrange so that they are positioned as they actually are in your rig This allows you to rapidly find and select fixtures for programming by clicking on them or touching them A background image of your stage or venue can be added to aid selection and multiple views can be created The intensity colour and position of the fixtures are also displayed See section 12 for more details 2 2 2 OSC OSC stands for Open Sound Control and was developed as a protocol to replace MIDI It has evolved to the point where it is used for many types of devices other than audio devices or synthesizers and Clarity now has both OSC client and OSC server functionality This allows Clarity to control OSC devices and
38. 2 2 15 New Cue list Options 4 5 2 5 USB 33 2 2 16 Minor R 3 5 2 6 MIDI 33 2 2 17 User Manua 3 5 2 7 Audio In Out 33 5 2 8 LED Desk Lamps 33 3 Desktop PC or MAC Clarity 6 e E a 2 5 2 10 Reset 34 3 1 Overview 6 5 3 Switching On Off 34 ig dy N eee 6 5 4 1X300 Front Panel 35 3 2 Installing Clarity ona PC 6 5 4 1 LX300 Playbacks 35 3 3 Installing Clarity on a Mac 8 3 3 1 HASP Installation for Mac 9 3 4 HASP Diagnostics 9 6 LX600 Console 37 3 5 Demo Mode 10 6 1 Overview 37 3 6 Desktop DMX Output 10 6 2 LX600 Rear Panel 38 3 7 Desktop ArtNet Output 10 6 2 1 Power Input and Mains Switch 38 3 8 VX10 Playback Wing Ce ae 3 9 VX20 Programming amp Playback Wing __ 11 iy uae 6 2 4 Ethernet 38 3 9 1 USB Indicator 11 6 2 5 DVI Video Out 38 3 9 2 DMX Indicators 11 626 USB 39 3 9 3 Desklamp 12 6 2 7 MIDI 39 3 9 4 Kensington Lock Slot 12 6 2 8 SPMTE Timecode 39 3 9 5 USB Slot 12 i l Clari 12 6 2 9 Audio In Out 39 3 10 Starting Clarity 6 2 10 LED Desk Lamps 39 er rari otal 6 2 11 External Inputs 39 Li OW la 6 2 12 Reset 39 3 12 Modes Of OPeration 13 6 3 Switching On Off 39 3 12 1 Console Window 14 6 4 LX600 Front Panel 40 3 13 Basic Desktop Operation 16 on g 18 7 LX900 Console 41 3 15 Programming 19 3 15 1 Attribute Controls 19 7 1 Overview 41 3 15 2 Attribute Quick Menus 20 7 2 LX900 Rear Panel 41 3 15 3 Universal Controller 20 7 2 1 Power Input and Mains Switch 42 3 15 4 Creating a Lighting Look 20 7 2 2 Mains Outputs 42 3 16 Playback
39. 21 7 2 3 DMX Outputs 42 3 16 1 Control Booth 21 7 2 4 DMX Input 42 3 16 2 Adding a Virtual VX Wing 21 725 Ethernet 42 3 16 3 Selecting a Virtual VX Wing 21 7 2 6 DVI Video Out 42 3 17 Adding a Cue list to a VX Wing 22 7 2 7 USB 42 3 18 Wing Playback Pages 22 as lae f i 3 18 1 Locking a Playback 23 INECOUE Contents O Audio In Out 1 LED Desk Lamps 2 External Inputs 3 Reset Switching On Off LX900 Front Panel LX900 Split Cross Fade LX Console Controls 8 8 1 Overview 8 2 Grand Master 8 3 Encoder Wheel Touch Screen 8 4 Encoder Wheels and Buttons 8 4 1 Rig 8 4 2 Universal 8 4 3 Direct 8 4 4 Expand 8 4 5 Virtual Wheels 8 4 6 Intensities 8 4 7 Graphical 8 4 8 Timing 8 4 9 Dynamics 8 4 10 Matrix 8 4 11 Media 8 4 12 Palettes Keypad and Command Centre 1 User Buttons 2 Intensity Wheel 9 Numeric Keypad 4 Command Centre Playbacks LX300 Button Playbacks Fader Playbacks Playback Controls Playback Touch Screens Assign or Clear a Playback Configuring a Playback Playback Pages Locking a Playback Managing Pages 0 Page Bookmarks 1 Page Groups 2 Extended Playback Controls 3 Releasing a Playback 4 Releasing ALL Playbacks 5 6 7 8 ee CO Clearing a Playback Edit Group Masters Playback Contents Indicator Action Buttons d Action Button Pages 2 Assigning an Action Button nS Clearing an Action Button Touch Screen s DAAAAARADAADAARADAG mae RRR rrr WOON A UNABRWNF CO 0 0 CO CO X CO 00 00 00 00 0
40. 25 would be set half way 50 between 25 and full which is 62 5 A fixture at 50 would be set half way 50 between 50 and full which is 75 and a fixture at 75 would be half way between 75 and full which is 87 5 e Inhibitive This is the default and operates in the same way as a fader assigned to a cue list For example if the fader is at 50 fixtures at 25 50 and 75 would be at 12 5 25 and 37 5 e Limiting The intensity level of each fixture is capped to the fader level For example if the fader is at 50 fixtures at 25 50 and 75 would be at 25 50 and 50 If the actual wing is connected the LCD shows the status of the fader as a Group Master A group master on a wing will be deactivated when it is not on the currently selected page You can change this by un ticking Deactivate group masters while paged out in the User Preferences When a playback on a VX wing has been programmed as a Group master it s Go and Il kq buttons now act as Group select and Group deselect buttons Therefore pressing the gt button of that Group Master on the VX wing will select all of the fixtures in that group in the Programmer 3 21 EXTENDED WING CONTROLS Unused playbacks on a VX10 or VX20 wing can be used as extra control buttons and faders for another playback on that wing that contains a cue list The playbacks on a wing are arranged in groups of 5 e AVX 10 wing has 2 groups of playbacks 1 to 5 and 6 to 10 Page
41. 27 Levels Window 27 1 OVERVIEW The Levels window provides comprehensive monitoring of levels and activity within Clarity The selection tabs allow you to view e DMX e Output e Programmer The levels of all attributes controlled by either programmer e Cue list The contents of any cue in any cue list 27 2 DMX VALUES The DMX tab at the top left allows you to select any of Clarity s DMX Universes via the drop down box and to view the levels in Percent Decimal or in Hexadecimal Show Patch Progammer Patethes Contra Booth Performance Levels Geer M Rekem Al D5 Percent 7 Dpt Wales 7 Proy arer E list E ha ee tel ee ac otal lial eel eel oe ES ES ES ee ee PS iM Me We Ne Ma Mss Ma Me Uns Ms Man Me Min Wa Uae Msn TL Ta Pe ES ESE Ea Pd ire el be bed be ted 2 aoa bbl el ete hv Lassa Wise Wa Mans We Me Ma Me Wie Me Ma Woe Wa Me Mis Mise Mi Me Mi WI ne Mase Mie Ma 1 tl elo iti ie ete Nos ar Uar hol Et a hel eit it Ea ee it Peltor fe Pas tesla az ur ban War ue Larr Kar Iae lear JE eta ia beep aa rl ea e et ta e e ll bed e el bed e e e 27 3 OUTPUT VALUES The Output tab allows you to view either the values or the source of control for every attribute of every fixture via the drop down box Pow Patch Progrorene Polettes Corfralfeoth Performerce Procgrorrenes 1 Stage Scan Lamp control ran n D Dimmer Mac 300 Mode 4 mR Cyran Patch Programmers Poetics Corfralfeath Performarce bev
42. 4 3 Copy Full State 158 30 3 MIDI Timecode 181 24 4 4 Undo Redo sa 30 3 1 Automatic Entry of Events __ 182 24 4 5 Cue Notes oS 30 3 2 Manual Entry of Events 182 24 5 Sync FX CSSD 30 3 3 Editing Events 182 24 6 Mark Cues Move in Black 159 30 3 4 Managing Playlists 183 24 7 Audio Playback 159 30 3 5 MIDI Timecode Playback __ _ 183 24 7 1 Audio Fixture 160 30 3 6 Recede 183 24 8 Simple SCRIPT language Macros 161 30 3 7 Skip Intervening Events ss 183 24 9 Learn new cue list 162 30 3 8 Big Time CBS 24 10 Bookmark 163 30 3 9 Simulator eee 183 25 Editing Cues and Cue lists 164 31 Remote Control 185 31 1 Overview 185 25 1 Overview 164 Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 31 2 Controlling Clarity via an IPhone 185 31 3 Controlling Other Devices From Clarity 185 31 4 Scheduler 32 Tracking Backup 32 1 Overview 32 2 Setting up Tracking Backup 32 3 Operating From The Slave 33 Preferences and About 33 1 User Preferences 33 1 1 New Show Preferences 33 2 About Clarity 34 LX Tools 34 1 Overview 34 2 Starting LX Tools 34 2 1 Brightness 34 2 2 Software Management 34 2 3 Help 34 2 4 Configure Monitors 34 2 5 Networking 34 2 6 Calibrate Touch Screens 34 2 7 Clock 34 2 8 Diagnostics 34 2 9 System Information 34 2 10 Restart GUI 35 Technical Support 36 Fixture Editor 36 1 Overview 36 2 Fixture Request Service 36 3 Fixture Editor 37 Operating Concepts and Terminology 37 1 Overview 37 2 Programmer P
43. C JEER Timing Operator Manual V2 0 Pd L S amp CLEAR 8 devices 5 1500ms T Beam F 1 IP T Beam F 3 IFP abe E E E Si Re E E Pe ae een te oe Slee pn arian heron ena ee eee tates sep T Beam F 5 IP F 5 T Beam F FIP J ee a O enna ARATAI AAT Aoa aT a a Sue CoM aN DOE a A O OSIA T Beam F 8 1P Total Time s Fade Time s _ duration Delay Time s The Timing Control is divided into a grid of 9 time boxes as indicated by the dotted lines in the Timing Control AS you move over each time box the cursor changes to indicate how the timing will be affected if you drag in each section Touching or clicking and dragging in one the relevant box performs the following actions Skew delay time from Skew delay time top to Skew fade from top top to bottom without bottom to bottom changing duration Change delay time Change delay time Change fade time without changing duration Skew delay from Skew delay time bottom to Skew fade from time bottom to top without top bottom to top changing duration Double clicking and holding Function or holding Shift on an the keyboard whilst dragging gives finer control 16 3 1 Setting Times by Direct Entry e Double clicking in the left middle or right centre boxes of a Timing Control brings up an entry box where you can key in either the delay fade or duration times respectively on the numeric keypad then press Enter e Right clic
44. Line Programming Operator Manual V2 0 For example if some fixtures is already selected to set them all at full intensity press Enter To set them all to 0 press O Enter Hint You can alleviate the need to press Enter when entering 2 digit intensity values by ticking the box for Auto enter commandline after 2 digit after AT in the User Preferences located in the Show tab 22 4 INTENSITY WHEEL You can follow you fixture selection entry above by rotating the intensity wheel to set a level 22 5 FADE TIME ENTRY You can specify a fade time by pressing Time after the intensity followed by a time value in seconds For example 1 50 Time 3 5 Enter sets fixture 1 to an intensity of 50 and a fade time of 3 5s only fade times are accepted and delay is set to Os 22 6 FIXTURE NUMBERING FOR KEYPAD ENTRY Keypad entry uses the fixture unit number to select fixtures The unit number is allocated in the patch and shown beside each fixture in the programmer s Selection sidebar The attributes tab shows the fixture name by default You can change this to show the Unit number by clicking Show Preferences and ticking Show unit number instead of fixture name Add Group Logical Dimmer Channel Dimmer Channel I geri De niens Dimmer 2 ioo 24 Dimmer 1 z5 Dimmer 2 Zo Dimmer 3 27 Dimmer 4 20 Dimmer 5 Add Group Dimmer Channel a Jn heat 27 Dimmer 4
45. Operator Manual V2 0 3 9 3 Desklamp The Desklamp socket provides 12volts power for a LED Pins 1 and 2 are ground and pin 3 is 12 Volts The brightness control is accessed by holding down Function and Select together 3 9 4 Kensington Lock Slot The Kensington Lock slot allows you to secure your VX10 or VX20 wing using a commercially available tethering device 3 9 5 USB Slot The top panel of the VX10 and VX20 wings has a standard USB connector allowing you to connect other USB devices such as memory devices to store your shows Multiple VX10 and VX20 wings can be connected to your computer Note The QX and VX products are designed to be powered from the USB port on our computer However due to the design of some computers or your particular configuration there may not be enough power to operate the VX products If you experience problems in the installation process first try a different USB port on your computer or try powering the VX10 with an external power supply or if you have a VX20 plug it into the mains supply If you still experience problems check the LSC website or contact your local dealer Note that the DMX output has to be patched in Clarity before it will work See section 11 12 for details 3 10 STARTING CLARITY If you are running a purchased copy of Clarity please ensure that your USB license dongle is plugged into a USB port on the PC or in the secure rear port your VX10 or VX20 wing before you start Clarity
46. Palettes is the home of groups presets and freesets that you record and also for Clarity s in built library of groups presets and freesets ready for you to use Freesets are a special type of preset described below Palettes can be found in Palettes window and also on the on the encoder wheel touch screen s Palettes mode Both displays show the same palettes but they vary slightly in their presentation and features The displays can be viewed in the following categories All Groups Colours Positions Beam Dynamics Favourites Page Bookmarks a daa T When All is clicked the screen is divided into five panes of Groups Position Beam Colour and Dynamics The panes can be freely re sized by clicking and dragging on the pane dividers Dm Esi L E a EENET SEB n E e PEE lab ci a Ea a S g Hane m w J ias Palette s Window with AlI tab selected Page 114 Operal Oscar palettes Operator Manual V2 0 vd L S C CLEAR Encoder touch screen Palettes with All tab selected When you record a group it will appear in the Groups category and when you record your own presets and freesets they are automatically sorted into the appropriate category of Position Colour or Beam depending upon the attribute s that they will affect Note that a single preset can exist in multiple panes e g a preset that contains colour and position will appear in both the colour and
47. Playback cue 2 and fixture 2 comes on but fixture 1 stays on due to tracking So the look on stage when cue 2 is played back is not the same as the look on stage when cue 2 was recorded e Clearing the programmer after every recording is often used when cues are to be played back in Cue only mode This is because what you see on stage from the programmer is what will be reproduced when the cue is played back irrespective of whether you choose to exclude or include unchanged information when you record the cue 23 3 EDITING CUES When a cue list that you have recorded is selected for editing see section 25 the cue list appears in the Programmer window Session Control showing the Cue list name beside the Programmers and the individual cues within the cue list above This cue list becomes the current session and by default it Blind not seen or affecting the output Cue list containing 5 cues You can click on any of the cues in the list to edit them When a cue is selected the attributes in that cue can be altered in exactly the same manner as when creating a cue If you want to Page 149 Record Ler EN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 see the changes that you are making on the output click Blind on the Programmer toolbar to toggle the current session to lt on stage gt Hint You can always open an edit session lt on stage gt by un ticking Start cue list edit blind in the Show Preferences dialog box Multiple cu
48. The name of the Clarity installation file will be different depending on which version of software you are loading but will be of the form Clarity Mac x y z dmg where x y z is the version number of the software Clarity a 1 of scelecied 8 4 MB available HASP SRM RTE HASP SRM Urinstall app L amp C Clarity mpkg listaller pke Double click LSC Clarity mpkg to install the Clarity application Install Clarity Welcome to the Clarity Installer Introduction gt s You will be guided through the steps necessary tu install this software aileron Click Continue Install Clarity Standard Install on Macintosh HD_2 Introduction Destination Sel This will take 145 4 MB of space on your curnputer Installation Type nstallatics Click Install to perform a standard installation of this software on the disk Macintosh HD_2 _ Change Install Location Customize Go Back install La ReadMe rtf LSC highly recommends that you do not change the install location The amount of space that will be taken on your computer depends on whether you are installing or upgrading Clarity Click Install You might be required to enter your password to allow the installer to continue Once the installation is complete you will get a successful confirmation Page 8 Clarity If L S E C JAREN Desktop Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Install Clarity The installation was completed s
49. Universe A Selecting ArtNet above will take you to a configuration dialog specific for that connection type ArtNet supports 256 DMX universes These are arranged in 16 sub nets each containing 16 universes Select the required ArtNet Subnet and ArtNet Universe for this output then click OK 11 14 EDITING THE PATCH Select the fixture s to be edited e Patched fixtures can be selected by clicking on them The fixture s border will become highlighted when it is selected Page 81 noes eee on ne OS RAR Operator anlar de e To deselect a fixture click on it again e To select all fixtures right click on any fixture then click Select all e To deselect all fixtures click on an un patched DMX slot Selected fixtures have a black border 11 14 1 Editing a Fixtures Address Selected fixtures can be dragged and dropped onto any DMX slot or universe If any of the destination DMX slots are already occupied by an existing patch then those slots will turn red and the patch will not be permitted If you exceed the number of licensed channels for the dongle that you are using or exceed 128 channels or 32 fixtures for the free version a red warning banner will be displayed at the top of the screen to alert you to this 11 14 2 Editing a Fixtures Name or Number Select a single fixture and right click on it and then select Properties In the dialog box that opens you can alter its unit number and name Fixture unit numbers can also be
50. V2 0 Palettes Lt oe m a J E i E 2 a S O ee c po o e eee E EEETEEREREHEEE HE a te HH ae lt TEER nET Chromatic order Rosco Calcolor Rosco Cinegel Rosco Cinelux Rosco E Color Rosco Storaro Rosco Supergel Roscolux Hover the mouse over a colour to see a larger view preview of that colour 20 5 BEAM PRESETS The Beam Presets pane shows the beam presets and also shows the gobos for the currently selected fixtures happy yins Hover the mouse over a gobo to see a larger view preview of that gobo 20 6 FAVOURITES Right clicking on any individual preset or group and selecting Favourite makes this preset or group also available under the Favourites tab The same process can be used to remove a preset or group from the favourite s window The Favourites tab contains the Favourite Groups and Favourite Presets panes which can also be freely re sized by clicking and dragging on the pane dividers Favourite presets are also available in a Favourites tab in the Programmer window for quick access to favourite palettes without selecting the Palettes window 20 7 PRESETS A preset is a special type of memory that can be recorded and recalled It is stored with specific fixtures numbers or fixture types and usually with only specifically selected attributes for example only focus values When a preset is applied to selected fixtures they will change to the attribute values recorded in that preset If a cue is
51. Virtual VX Wing To select a Virtual Wing in the Control Booth window click Hardware Clear All then click on the name of the Wing Clarity VX10 or Clarity VX20 The Saleda allah selected wing appears on the screen The virtual wing is fully functional pose except that the Grand Master is not activated until a hardware USB wing is 4 Reset Comms connected Simple MIDI Page 21 Desktop Clarity enn cary Operator Manual V2 0 Wy Way Ae ia Tae VX20 Virtual Wing Display 3 17 ADDING A CUE LIST TO A VX WING e To add a cue list to a playback on a wing in the Control Booth window drag it from the cue list column onto the LCD window of the virtual wing playback If the actual wing is connected the cue list also appears in the same playback as on the virtual wing e Cue lists already on a wing playback can be moved to a different playback by dragging them on the virtual wing e To copy a cue list to another playback hold Ctrl PC or Cmd Mac whilst dragging on the virtual wing 3 18 WING PLAYBACK PAGES The playbacks on the Clarity VX10 and VX20 wings can have up to 99 pages of cue lists On the VX10 wing the Page Buttons select the current page for all 10 playbacks Playbacks and Page Buttons on a VX10 Wing On the VX20 wing playbacks are divided into 2 separate banks Playbacks 1 to 5 and 11 to 15 are in the left bank and playbacks 6 to 10 and 16 to 20 are in the right bank and each bank has Separate P
52. When the next cue is played back its recorded values appear and any values from previous cues that were not changed by this latest cue will remain on the output of the playback The unchanged values from previous cues are said to track through to the current state The values in the current cue are known as hard values and any values from previous cues are known as tracked values e Therefore in tracking mode when a cue is played back the current state on the output of the playback will be the hard values in the current cue plus any tracked values from previous cues For example Here are 3 cues played back in tracking mode Cue 1 sets the look on stage and then cues 2 and 3 only contain hard values for the changes that need to occur on stage attribute 1 attribute 2 attribute 3 Cue 1 100 50 25 Output 100 50 25 Cue 2 80 Output 80 50 25 Cue 3 25 Output 80 25 25 Cue 1 contains hard values for attributes 1 2 and 3 so when it is played back the attributes go to 100 50 and 25 respectively Cue 2 only contains a hard value for channel 1 so when it is played back attribute 1 changes to 80 and attributes 2 and 3 track through and remain at 50 and 25 Cue 3 only contains a hard value for attribute 2 so when it is played back attribute 2 changes to 25 and attributes 1 and 3 track through and remain at 80 and 25 37 7 2 Typical Tracking Operations Typical operations using the default record and playback settings tracking w
53. a fast chase that moved between the 4 corners of the stage you may not want the fixtures to jump to the full extent of the first corner in the time of the first chase step but for the 4 corners to gradually enlarge like a spiral over several chase steps If the chase rate is set to 120 BPM each step takes 0 5 seconds so the fixtures would go from default to the full extent of the first corner in 0 5 seconds and then continue from corner to corner If you set the activate time to 2 seconds the fixtures would go 25 of the way to the first corner 50 of the way to the second corner 75 to the third and then 100 to the fourth Release fade out time Default time 2 seconds This the time taken for the Cue list to fade out when released from a Playback The Activate and Release settings can both be altered by either entering a value in their respective boxes or by moving their wheel which provides smooth variable control Playback Rate Proportionally changes all of the timing information in a cue list By default it is set to 100 The range is 1 to 1000 For Example If Rate is set to 50 it slows all of the fades all times are doubled 100 no change to rates The Rate can be altered by either entering a value in its box clicking the up and down arrows or by clicking and moving the spin box roller which provides smooth variable control The Playback Rate setting can both be altered by either entering a value in the box c
54. and 25 Clarity can record two types of Block cue e Blocking incoming fixtures only This option records a cue that contains hard values for all attributes of all fixtures that are in the cue list This includes e All grabbed attributes in the programmer e All of the tracked values that would exist if the cue list had been played back e Current output values for all other attributes of the fixtures in the cue If this cue is played back in a tracking cue list it will Block any tracked values from affecting every attribute of all fixtures in the cue This type of cue is often recorded part way through a tracking cue list at the end of a theatrical scene or the end of a musical item so that subsequent edits to earlier cues will not track through into the next scene or song e Blocking all fixtures This records hard values for all attributes of all patched fixtures It effectively takes a Snapshot of Clarity s output If this cue is played back in a tracking cue list it will Block any tracked values from affecting any fixtures Any cue in an existing cue list can be changed into Block cue by editing the cue list selecting the cue then right clicking and selecting Block cue 37 8 2 Cue Only recording When you are operating in tracking mode there might be occasions where you want to playback a one off cue and you do not want the values in that cue to track into later cues in the cue list This is achieved by recording a cue as
55. and strobe on a single channel or put the Reset commands at the end of the strobe channel the LX console makes it easy to use the fixture The dimmer encoder will only ever control the dimmer and the strobe encoder will never accidentally reset the fixture You can also grab a multiple different fixture types e g mirrors with 90 degree pan and yokes with 540 degree pan and then adjust the Pan and Tilt in degrees rather than DMX values so they will actually move together as if they were the same fixture Clarity is even smart enough to switch the gobo between indexing and rotating modes as soon as you alter the rotation or indexing controls just to make your life easier and save you precious minutes when under pressure Of course there is also the ability to switch to direct IFCB mode if you want to have full manual control so Clarity offers you the best of both worlds 38 18 COPY AND PASTE Clarity allows Copy and Paste between completely different fixture types Page 212 Clarity tf L S c J2REN Hints and Tips Operator Manual V2 0 For example if you create a nice color fan and ballyhoo across a dozen LED moving wash lights and then paste it to a group of CMY moving mirror profile spots Clarity will use real word values Pan and Tilt in degrees and do automatic RGB to CMY colour conversion so that the same look is reproduced in the different fixtures The whole process takes a few seconds and 2 to 3 button presses to complete
56. and supports up to 255 DMX Universes on a single cable If a DMX output is connected to ARTNet then it appears on both Ethernet connectors To use these outputs they must be connected in the Patch window to the internal universes within Clarity See section 11 13 for details Hint When using ArtNet you can connect both Ethernets and use them as main and back up into two independent dual redundant networks The two networks can be connected into an LSC Nexus ArtNet to DMX converter which can accept both networks and will automatically change over in the event of a loss of a network The Ethernet connectors can also be used to connect the LX300 to a network or wireless access point for remote control See section 31 for details 7 2 6 DVI Video Out Two external monitors can be connected to the DVI connectors A HDMI monitor can be connected via a DVI to HDMI converter plug Not supplied Touch screens are not currently Supported See section 34 LX Tools for details on how to setup the external monitors Displays on the inbuilt touch screens can be undocked and dragged onto the external monitors 7 2 7 USB Four USB connectors are provided for connecting a keyboard mouse or memory device or charging your phone A single USB connector is also provided on the front panel below the power switch 7 2 8 MIDI MIDI In MIDI Thru and MIDI Out connectors are provided See section 30 for details on the LX300 s MIDI functions 7 2 9 S
57. attempting to control an attribute Clarity uses a priority system to determine which source has control A higher priority source will override a lower priority on the output The priority order is e Grand Master and DBO Dead Black Out control intensity only e Highlight function e Programmers e Playbacks In addition to this priority order individual playbacks operate on the LTP Latest Take Precedence principle The latest cue to be played back will output its attribute values and will override any previous playback that contained the same attributes The priority of each cue list can also be manually altered if required 37 4 ATTRI BUTE DEFAULT VALUES When an attribute is not under control of a programmer or playback Clarity s DMX output for that attribute will be its default values contained in Clarity s fixture library These values differ for each type of fixture but typically will have the intensity attribute set to zero pan and tilt set to mid range and other attributes set to obtain an open clear beam 37 5 PROGRAMMER CONTROL When a fixture attribute is controlled by a programmer the attribute is said to have been grabbed by the programmer indicated by an beside its name in the selection side bar If the programmer is used to vary the value of the attribute the attribute is said to have been touched by the programmer If the touched value is recorded into a cue list then that the attribute is no longer touched I
58. attributes in that channel set you can Save your new selections by either updating the current channel set or saving your selections as a new channel set e To update an existing channel set make your new attribute selection then click on Update e To add your own channel set click on the name box below Channel Sets and type a new name then click Add The Update button changes between Add or Update depending whether the name entered matches a name in the list When you have selected the attributes to which dynamics are to be applied click OK A separate set of Offset Centre Amplitude Top and Bottom dynamics Attribute Controls will appear for each attribute Page 100 Clarity o2 PEN Dynamics Operator Manual V2 0 17 3 CONTROLLI NG DYNAMI CS SIP if E oon E l i Waveform selection Standard Ranged Si Pan The list at the top left of the pane shows the attributes that you selected for dynamics to be applied to and at the bottom are the sets of dynamic Attribute Controls one set per attribute The controls in the centre allow you to select a waveform and to modify various aspects of that waveform The current waveform including the effects of the selected modifiers is shown on the right 17 3 1 Waveform Control The following selections control the waveform e Waveshape Select the waveshape used to modulate the selected attribute s by clicking on the drop down arrow The available waveshapes are Sine Triang
59. control is still visible but disabled 13 2 UNIVERSAL MODE PAGES Universal controls are arranged in 4 main pages that are selected by the buttons at the bottom of the screen The main pages are General Colour Beam Media Server Each page has rows of controls that you connect to the encoder wheels by using the buttons to the left of that row The Colour Beam and Media Servers have sub pages that can be selected by either holding their button and selecting from the sub pages that appear or by using the next two buttons to the right General One page Intensity Shutter Gobo Wheel 1 Gobo wheel 2 Red Colour Wheel 1 Focus Zoom sd Frost Colour Two pages Colour Page 1 Red Green Blue Amber Colour Page 2 Red si Green i Be shite _ _ Y Intensity Scroller 1 Scroller 2 Scroller 3 Scroller 4 Beam Five pages Beam Gobo Effect Effect Wheel 1 Effect Wheel Spin 1 Effect Index 1 Effect Rotate 1 Effect Wheel 2 Effect Wheel Spin 2 Effect Index 2 Effect Rotate 2 Page 88 Operal Oscar Universal Operator Manual V2 0 Y L S C CLEAR Beam Gobo whls 1 4 Gobo Wheel 1 Gobo Wheel 2 Gobo Wheel 3 Gobo Wheel 4 Gobo Wheel Spin 1 Gobo Wheel Spin 2 Gobo Wheel Spin 3 Gobo Wheel Spin 4 Gobo Index 1 Gobo Index 2 Gobo Index 3 Gobo Index 4 Gobo Rotate 1 Gobo Rotate 2 Gobo Rotate 3 Gobo Rotate 4 Beam Effect whlis 1 4 Beam Beam Animation Wheel 1 Animation Wheel 2
60. cuelist using the same button The first press plays the cue Pressing the button while the cue Is active will release it 8 7 1 Action Button Pages Action Buttons have 4 pages of memory that are selected by pressing the A B C or D buttons located between the banks i Action page buttons g y ojalojafa Having a dedicated button for each page means that any of the 240 actions is no more than two button pushes away 8 7 2 Assigning an Action Button To assign a group preset or freeset to an Action button select the page A B C or D then select the Palettes window large touch screen on LX600 or LX900 external monitor on the LX300 Page 65 LX Console Controls Ler EN Clarity D LEAR Operator Manual V2 0 Select Assign Action Button The Palettes window changes to grey Select a group preset or freeset by touching it The borders around all Action button touch screens flash red Touch an Action touch screen or press its button to make the assignment Continue to select and assign to other buttons You can use the A B C or D buttons to change pages When finished either press Assign Action Button again or press Cancel or select another screen To assign a Cuelist to an Action button select the page A B C or D then select the Control Booth window Bookmark Audio Hardwares Wh Halt Red Halt Yell Halt Select Assign Action Button The Palettes window changes to grey Select a gr
61. dragging and dropping them Selected items have a yellow border e Click a fixture or group then drag it to its new position e Multiple items can be moved by clicking each one the dragging e If you click on the background area then drag a box all items within the box are selected e To de select an item click it again e To de select all items click on the background area 12 3 ALIGNING FIXTURES Multiple fixtures and groups can also be accurately aligned by selecting them then right clicking and choosing from the menu that appears You can align them to the top to the left snap them to a grid of either 5 10 Arrange selected 20 or 50 pixels The Arrange selected option opens the Arrange Items Align top dialogue box which allows you to accurately space the selected fixtures in Align left horizontal or vertical columns specify the number of columns and the spacing v snap to arid of the fixtures eae Icon style ay Arrange Items F x ca Detailed Direction Horizontal a Combined ct compa E Fit to width Remove from view Configure view Re centre view Zoom in zoom 100 S Zoom out If you make a mistake when arranging fixture or groups you can click Undo or Redo from the Menu button in the bottom right of the touch screen To re activate normal fixture selection mode click Safe arrange again toggle action Note that the fixtures can also be aligned when not in Safe arrange mode
62. e free indicates a freeset otherwise it is a preset e The bottom right shows the attribute group s contained in the preset or freeset I Intensity P Position C Colour and B Beam e If the attribute group letters are bright green then the preset or freeset contains dynamics real time effects e A green background indicates that the preset or freeset can be applied to the currently selected fixture s e A grey background indicates that the preset or freeset cannot be applied to the selected fixture s e Clicking on a green icon applies that preset or freeset subject to the masking rules described below e A yellow border indicates that the preset is currently in use Since freesets are applied using hard values there is no concept of in use for freesets Hence they only flash their border yellow as they are applied 20 11 3 Preset and Freeset Shortcuts If you right click on a Preset or Freeset you can choose the following shortcuts e Activate This is the same as just clicking on the preset or Freeset e Activate replace This activates this preset or freeset and removes all other programming from the selected fixtures e Activate unmask This activates this preset or freeset and applies it to all attributes in the preset momentarily turning off auto mask see below Page 119 Palettes PR OPEN Clarit 2 L S C oe Operator Manual v2 0 e Combine Dynamics Only available for presets Allows a dynamic pres
63. e Insert mark cue e Reset options to standard e Edit cue e Use current options as default e Change cue only e Add to folder e Export to current Programmer 24 4 1 Cue list Folders Cue lists can be organized in folders Select one or more cue lists and click List on the menu bar and select Add to folder or right click and select Add to folder to move the selected cue list s into a new or existing folder If the selected lists are already in a folder you can also remove them this way Alternatively if there is an existing folder you can drag and drop onto the folder itself You can drag and drop multiple cue lists 24 4 2 Copying and Merging Cues When a cue list is selected above clicking on a cue allows it to be dragged and dropped to different locations within that cue list or to another cue list This can be performed as a move or a copy The selected cue can also be merged with or can replace an existing cue Dragging a cue to a new location will show the drop point as either an insert a green arrow points to a line between the two cues or as a merge a green arrow points to the selected cue Long cue lists and cues will auto scroll when dragging by holding the mouse pointer over the small arrow boxes at the end of the lists Page 157 Control Booth He L S C c Seren Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 The options to insert or merge will be automatically pre set by where you drop the cue e Dropping a cue on a cue selects the
64. effect will be equal to its recorded rate divided by 60 then multiplied by the metronome rate Run rate a rate Xx Metronome rate For example Recorded Rate Metronome Rate Run Rate with Sync FX ON 24 6 MARK CUES MOVE IN BLACK To insert a Mark cue in a cue list right click on the cue that needs the mark cue to precede it and select Insert mark cue A Mark cue is a special type of cue that you can insert in a cue list Mark cues are also known as move in black and are used to pre position fixture attributes without their movements or changes being seen on stage When you insert a Mark cue Clarity looks at the previous cue and selects any fixtures that have an intensity of zero Then using that fixture selection it looks at the following cue and copies all the attributes of those fixtures except intensity from the following cue and inserts them into the new Mark cue which is placed between the two cues When the cue list is played back and the cue prior to the mark cue finishes its fade the Mark cue is automatically executed It will move all of the attributes except intensity to their settings in the following cue They therefore move in black When the next cue is executed the fixtures fade up but nothing else changes because all other attributes were pre set by the Mark cue Mark cues have a default fade time of 0 5 seconds 24 7 AUDIO PLAYBACK You can include an MP3 music file that will be played when
65. expandable number of playbacks The columns are designed to contain looks that are to be mutually exclusive so that playback swaps between each look as it is triggered Playing a cell in a column releases any previously active cue in that same column For example one column might contain different positions for a certain type of fixture whilst another row might contain different colours for the same fixtures Unlimited rows and columns with copy drag and drop allow you to create extremely versatile playback variations Clicking in a playable cell shows the properties of that cell in the Properties pane at the bottom of the screen where you can select ranges filter attributes and generally modify the cue list in that cell to achieve unlimited combinations and permutations all without duplicating or changing the original cue lists Clicking the Properties tab at the top of the window will close the Properties pane allowing you to see a larger grid Playable cells and can be freely moved copied or swapped to any cell of the grid Each cell displays concise activity information including cue and overall list progress as well as time to release and time to start There is no fixed limit to the number of columns or rows that are available and the grid is automatically expanded whenever an item is dropped on a cell in the last row or column Page 168 Clarity tH L S G C SEN Performance Window Operator Manual V2 0 26 2 PREVIEWING CUE
66. groups 12 6 1 Background Image At the bottom of the Rig Schematic View Settings dialogue above you can select and load a background image over which your fixtures will be displayed Click on the button and navigate to your image The Background zoom controls allow you to scale your image to suite you screen size on the rig view To remove a background image click on the X button f i a es eee ee omen L a ur Li a Li ee Examples of Rig mode with background image 12 7 SELECTING FIXTURES IN RIG VIEW Fixtures to be programmed can be selected by clicking on them Selected fixtures have a blue border Click again to de select a fixture If you click on a fixture then drag over multiple fixtures Clarity draws a line showing the drag path and selects each fixture that you drag over Page 86 Operator Manual V2 0 L S C cCJ2TER If you click on the background area then drag a box all fixtures within the box are selected When multiple fixtures are selected the selection order numbers are shown on the selected icons You can select multiple fixtures from different views The order in which you select the fixtures is used for certain effects such as fans and dynamics and can be also utilized by the Programmers sort function Your fixture selection including its order can be saved to a group by clicking To Group in the menu bar and giving the group a name Group icons have a dotted blue borde
67. in the cue The default fade time is 2 seconds 23 2 4 Existing Cue list When recording a cue to an existing cue list the new cue is usually appended to the end of the cue list In the Record Cue dialog box select Existing Cue list allows you to select either Recent or All Tap on a cue list to select it The Cues pane lists all of the existing cues in the cue list The default setting is to append the new cue to the end of the existing cue list at the position of the green bar as shown below To insert the new cue between any existing cues touch a cue and the new cue will be inserted before that cue It will be automatically given an appropriate decimal point cue number To Merge or Replace and existing cue touch either Merge or Replace then touch the existing cue to be affected Cue Only changes revert on next cue is an advanced function When you are playing back in tracking mode there might be occasions where you want to playback a one off cue and you do not want the values in that cue to track into later cues in the cue list This is achieved by recording a cue as cue only Ticking the Cue only changes revert on next cue will record a cue that contains all of the touched values in the programmer and tag those channels for playback as q only When a cue list is played back in tracking mode any channels that are tagged as q only will only affect the output state for that cue When the next cue is played bac
68. keypad is used for fixture number selection and command line programming and patching 8 5 4 Command Centre The Command Centre has a touch screen divided into 8 virtual buttons with dynamic labels These 8 buttons are duplicated by the 8 real buttons on either side of the screen You can use either the virtual button or the real button to make a selection The functions of these buttons will change dynamically as you perform various functions on Clarity For example when you start to program a cue list the Record button will create a new cue list and record the first cue It then changes to show the name of that cue list and that it ready to Save the second cue in the cue list There are 4 pages of command buttons for the Command Centre touch screen the default page and 3 momentary user pages The 3 buttons below the command centre touch screen are used to momentarily select the user pages by holding down the desired page button You can configure the buttons on the 3 user pages with your favorite commands To configure the buttons on a user page press and hold all 3 page buttons at the same time A dialogue box appears where you can select a function and assign it to a button The default page cannot be changed Page 54 Clarity t yo ren LX Console Controls Operator Manual V2 0 L S C c JETEN The buttons on the default page are Clear or Close as appropriate for the current programmer The label also displays the name of current
69. left of LX300 External monitor to the right of LX300 Done LX300 Monitor Configuration 34 2 5 Networking The LX Tools Networking button allows you to setup the network connection of the two Ethernet ports Page 196 LSC Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Ethernet 1 i identity DHCP Static IP Address Gateway RX packets 0 TX packets 0 LX Tools Ethernet 2 H identify DHCP Address 192 168 1 124 Gateway 192 168 1 1 RX packets 2089990 TX packets 9125 Static IP See also section 35 for details on how to allow LSC to connect to your console via the internet to resolve problems Page 197 Technical Support tf L S E C OPEN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 34 2 6 Calibrate Touch Screens The LX Tools Calibrate Touch Screens button allows you to calibrate the inbuilt touch screens Select touchscreen you wish to calibrate Click Back when finished Built in Monitor You should ensure monitors are configured properly before calibrating touchscreen s Otherwise touch mask may not be displayed properly 34 2 7 Clock The LX Tools Clock button allows you to set the Clock that is displayed beside the Playbacks 34 2 8 Diagnostics The LX Tools Diagnostics should only be run when instructed by LSC technical support It requires a password 34 2 9 System Information The LX Tools System Information button provides system information such as e Software versions e Bootloaders
70. options in the Contents Options pane for playback in that mode However you can change these options if you desire or select exactly which attribute groups you want to include in the cue See section 23 2 5 Many playback options can be selected in the Mode Chase lock to Tempo and Priority panes and also by ticking your required Options Selecting these settings and options is not essential when recording a new cue list because these panes and options are also available when you configure a Playback and in the Control Booth window You can save programming time by ignoring all of these settings and configuring them later if needed prior to playback If you do change any of these settings they can be restored back to their default values by pressing Reset Red boxes flash around the various sections of the screen Touch a box to reset the values within the box These Playback settings are described in section 24 2 Playback 23 2 3 Cue Options The Cue Options pane offers the following options e Halt The cue is manually played by its GO button e Follow The cue is automatically played immediately after the previous cue finishes e Wait time The cue is automatically played after a wait time after the previous cue finishes e Delay Time The time from when the cue starts until the selected attribute s begin to change The default delay time is 0 seconds e Fade Time The time taken for the attribute s to change to the value
71. or T then that attribute is inverted e If Pan and Tilt have been swapped then TP is shown instead of PT Page 78 oe pi a Patching Fixtures Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C JOnER Normal Inverted Pan Inverted Tilt Inverted Pan amp Tilt Swapped Pan amp Tilt e To change the alignment status of a fixture right click on the fixture then select either invert pan invert tilt or swap pan amp tilt Note This action affects all currently selected fixtures See also section 21 9 9 Flip Flip will alter the current pan and tilt values of the selected moving yoke fixture s to the other possible combination of values that achieves the same position on stage 11 9 I NTENSITY FADE PROFI LES Intensity Fade Profiles are the relationship or transfer characteristic between input control signal and intensity output of a fixture or dimmer Clarity provides several intensity fade profiles from which to choose to suit the application of your fixture or dimmer To select an Intensity Fade Profile for a fixture s in the Patch window right click on the selected fixture s then choose Set fade profile from the drop down box Intensity Fade Profile Click on the Fade curve drop down box and select the required curve Page 79 Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Patching Fixtures Linear Snap at start Snap at end Very slow at start J very slow at end Slow at start Slow at end r V
72. playbacks including those set to N B ignore release al 8 6 15 Clearing a Playback To clear remove a cue list from a playback double tap the playback s touch screen From the Assign tab tap Clear Playback All of the playback touch screens flash red Tap the touch screen of the playback to be cleared 8 6 16 Edit To edit a cue on a playback press Edit All buttons of all playbacks flash Press any button of the playback to be edited See section 23 3 for details on editing a cue 8 6 17 Group Masters Playback faders can also be configured as either Inhibitive Additive Scale or Limiting group masters When a playback is converted into a Group Master it replaces its previous cue list if any and instead controls the intensity of the selected group as determined by your choice of either Additive Scale Inhibiting or Limiting mastering as described below To create a Group Master double tap the playback s touch screen In the Assign tab tap the Groups tab at the bottom of the window Select the required Group then select the Master Type drop down box and choose the Master Type e Additive The fader level is added to the current intensity level of all fixtures in the group For example if the fader is at 50 each fixture would get 50 added onto its current level So fixtures at 25 50 and 75 would end up at 75 100 and 100 percent e Scale This scales ea
73. position panes but there is still only a single preset Automatically generated library Groups are identified by the word auto in their box Library items cannot be edited renamed or deleted however they can be duplicated and the copy can then be edited renamed or deleted by right clicking on it 20 2 ARRANGING PALETTES AND GROUPS If you click Safe arrange all presets favourites and groups become inactive This allows you to re arrange and organize the individual presets or group icons by dragging and dropping them without activating them To re activate the window click Safe arrange toggle action The icons in each pane can be automatically arranged at any time by right clicking in a blank area of the pane and selecting auto arrange 20 3 GROUPS A group is a selection of fixtures Groups can be created by selecting the required fixtures in the required order and selecting Record then Group and entering a name The selection order in the group is used by Clarity when applying effects and freesets Groups can also be recorded in the programmer by selecting the fixtures and clicking To Group 20 4 COLOUR PRESETS The Colour Presets pane shows the colour presets and also has a configurable standard swatch colour picker You can select between Lee GAM and various Rosco colour swatches and can display the colours in either chromatic or numeric order Right click to configure the display Page 115 Clarity Operator Manual
74. programmer session e g Programmer 1 or Name of cue list being edited Programmers are selected in the Programmer tab on the monitor Record or Save Save will also display the list cue name Undo last programmer action displays action to be undone e g Undo clear position Append last displays the name of the cue list that will be appended to Undo last control booth action e g Undo delete cue Name displays last item to be named e g Name new group Select all or contents shows Select all or Select contents as appropriate Preview a fade transition displays the cue name that will be previewed in edit mode See section 21 8 4 The 10 buttons between the touch screen and the keypad are Highlight lights RED when active This is a toggle on off action See section 21 8 9 Blind This is a toggle on off action See section 21 8 11 Preset When pressed after the Record button it records a Preset Also used to apply a preset For example pressing Preset 2 applies preset number 2 to the selected fixture s Update See section 21 8 8 Group When pressed after the Record button it records a Group Used in conjunction with a group number to select a group For example pressing Group 2 selects group 2 GoTo When followed by a cue number it makes the current Playback go directly to that cue number Command Opens the command line window for command line programming See section
75. screen This makes it easier to see individual fixtures when many fixtures have been selected and gives easier control of attributes when dragging on the touch screen 8 4 5 Virtual Wheels When either Universal Direct or Graphical Gobo mode is selected you can display Virtual Wheels instead of control widgets by selecting the V Wheels button at the bottom of the screen __ ped Virtual Wheels ITEE V Wheels Touch anywhere within the wheel to get control then drag a circle shape You can drag a circle to the extremities of the screen to get finer control Page 50 Clarity LSC Or LX Console Controls Operator Manual V2 0 8 4 6 Intensities Intensity mode is a fixture selection intensity control and visualiser tool Intensity Fixtures are selected by touching them Selected fixtures have a yellow border Touch again to de select a fixture If you touch a fixtures number then drag over multiple fixtures Clarity draws a line showing the drag path and selects each fixture that you drag over If you touch on the background area then drag a box all fixtures within the box are selected To set the intensity of the selected fixtures touch on the intensity bargarph and drag or use the intensity wheel See section 15 for more details on Intensity mode 8 4 7 Graphical When you have selected a fixture s graphical mode provides a visual display for controlling attributes Graphical controls are arranged in 3 mai
76. screen below it See section 8 6 for descriptions of the Playback operations Page 36 Clarity gt c ye rsh Lx600 Operator Manual V2 0 CLEAR 6 LX600 Console 6 1 OVERVIEW jji FE Eg pg Ea TELER ee ma Ea LX600 The LX600 has the following features Pivoting monitor panel One 10 4 inch encoder wheel touch screen One 17 touch screen 15 motorized Fader Playbacks Each playback has a fader with integral RGB mode indicator plus Select Go and Pause Back buttons 99 pages of playback memory split into left and right pages 60 Action Buttons for Group Palette Preset Cue each with LCD touch screen for labelling and advanced control 4 pages of memory Any pair of faders can be assigned into Split mode for crossfade playback future feature Four DMX512 A output connectors XLR5 DMX capacity up to 4 096 DMX slots Slide Out alphanumeric Keyboard Two DVI monitor outputs MIDI In Out Thru SMPTE LTC Linear Time Code input Motorized Grand Master Stereo Audio In amp Out on balanced XLR3 Dual Gb Ethernet ports PowerCon power input Two IEC power outputs 160GB Shock protected disc storage system Page 37 LX600 LSC C JanRSN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 6 2 LX600 REAR PANEL 6 2 1 Power I nput and Mains Switch A Power Con mains input socket and mains switch connects to the LX300 universal power supply that operates on input voltages be
77. screen area and detail WE A Je L Minimized Compact Capped or Expanded Minimized only displays a heading for the type of fixture Compact uses a one line display for the type of fixture Capped uses a maximum of 5 lines for the type of fixture Expanded shows all fixtures of that type 27 7 NEW WINDOW To create a new un docked window of the currently selected Level window click New Multiple windows can be opened and each window can be set to any of the available display tabs Multiple windows are most useful when using large monitors or multi screen set ups Page 175 Intensity Levels Window Ra LS C c 2r EN Clarity Y LEAR Operator Manual V2 0 28 Intensity Levels 28 1 OVERVI EW The Intensity Levels view complements the normal Levels views by providing intensity specific information with optional auto compression hiding levels that are at zero This makes it much easier to see all of the channels in use when there a large quantity of fixtures The window provides two default views e Console which by default shows the source of each fixtures level and hides zero levels e Follow which by default follows the current cue list and shows its contents You can open New windows and set them to show either of the above views and also customize their settings to your requirements as described below Views can be undocked and dragged onto other monitors 28 2 VIEW SETINGS To con
78. select a playback by touching on its dedicated small touch screens above it 8 6 3 the previous step Playback Controls gt Plays the next cue ll K Pause Back Pauses a fades in progress If no fade is in progress if fades back to Function Il kd Snap to the previous cue Page 57 LX Console Controls Oy LS C c Seren Clarity a LE Are Operator Manual V2 0 e Function gt Snap to the next cue e Select Connects that playback to the main gt play button and main Il K Pause Back button Also used to select a playback when editing etcetera The Main Go and Main Il kK Pause Back buttons control the currently selected playback A Playbacks is selected by touching it s touch screen The currently selected playback has its name displayed in reverse video white text on a black background 8 6 4 Playback Touch Screens pee eeer Each screen shows the name of the assigned cue list Cue lists that have been configured as a chase have their name displayed in italics The vertical yellow line shows the division between left green bar and right blue bar pages see below 8 6 5 Assign or Clear a Playback To assign a cue list or chase to a playback double tap anywhere on an empty playback s touch screen The Playbacks window opens on the touch screen The Cue lists tab at the bottom of the window shows all of the available cue lists and chases e To assign a Playback tap th
79. select your fixtures then drag them into place on the matrix Multiple fixtures can be selected by using Function click You can rotate the device by 180 by holding Function whilst dragging Double tapping Function rotates it by 90 You can also rotate the device whilst dragging by using an external keyboard and holding the Shift key 90 or Ctrl 180 or both 270 If you use fixtures from the Intensity tab the resultant output from the matrix will be in monochrome When multiple fixtures are selected and dragged onto the matrix the Assign multiple fixtures to matrix dialog will appear and allow you to specify in what order you would like the selected fixtures to be laid out in the matrix Sy Assign multiple fixtures to matrix MR When dropping multiole Fickures onko the matris the addtional itunes Flow ints position as specified by the optiona beka Hi SiS Sst SEHIR x Jh oa The default order is left to right top to bottom Click on the desired ordering icon then click OK When fixtures are on the matrix they can be dragged to reposition them To remove a fixture from the matrix drag it back to the device list When all fixtures are correctly placed on the matrix click OK A PixSrc tab is automatically created in the Selection Sidebar It contains the virtual fixtures that are associated with each Pixel Source as described above 18 5 EDITING A MATRIX To edit or check the settings of an exis
80. set to Solo safe it will not be affected by the solo action of any other playbacks Page 154 Clarity Ho LS C c ye Ren Control Booth Operator Manual V2 0 24 2 2 Cue list Chase Options Length bars beats 3 0 Clicking the drop down box in the Chase pane allows you to select the chase mode for the currently selected Cue list The 5 choices are e Off The cue list does not chase and behaves like a normal cue list It will use the Delay and Fade times and Halt or Follow settings of each step This is the Default setting e Forwards The cue list will run as a Chase in the forwards direction It ignores the Delay Fade Halt and Follow settings of each step and uses the BPM and Xfade scale settings below e Backwards As for Forwards but in the reverse direction e Bounce The cue list will run as a Chase and will automatically change direction when it reaches the first or last step e Random The cue list will run as a Chase with random step selection Note When a cue list is set to any of the chase modes above its name will be displayed in Italics If any of the chase options above are selected the following settings affect the chase e Chase Rate Sets the chase RATE in Beats Per Minute e Chase Xfade Sets the transition between steps When set to 0 the chase snaps from step to step When set to any other value the chase Xfades Cross fades from step to step The duration of the Xfade is a percentage of the s
81. the changes are discarded 15 2 1 Settings for Channel Controller Mode Channel controller mode of operation is achieved by the selection of certain user preferences and by the method in which Clarity is operated On the main menu click Show Preferences and set the following User Preferences 17 User Preferences Fy in 100 00 i e Start cue list edit blind Not ticked Now when you edit a cue list the edit session will be live lt on stage gt e Connect fader for cue list edit v Ticked If a cue list on a playback is edited the playbacks intensity fader controls the output level of its edit session e Programmer follow selected playback v Ticked If multiple edit sessions are open the current session being edited will follow the selected playback e Show unit number instead of fixture name V Ticked This preference is not essential for Channel Control mode but it aids its operation because it Shows the unit number of the selected fixtures name in the programmer attributes tab The unit number is used when selecting fixtures using command line programming Command line programming can speed up fixture selection See section 22 for details 15 2 2 Operating in Channel Controller Mode When playing your show you can basically forget about the programmer If you playback cues and you want to make changes you edit the cue by pressing Edit and then any flashing button of the playback to be edited The edit s
82. the left of their Attribute Control Dynamics Indicator N Page 103 Matrix gt YOrPEN Clarit L S C ORAR Operator Manual V2 0 18 Matrix 18 1 OVERVIEW The encoder touch screens Matrix mode allows you to place fixtures on a two dimensional grid and then display static or moving imagery on them Therefore the fixtures output can be tightly integrated into a complete lighting and visual show Clarity allows you to control and program the imagery just like any another lighting fixture The imagery can be displayed in colour on RGB RGBA and RGBW Red Green Blue Amber White LED fixtures or in monochrome on any fixtures that have an intensity channel When you patch LED arrays Clarity automatically sub divides them so that you can either work with the entire array or access the individual cells For LED types that don t have dedicated intensity channels virtual intensity channels are automatically created 18 2 TERMINOLOGY e Pixel Matrix This is the physical mapping of lighting fixtures onto a rectangular area e Pixel Source Each Pixel Matrix contains one or more Pixel Sources You can add Pixel Sources to a Pixel Matrix by clicking New Source e Media Each Pixel Source can contain one or more media files You can add media to each Pixel Source by selecting that Pixel Source and clicking Add Media e Virtual Fixture Clarity creates a virtual fixture for each Pixel Source Virtual fixtures appea
83. the new fixture s that you are patching Clicking Next reveals the clone dialog box y Clone from Existing Fixtures Studio Spot 250 1 Studio Spot 250 1 1 Studio Spot 250 1 2 Studio Spot 250 1 3 Studio Spot 250 1 4 Mac 250 Mode 23 6 Studia Spot 250 1 5 The new fixtures being patched are automatically selected as the Destination Devices All existing patched fixtures are available in the Available Devices pane Choose the source device s by selecting them in the Available Devices pane then transfer your selection to the Source Devices pane by clicking gt gt Incorrectly selected Source Devices can be moved back to the Available Devices pane by selecting them and clicking lt lt Page 76 Clarity tf L S c J2REN Patching Fixtures Operator Manual V2 0 Presets will be automatically cloned for the new fixtures however you can choose whether or not to clone cues buy using the Clone Cues check box To clone the programming of the source devices to the destination devices click Finish 11 4 1 Cloning Example Program a show with 10 scanA fictitious fixtures Move show to new venue that does not have any scanA fixtures but has yokeB fixtures instead Patch same quantity of yokeB fixtures possibly on a different universe and clone them from scanA fixtures All presets and cues if checked in clone box are updated to include both types of fixtures The show runs in new v
84. the same for all of the attributes of the fixtures This is indicted by IPCB Intensity Position Colour and Beam beside the fixture names Intensity Tilt Colour Wheel Mode Go se eneenceeseuseenneeceesessreestensessesssensanesessssssuseaseeassenenssaneesssssseneeneeessessenseperenesssssssansesssesssssenseesessessseenees een eeeneenrereetnrenseeaerastnseaseeereesesseaseenresnessesenssnssersnsseaseaseestaaeeerenseeseeseepeeseesensenssnesensnnseasenstnsenssenreesees Timing Control sets times for IPCB attribute groups Filters are used to select different attributes so that individual times can be set The Timing pane contains filters for the attribute groups of Intensity Position Colour and Beam Selecting a filter s name will result in a new Timing Control appearing showing potential timing information for the filtered attributes of the selected fixtures 8 devices T Beam F 1 P T Beam F 3 P T Beam F 5 P T Beam F P T Beam F a P T Beam F 1 IPCB eam F S IPCB eam F S IPCB eam F 7 IPCB T Beam F amp IPCB ERRER Position filter has been selected The lower Timing Control still controls IPCB Intensity Position Colour Beam but the new Timing Control above it has been filtered for P Position information only No change has yet been made and the new Timing Control is only temporary as indicated by the paler colour and the menu button on the Timing mode changing to Confirm or presence of the
85. ticked the user preferences as set in the dialog box and the new cue list defaults are retained e If Store Preferences Globally is NOT ticked the default preferences and standard cue list settings are loaded ar User Preferences K a Ki a Ki v Ki Ki a a Ki E E E v a Reset To reset the user preferences to their default settings shown above click Show Settings Preferences Reset e Auto load last show Default un ticked If ticked when Clarity is started it will automatically load the last used show e Save Restore playback state Default ticked If ticked Clarity will include currently active playback states when saving a show so that loading that show restores its exact playback state e Snap restore playback Default un ticked If ticked all playbacks will snap to their saved values when Clarity loads Page 190 eee C Janna Preferences Operator Manual V2 0 L S C JAREN If not ticked they will fade to their values using the fade times recorded in the cues Only available if Save Restore playback is ticked See also DMX holdoff after load below e Programmer release intensity first Default ticked If ticked when a Programmer is cleared all intensity attributes will fade out before any other attributes are cleared This prevents unwanted movements and colour changes being seen on the output If not ticked all attributes are cleared at the same time
86. to 2 universes of DMX output e LSC Clarity VX20 wing provides up to 4 universes of DMX output QX1 QX2 Provides 1 universe of DMX output Provides 2 universes of DMX output The QX1 and QX2 interfaces are powered directly from the computer s USB connector Connect your DMX controlled equipment to the relevant DMX universe connectors The DMX outputs are fully isolated from the USB input Note that the DMX output has to be patched in Clarity before it will work See section 11 12 for details 3 7 DESKTOP ARTNET OUTPUT ArtNet is a protocol that is transmitted over Ethernet LAN Local Area Network or WAN Wide Area Network and supports up to 255 DMX Universes on a single cable To use ArtNet it must be connected to the internal universes within Clarity in the Patch window See section 11 13 for details 3 8 VX10 PLAYBACK WING Control of Playback on a computer can be augmented by adding an LSC Clarity VX10 playback wing This provides 10 fader Playbacks with LCD displays and multiple page selection a Grand Master and DBO Dead Black Out two DMX512 universe outputs remote trigger inputs and a secure compartment for installing your license dongle and a front panel USB port Page 10 Clarity ee L S C je 558 Desktop Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Connect the VX10 wing to a USB port of your computer using the cable provided The VX10 is powered directly from the computer s USB connector A separate power supply is requir
87. track making Clarity ideal for Christmas light displays and themed environments In theatrical shows it can be used to trigger sound effects at the same time as lighting cues so the lightning flash occurs in sync with the sound 38 12 AUTOMATED FOLLOW SPOT AUDIO CUES You can use the audio output of Clarity to accurately cue you follow spot operators Record your voice with the cue as an audio file then load it onto Clarity Then for each upcoming follow spot cue place a script command in the cue list and Clarity plays back the audio file containing the follow spot instructions Because these instructions are in the cue list delay times can be used to ensure that upcoming instructions are issued at an appropriate time Audio out from Clarity is fed into the follow spot s communications system and this set up Saves saying the same thing over again for each show for those spot operators who somehow fail to take their own notes nor can remember their cues Total flexibility and it takes only seconds to implement with Clarity Thanks Andrei This technique can also be used when touring in foreign countries where they don t speak the Same language as you Get an interpreter to record all the commands in several different languages then load up whichever language is needed based on the country in which you are operating 38 13 SIMPLE RGB MIXING Sometimes you may want to assign 3 faders to give live control of the Red Green and Blue colours
88. trackball does not have a button to click and release Therefore a trackball movement cannot be finalized by a release of a button so this time sets the delay from when the trackball stops moving to when the move is finalized A finalized move can be undone by clicking on the Undo button e Max movie pixels Default 10800 pixels Movies are pre processed by Clarity before being sent to the matrix display If the movie is of a much higher resolution than the matrix can display then a lot of processing power can be wasted on unseen resolution This preference limits the resolution to be pre processed and thus saves processing power e Default fade time Default 2000 ms 2 seconds Page 192 eee C Janna Preferences Operator Manual V2 0 L S C JAREN Set the default fade time that will be used for new parameter values in the programmer when recording a cue e Blind time Default 1000 ms The fade time that the programmer uses to go in and out of blind mode entered in ms milliseconds For example 2 seconds 2000ms e Clear Time Default 1000 ms The fade out time that the programmer uses when it is cleared entered in ms milliseconds For example 2 seconds 2000ms e DMX holdoff after load s Default 2 seconds All output is delayed for n the time you set seconds after loading a show In the unlikely event that Clarity stops responding and needs to be restarted the playbacks will hold the last D
89. you record a preset that contains multiple fixtures with different values for each fixture then that preset will be applicable only to the specific fixtures used to record the preset 20 7 2 Fixture Type Presets If you record a preset that contains a single value or if all values of the selected fixtures are the same then the preset is recorded against the fixture type The preset will then be applicable to all fixtures of that type even ones added afterwards 20 8 FREESETS Freesets are fixture independent and store values that can be generically applied to any selected fixtures no matter what the type When freesets are used to set fixture attribute values and the look is recorded in a cue the current value from the Freeset is translated to suit the destination fixtures and stored in the cue Note that because values are translated when the Freeset is applied Freeset updates won t affect existing cues The advantage of freesets is that the values in a Freeset are automatically re interpreted to suit the destination fixture For example Select a dimmer and set its intensity to 100 then record it as a Freeset Select a Clay Paky Stage Scan then apply that Freeset to it The Freeset interprets the value and knows that a Stage Scan s intensity attribute must be set to 128 for it to output full intensity If the same Freeset is applied to a dimmer it will set its intensity to 255 The same applies to all attribute groups e Record a blue Fr
90. you to control the attributes of the selected fixture in the current programmer as selected in the Programmer window There are 2 programmers available and programmer 1 is selected by default 8 4 1 Rig Rig mode is a fixture selection tool and 2 dimensional visualiser fo Hs i Mi a i el i he he ine iow ow La LL La Le he belle EEE FLERE OOOO ie i e igh i Fo ui TE Rig It shows a geographical view of the patched fixtures and groups which you can arrange so that they are positioned as they actually are in your rig This allows you to rapidly find and select fixtures for programming by touching them Selected fixtures have a blue border Touch again to de select a fixture If you touch a fixture then drag over multiple fixtures Clarity draws a line showing the drag path and selects each fixture that you drag over If you touch on the background area then drag a box all fixtures within the box are selected When selecting fixtures every fixture or group that you select is added to the current selection This allows you to build up complex selections of fixtures Re selecting a currently selected fixture or group removes it from the current selection Clarity calls this the selection phase As soon as you change any values of any of the selected fixtures using the other modes of the touch screen Clarity changes to the programming phase When the next fixture or group selection is made Clarity changes back to
91. 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 o U NNN Basic Operation 1 Overview 2 Patching 3 Programming 4 Playback 9 4 1 Performance Window 10 Customizing Clarity 10 1 Overview 10 2 LX Tools 10 3 Touch Screen Operation 10 4 Dockable Windows 10 5 Resizing Panes 10 6 Rig Mode Icons AED OSN 10 7 Universal and Direct 10 8 Attribute Control Size 10 9 Preferences 10 10 Keyboard Shortcuts 11 Patching Fixtures 11 1 Overview 11 2 Spreadsheet View 11 3 Patching Fixtures 11 3 1 Drag and Drop Patching 11 3 2 Patching Dimmers 11 3 3 Clarity Universes 11 4 Clone from other fixture s 11 4 1 Cloning Example 11 5 Keypad Patching 11 5 1 Patching Commands 11 6 Multi Patch 11 6 1 Keypad Multi Patch 11 6 2 Copy Multi Patch 11 6 3 Removing Multi Patches 11 7 Selecting Fixtures 11 8 Inverting Swapping Attributes 11 9 Intensity Fade Profiles 11 10 Minimum and Maximum Intensity 11 11 Custom Fixtures 11 12 Connecting Output Devices 11 13 Configuring ArtNet Outputs 11 14 Editing the Patch 11 14 1 Editing a Fixtures Address 11 14 2 Editing a Fixtures Name or Number 11 14 3 Deleting Fixtures 11 14 4 Un Patching Fixtures 11 14 5 Exporting the Patch 12 Rig 12 1 Overview 12 2 Arranging Fixtures 12 3 Aligning Fixtures 12 4 Fixture Icons 12 5 Multiple Views 12 5 1 Creating a new View 12 6 Configuring a View 12 6 1 Background Image 12 7 Selecting Fixtures In Rig View 13 Universal 13 1 Overview 13 2 Univer
92. 00 0 68 Yellow 0 2000 ie oT oT iki 0 92 wlr o 2000 H Studio Color 575 2 Pan 0 16 Cross fgonky O 000 Studio Color 575 2 Tilt O18 32767 fgonlyio 2000 25 5 LIVE EDIT INDICATION In the Control Booth any cue lists being edited live lt on stage gt have a red E beside their name i StdColPos StdSptPos TBCal StdCol Col StdSptCol StdClrLooks StdSptLooks StdSntReam E Cue list being LIVE edited on stage 25 6 BLOCK CUE Cues that are recorded to be used in tracking playback mode only contain the changes that are required when the cue is played back In tracking playback any unchanged values from previous cues will track through to the present state If you want to prevent values from tracking through to a cue you can edit the cue and change it into a Block cue When you do this Clarity takes all of the tracked values that would exist on the output of the playback as if the cue list had been played back and converts them into hard values then adds them to the cue See Operating Concepts and Terminology at the end of this manual for more details e To change a cue into a blocking cue edit the cue as described above then in the edit session in the programmer window right click on the cue and select Block cue All Block cues in a cue list can be unblocked When you unblock a cue list Clarity compares each cue to the cue that preceded it and removes any duplicated values Therefore each cue in the cue list will on
93. 15 3 Universal Controller The Universal controller at the bottom of the Programmer window can also be used to control the attributes of all selected fixtures These controls work with any type of fixture that has been selected and are especially useful to simultaneously control selections of mixed fixture types Open Gobo Clicking and dragging in these controls uses low mouse gearing for accurate control but can be made even finer by holding down Shift whilst dragging 3 15 4 Creating a Lighting Look Select the fixture s to be controlled Use the Attribute Controls or the Universal Controller to get the desired look To record the look as the first cue in a cue list click Record In the Record dialog that opens accept the defaults and click Record Page 20 ae C je ear Desktop Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C sar Select fixtures and adjust attributes to set the next look To record this look as the next cue in the Cue list click Append Last Repeat until all cues in the cue list have been recorded Click Clear to clear all attributes from the Programmer 3 16 PLAYBACK Desktop Clarity provides several means of playing back the cues that you have recorded 3 16 1 Control Booth Clicking on the Control Booth tab reveals the Control booth window Show Patch Rig Programmer Palettes control Booth Performance Levels Intensity Levels ul Clear All Release All DBO i i earn lists C Bookmark Audio Hardware ee hiid bank
94. 22 Time When followed by a number seconds it enters times in the command line Rem Opens the command line window with the command Remainder entered for you The Remainder command is used to so set the level of all unselected fixtures that are currently grabbed in the programmer to a level that you specify This is usually used to dim out the unselected fixtures so that the selected fixture s can be easily identified and focused For example turn on fixtures 1 through 10 at 80 Now select fixture 1 and press Dim Off Fixtures 2 through 10 turn off and fixture 1 is still selected To reverse the Remainder Dim command use the programmer Undo button You can also specify a level for the Rem command For example turn on fixtures 1 through 10 at 80 Now select fixture 2 and press Dim 25 Fixtures 1 and 3 through 10 are set to 25 Clear Sel Clears all fixture selections in the current programmer It lights red when any fixtures are selected Page 55 LX Console Controls He L S C c Seren Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 The 5 buttons to the right if the Intensity wheel are e Copy Copies the attribute values of the currently selected fixture or multiple fixtures to the clipboard e Paste Pastes the attribute values of the clipboard to the currently selected fixture or multiple fixtures e Delete Knocks out the selected fixtures from the programmer either on its own or as part of a command line string e Grab Single t
95. 25 Desktop Clarity c ye PEN Clarity sL SC JEE Operator Manual V2 0 e AVX 20 wing has 4 groups of playbacks 1 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 15 and 16 to 20 If a cue list is loaded on a playback and there are un used clear playbacks to the right of the loaded playback in the same group of 5 then the unused playbacks can now be linked to the loaded playback to provide greater live control The previously unused playback s buttons and faders can now be used for live control of Chase Rate Playback Rate FX Rate and FX Amplitude To create extended controls on a wing in the Control Booth window Right click on the loaded playback s LCD window of the virtual wing playback and choose either single 2 3 4 or 5 columns The number of columns that are available depends upon the number of clear playbacks to the right and in the same group of five playbacks Clear Set as Group Master Clear Toggle soft menus Set as Group Master Single column 2 columns Toggle soft menus 3 columns Single column 4 columns 2 columns 5 columns 3 columns Lock this playback Lock this playback The 4 playbacks to the right are clear so up to The 2 playbacks to the right are clear so up to 5 columns can be selected 3 columns can be selected Each column represents a playback on the wing e The first single column is the playback loaded with the cue list e If you choose 2 columns then the playback to its right controls that cue lists Chase Rate
96. 8 25 3 Editing Follow or Wait Times 164 21 9 3 Remainder Dim 138 25 3 1 Saving the Edit 166 21 9 4 Controls ______o______ _ __ 138 25 4 Editing Channels to be Cue Only __ 166 21 9 5 Renumber Fixtures C d 383 25 4 1 Cue Only Indication 166 21 9 6 Grab DMX ___ 138 95 5 Live Edit Indication 167 21 3 7 Copy 138 25 6 Block Cue 167 21 9 8 Paste_ _ 138 i 21 9 9 Flip 139 25 7 Undo Redo Edits 167 21 9 10 Personalizing the Toolbar 139 25 8 Exporting a Cue to the Programmer __ 167 21 10 DMX Input 139 21 11 Parking Fixtures 139 26 Performance Window 168 21 12 Universal Control Panel 140 26 1 Overview 168 21 13 Attribute Controls 140 awina Cialicte 21 13 1 Attribute Quick Menus 141 ae el ke Cue lsts___ rp 21 13 2 Fixture Quick Menus _ 141 ETN T E 21 13 3 Attribute Control Size iai AGa Adapting Existing Programming 163 21 13 4 Attribute Control Order 142 26 4 1 Sync FX 169 21 14 Fanning Attributes 142 26 5 Managing the Grid 170 21 14 1 Offset Fanning 142 26 5 1 Copying Active Cells to a Common Row 170 21 14 2 Fanning Selection Order 143 26 5 2 Cell Properties Ci 21 14 3 Fanning in the Universal Control Panel 143 26 6 The Metronome 172 26 6 1 Metronome Settings 173 22 Command Line Programming144 26 7 Performance Freesets Groups 173 22 1 Overview 144 22 2 Fixture Selection 144 af reves VUNDAN Sa 22 3 Intensity Entry 144 27 1 Overview 74 22 4 Intensity Wheel 145 2ra DMX vate
97. A output connectors XLR5 DMX capacity up to 2 048 DMX slots External USB alphanumeric Keyboard One DVI monitor output MIDI In Out Thru Audio In amp Out via 3 5mm sockets Dual Gb Ethernet ports IEC Power Input 160GB Shock protected disc storage system 5 2 LX300 REAR PANEL Page 32 Te oa Ca eS eS es C Opera ORSR 1X300 Operator Manual V2 0 ed L S C JAREN 5 2 1 Power I nput and Mains Switch An IEC mains input socket and mains switch connects to the LX300 universal power supply that operates on input voltages between 100 volts and 240 volts 50 60 Hertz AC The maximum power consumption is 450 watts 5 2 2 DMX Outputs Four DMX universes A B C and D are available To use these outputs they must be connected in the Patch window to the internal universes within Clarity The LED below each DMX connector lights when it is connected See section 11 for details 5 2 3 Ethernet Two identical Ethernet connectors provide DMX output via ArtNet ArtNet is a protocol that is transmitted over Ethernet LAN Local Area Network or WAN Wide Area Network and supports up to 255 DMX Universes on a single cable If an internal DMX universe is connected to ARTNet in the Patch window then it appears on both Ethernet connectors See section 11 13 for details Hint When using ArtNet you can connect both Ethernets and use them as main and back up into two independent dual redundant networks The two networks can
98. B snap to their settings instantly 0 seconds before the fade up begins Pan and Tilt P are delayed for 1 2 seconds until the fade up is complete then the position fans in over 10 seconds 16 6 WAIT TIME In addition to the delay and fade times that can be set for every attribute a cue also has a Wait time setting By default this is set to Halt so that at the conclusion of the previous cue the cue list will wait until the Halt cue is manually played If you want a cue to be automatically played at the conclusion of the previous cue then set the Wait time to be either Follow immediately follows the previous cue or enter a wait time Page 97 LSC JERAR Operator Manual V2 0 Wait times can be set in the Record Cue dialogue box or by double clicking on a cues Wait setting in the Control Booth or Performance windows and selecting either Halt Follow or entering a time 16 7 PREVIEWING TIMES You can preview rehearse your time settings before recording them in a cue See Preview in section 21 8 4 for details 16 8 RECORDING TIMES The times that you set are included when you record a cue See Record in section 23 for details 16 9 RESET TIMING To reset the times for all attributes to the default values of delay O and fade 2 seconds click Reset Timing located in the Menu button at the bottom right of the encoder wheel touch screen 16 10 TIME PRESETS
99. C OPEN CLEAR Lighting and Media Control OPERATOR MANUAL Issue 2 Covering software Version 2 0 February 2013 Document number LX T01U A2 LSC Lighting Systems Aust Pty Ltd ABN 21 090 801 675 Building 3 66 74 Micro Circuit Dandenong South Victoria 3175 Australia Tel 61 39702 8000 Fax 61 3 9702 8466 email info Isclighting com web www lsclighting com CLScCc jerEN DISCLAIMER Both LSC Lighting Systems Aust Pty Ltd and OpenClear Pty Ltd have a corporate policy of continuous improvement covering areas such as product design and documentation To achieve this goal we undertake to release software updates for all products on a regular basis In light of this policy some detail contained in this manual may not match the exact operation of your product Information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice In any event neither LSC Lighting Systems Aust Pty Ltd nor OpenClear Pty Ltd can be held liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages or loss whatsoever including without limitation damages for loss of profits business interruption or other pecuniary loss arising out the use or the inability to use this product for its intended purpose as expressed by the manufacturer and in conjunction with this operating manual Servicing of this product is recommended to be carried out by LSC Lighting Systems Aust Pty Ltd or its authorized service age
100. LISTS The selected cue list in the cue lists browser can be previewed without having to drop it onto a cell by using the preview gt play and m stop controls at the bottom of the browser Selecting another cue list automatically stops the previous preview The Auto Preview check box causes the preview to start automatically whenever a cue list is clicked 26 3 THE GRID The grid consists of Columns and Rows e Each column plays one cell Playing another cell in that column will release any other currently active cell in that column e Each row can play multiple cells Playing another cell in that row has no effect on any other currently active cell The various cell types in the grid are e Stop All Top left A fixed stop button for the entire grid e Column Masters Top button of each column A fixed stop button for the whole column and a place to label a column e Row Masters Left button of each row A fixed play button for the whole row and a place to label a row e Cue list a cell with a play button that will run the cue list in that cell using its current properties e Stop button an empty cell with a button that stops any other active cell in the same column e Blank cell a non functional empty cell 26 4 ADAPTING EXISTING PROGRAMMING The real power and creative potential of the performance window comes from the arrangement of Row Masters and the ability to quickly adapt and re use existing cue lists without duplicating
101. MX state and the Grand Master and DBO still control all intensity channels When the show is reloaded any active cues will fade up using their recorded fade times Therefore there could be a dip in intensity between the held state in the playback and the fade up of the restored playback If you set the DMX holdoff time to be slightly longer than the cue fade up time the intensity levels will not dip on the output This setting can be made redundant enabling the Snap restore playback setting above e Default lamp ctrl hold time Default 4000 ms The duration of the Lamp on command that is sent when using the Ctrl button on the Programmers Selection window e Number of audio streams Default 16 The maximum number of audio streams that can be running at one time e HTP override priority Default 100 LTP playbacks at this priority or higher will override HTP playbacks otherwise HTP takes precedence over LTP e On level Default 100 Sets the intensity level that a selected fixture s will be set to when the On button is pressed on an LX console or F is pressed on a keyboard If an On level other than 100 is set then the first press of the On or F button will turn on the fixture at that level and a second press will set it to 100 33 1 1 New Show Preferences When a new show is opened Clarity allows you to use either your preferred default settings or the standard default settings factory defaults
102. PMTE Timecode A female 3 pin XLR socket is provided for SMPTE Timecode input 7 2 10 Audio In Out Two XLR connectors are provided for audio input and two for audio output See section 24 7 for details on Audio playback 7 2 11 LED Desk Lamps Two 3 pin XLR connectors are provided for LED desk lamps Each connector provides 12volts power for a LED Pins 1 and 2 are ground and pin 3 is 12 Volts The brightness of the LED desk light can be controlled from the LX Tools utility See section 34 for details on LX Tools Page 42 Opera ORSR 1X900 Operator Manual V2 0 ed L S C JAREN 7 2 12 External Inputs The 9 pin D SUB connector can be used to remotely control six of the Go buttons on the button playbacks The connector is wired to accept 6 inputs in the form of contact closures The pin assignments on the 9 pin D SUB connector are Pin Button Playback Go 10 Go 11 Go 12 Go 13 Go 14 Go 15 Common Pin 6 Ea To remotely operate a Go button provide a contact closure short circuit from its control pin to the common pin Pin 1 S Pin 9 Circuit to operate button playback 10 7 2 13 Reset The Reset button should only be used if instructed by LSC technical support The LX600 GUI Graphical User Interface can be reset from the LX tools utility See section 34 7 3 SWITCHING ON OFF There is a mains power switch located on the rear There is also a Power switch on the front panel To switch on the co
103. Preset Preset Enter e To apply a preset to a group press Group Preset Enter 20 12 2 Apply in Palettes Mode The encoder wheel touch screens Palettes mode allows you to apply select fixture groups and apply presets or freesets by touching them Select the fixtures in the Groups pane and then select the presets or freesets to apply them to the selected fixtures When fixtures are selected any applicable presets or freesets turn green Page 120 Opera ORREN Palettes Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C pa A to show that they are available Masking rules apply see below to presets or freesets in the Position Presets Beam Presets and Colour Presets panes 20 12 3 Apply in the Palettes window The presets or freesets in the Palettes window can be applied to selected fixtures in either Programmer 1 or Programmer 2 Select the required programmer from the drop down selector Show Patch Programmer Palettes ControlBooth Performance Levels Club Clear All Safe arrange JAG mask Active Programmer Surrent Programmer 1 x i CE E Ey n _ p SSS See SSS Ss SS a EE O TE Current Programmer 1 i Programmer 1 Programmer 2 pse he A If you select Current default setting the presets or freesets will automatically be applied to the programmer that is currently active in the Programmer window Select the fixtures in the Groups pane and then click on the presets or freesets to apply them to th
104. Thru 10 20 Thru 30 Enter selects fixtures 1 through 10 plus 20 through 30 1 Thru 30 11 Thru 19 Enter selects fixtures 1 through 30 except 11 through 19 The order of number entry is respected so that 5 Thru 1 6 Thru 10 Enter will get a fixture selection order of 5 4 3 2 1 6 7 8 9 10 If you omit the end of the range then Clarity defaults to the highest fixture unit number For example 1 Thru Enter will select all fixtures 10 Thru Enter will select fixture 10 and all higher numbered fixtures 22 3 INTENSITY ENTRY You can follow you fixture selection entry above with used as the command AT and specify a percentage intensity level On Full for full or just Enter to default to full For example 1 Thru 10 100 Enter 1 Thru 10 On Full Enter 1 Thru 10 Enter all of these commands set fixtures 1 through 10 at 100 intensity You can also specify a range or a set of intensity levels For example 1 Thru 10 50 Thru 100 1 through 10 at 50 through 100 will result in an intensity fan from 50 to 100 over fixtures 1 through 10 1 Thru 10 50 70 1 through 10 at 50 plus 70 will set alternate fixtures at 50 and 70 50 70 50 70 etc Single digit values are also accepted as a shortcut value For example 1 Thru 10 5 Enter will set fixtures 1 through 10 at 50 Previously selected fixtures can be given an intensity Page 144 Clarity HC L S C c J2REN Command
105. What would you like to do Calibrate gt Networking e oOo Touchscreens u Brightness T t Diagnostics an T ai Software Configure Management Monitors Eg System SEE information Keyboard Keyboard gt There are two pages of options Press More to select the other page 34 2 1 Brightness The LX Tools Brightness button allows you to independently adjust the brightness of the backlit buttons touch screen monitor mini screens and the LED desk lamp There are five settings of Bright fixed User 1 User 2 User 3 and Dark fixed s A CE EE TMk 79 53 20 13 Brightness Settings Presets Buttons Monitor s MiniScreens Desklamp Done Page 195 Technical Suppor TED ON operator Manual 2d 34 2 2 Software Management The LX Tools Software Management button pprovides tools for upgrading the software 34 2 3 Help The LX Tools Help button pprovides a copy of this manual and video tutorials User Manual a a Video Tutorials 34 2 4 Configure Monitors The LX Tools Configure Monitors button allows you to optimise the displays for the physical position s of the external monitor so that moving the mouse off the inbuilt monitor s moves it onto the correct external monitor s External Monitor Configuration Select monitor configuration that reflect the actual position of your external monitor External monitor to the
106. a cue by cue basis give it fade times with wait delay etc and do anything else that you can do with a normal dimmer channel You can even change the fade curve via the timings tab or use the fader to control the level The lower section of the Audio Resources dialogue box above allows you to add Audio Control Devices by clicking on the sign Audio Device Page 160 eee C JZ LEAR Control Booth Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C JRRER Select the previously loaded audio file from the drop down box If you tick the Use slot number check box the new audio fixture will be assigned a slot number described above instead of using the track name If it refers to a slot number then you can change the file assigned to the slot at a later date and keep the audio control device s assignments This fixture now appears in the Patch Programmer Rig view etcetera as if it was a normal fixture It has two parameters e Audio Volume e Media Run Stop You can create cues using these attributes and record them in cuelists 24 8 SIMPLE SCRIPT LANGUAGE MACROS Scripts are instructions that you can insert in each step of a cue list When that cue is played the instructions in the script are automatically executed For example when a cue is played its script can automatically play another cue list or even a specific cue from a cue list or it might play an audio file see above To enter script instructions in a cue in the C
107. a cue is triggered All MP3 files that need to be played must be loaded into the Audio Resources dialog box In the Control Booth window selecting Audio will open the Audio Resources dialog Page 159 Control Booth Ra LS C d CN eREN Clarity Duaa Operator Manual V2 0 9 Audio Resources Audio tracks can be added by clicking Add and navigating to the required audio file Each audio file is given a slot number Later when you are programming your cues these slot numbers can be used as a quick reference to the file instead of entering the file name Audio Resources C Program Files LSC Clarity Stay Tagether mp3 la 38 You can add multiple files whilst the dialog box is open You can also clear individual slots by clicking on the red X There are several methods of playing audio files e Audio file can be played by ether entering a command in the script column of a cue as described below in the Simple Script Language section e Audio files can be played as part of a Master Cue list as described below in the Learn New Cue list section e Audio files can be played by creating an audio fixture and controlling that fixture as if it was a lighting fixture 24 7 1 Audio Fixture Clarity has an inbuilt Audio Fixture available This fixture has two attributes Volume Intensity and Play Mode Play Pause Stop This allows you to program Audio as if it was a lighting fixture You can set the level on
108. age Buttons Playbacks and Page Buttons on a VX20 Wing Page 22 Clarity 2a L S E ir Desktop Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 When you start a new show only page one exists When a cue list is dropped onto any playback on a page of a virtual wing the next higher page is automatically created You can manually create any page number up to 99 by directly selecting that number as described below This also automatically creates all of the in between pages up to the selected page number The page number display beside the page buttons shows a A or W symbol when a higher or lower page exists e Pressing Page A or Page W selects the next higher or lower page number e To directly select any page number hold either Page A or Page W and use the numbered flash buttons below the faders to enter the page number Use the 10 button as a 0 For example to go to page 21 hold either Page A or Page W and tap 2 1 e Holding Function and pressing Page A or Page W increments or decrements the page number by 10 3 18 1 Locking a Playback A playback on a VX wing can be locked so it is unaffected by page changes On the virtual wing right click on the playback and select Lock this playback 3 18 2 Page Bookmarks Page bookmarks allow instant recall of pages See section 8 6 10 for details 3 18 3 Managing VX Pages Pages can be re ordered and named See section 8 6 9 for details 3 19 WING PLAYBACKS vu Tien
109. allows you to select the control change that will activate it The currently assigned control change is shown in the box See also Learn MIDI below The Control change value pre selects a cue number in the cue list by counting up from zero Therefore a value of O pre selects the first cue a value of 1 pre selects the second cue 2 pre selects the third cue and so on This system is used because cue numbers do not always count up in units and can have decimal notation such as cue 1 5 etc Control change values can consist of either one byte 7 bit or two bytes 14 bit of data Clarity automatically determines the resolution of the values it receives If the Display jump cue popup hint is ticked then when a Control change message is received a popup hint box will appear showing the cue list name and the cue number and name of the pre selected cue For example If Clarity has just received the selected MIDI control change message with a value of 5 the jump cue popup hint appears The next time Clarity receives the midi note on message that is currently assigned to the jump function it will jump to cue 6 Closer 30 2 5 Learn Midi If you are unsure of the actual MIDI note number or Control Function that you will be sending from the MIDI device clicking the Learn button beside each Note on or Control Function selector turns that button green Clarity now listens for the next MIDI message to be sent and automa
110. also to be controlled by OSC devices See section 31 for more details 2 2 3 Page Bookmarks Page bookmarks allow instant recall of pages on all connected control surfaces LX console or VX wings on the desktop version See sections 8 6 10 for details 2 2 4 User Definable Keyboard Shortcuts You can now define your own keyboard shortcuts for a wide variety of Clarity functions See section 10 10 for details 2 2 5 Date Time Scheduler You can define various playback actions to occur at specific dates or times with optional repeats for n repeats or forever This function is intended for scenarios where Clarity operates unattended See section 31 4 for details 2 2 6 Audio Control Device You can now add virtual fixtures that can be assigned to specific audio slots to control individual playback volume or start pause stop playback of specific audio slots See section 24 7 1 for details 2 2 7 I ntensity Levels windows The Intensity Levels view complements the normal Levels views by providing intensity specific information with optional auto compression hiding levels that are at zero This makes it much easier to see all of the channels in use when there a large quantity of fixtures The window provides two default views e Console Output which by default shows the source of each fixtures level e Cue list contents which by default follows the current cue list You can add more custom views and undock individual vie
111. altered but there are options available 21 7 2 Blind Programming There are times when you might need to program or edit a cue without affecting the current look on stage This is known as blind programming e To make the current session programmer blind click Blind on the Programmer Toolbar or press Blind in the Command Centre e To make any programmer blind right click on that programmer then select Blind When a programmer is blind it has no effect on the output but any attributes that are in that programmer are still recorded as usual 21 7 3 Clearing a Programmer Clearing a programmer removes all attributes from that programmer e To clear the current programmer session click Clear on the Programmer Toolbar e To clear any programmer right click on that programmer then select Clear e To clear all programmers click Clear All on the toolbar Pressing Clear All a second time clears the fixture selection 21 7 4 Clearing a Fixture from a Programmer e To clear a fixture from a programmer in the programmers Attribute tab click the Menu button beside the fixture s Attribute Controller then select Clear Fixture 21 7 5 Clearing an Attribute from a Programmer e To clear a single attribute from a programmer in Universal or Direct mode select that attribute then hold KO whilst rotating it s encoder wheel or in the programmers Attribute tab click the name of the Attribute Control or right click anywhere on the Attribute Control then s
112. ami Kiana aina Dala macia aaan aaia ibaika ah TD a MidStageCans r SrontCane Cue Chase Cue Chase Cue Chase Cue Chase al Ch Cue Chase StdSptBeam StdCcolWave StdSptMoy TBYWall StdColBand e Clicking on a Cue list that you have recorded allows it to be controlled by the buttons in the Control pane e Dragging a Cue list to the Playbacks pane creates a new Playback with buttons and a fader to control the Cue list Multiple pages of Playbacks are available The function buttons of your computer keyboard F1 through F7 act as Go buttons for playbacks 1 to 7 respectively 3 16 2 Adding a Virtual VX Wing Cue lists are assigned to the playbacks on VX wings in the Control Booth window by drag and drop onto a virtual copy of the selected wing on the Clarity screen When a wing is plugged into the computer running Clarity the real and virtual wings both operate simultaneously Move a fader on the real wing and the same fader on the virtual wing also moves Click a button on the virtual wing and both it and the real wing button light Clear All To add a virtual wing you must be running in Desktop Mode In the Control Booth window click Hardware Manage and in the Hardware dialog box select add virtual wing Manage itensity 0 1 Reset Comms From the Add new device box drop down list select your model of ena nal Sinple MIDI playback wing or DMX node and click OK then Close 3 16 3 Selecting a
113. ammers 213 39 COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS 214 Contents SAREH CZT Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Conventions Used in this Manual Throughout this manual certain conventions have been used to make the meaning clearer 1 A word in Bold test represents a button a Tab an area or label on the GUI Graphical User Interface 2 The terms Click Select and Touch are interchangeable 3 Emphasis is indicated by underlining 4 Notes or Hints are displayed in italic font Copyright Notices Clarity application software is developed by OpenClear Pty Ltd www openclear com au Copyright 2009 OpenClear Pty Ltd All rights reserved USB and RDM software modules and LX products are developed by LSC Lighting Systems Aust Pty Ltd www sclighting com Copyright 2009 LSC Lighting Systems Aust Pty Ltd All rights reserved Contents of this manual Copyright 2012 OpenClear Pty Ltd and LSC Lighting Systems Aust Pty Ltd All rights reserved Clarity Came CS EER Introduction Models Operator Manual V2 0 1 tIntroduction Models 1 1 OVERVIEW Clarity lighting and media control is available as a Desktop software package for PC or MAC with USB connected peripherals or in three console models LX300 LX600 and LX900 There are separate sections in this manual for the Desktop version with it s optional peripherals and for each of the console models The software is common to all platfor
114. an also edit cues and cue lists by right clicking on the cue or cue list in the Control Booth or the Performance windows and selecting Edit Cue list or Edit Cue Editing a cue or a cue list will load the cue list into a new edit session at the bottom of the programmer window and pre select the relevant cue in the list Clicking Auto Select will automatically select all of the fixtures in the cue allowing them to be edited by the programmer session Alternatively you can select individual fixtures or multiples Or groups and use the Programmer controls to edit the cues You can click on any of the cues in the edit session to edit them The Record button changes its name to Save and the button below to Save As Edited cue lists and cues can be identified by their different coloured attribute controls that show if the attribute s value has been altered by the programmer Safer Shutter biote Pan Gabe dex Rat Erect Mee Effect index Rotated a 25 3 EDITING FOLLOW OR WAIT TIMES Any cues that you edit that are set to immediately follow or wait for a specified time and then follow will display a timeline above those cues in the edit session Page 164 Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 OLSN san 4 005 5 005 Programmer Window The time line shows the actual time when each cue will play counting from the first cue from which the others will automatically follow For example if you want to know when cue 4 will be played you c
115. an read it directly from the time line rather that adding up all of the fade and wait times from the preceding cues In the example above cue 4 will be automatically played 7 seconds after cue 1 is played Note If the cue list only has halt cues then you won t see the timeline There must be a follow on or a wait time to see the timeline You can change the timing of a follow or wait cue by dragging its cue box and this will move the cue with respect to its predecessor as shown on the timeline If Ripple is selected then when a cue is dragged all following cues up to the next halt will also move by the same amount When Ripple is deselected then only the cue being dragged is affected The timeline handles complex timings by auto breaking the timeline into separate sections so that you can see the detail 65me 100ms 6ms i Fams i700rs 1E00mes 1900ms 1959n i i i L he i I i i i i i i i i i i i i i j i z x 1 p_i am Oms Sims 19 ms 320me 10tims 17 50ims 1500ms ims teams 1969ms i 4 j i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i You can also change the Follow on Halt Wait settings for a cue by right clicking on the cue selecting Set Follow time and choosing from Halt Follow on or Wait time oii Block cue Change cue only Set Follow time Halt Follow on Walk time If you select Wait time a dialogue box opens allowing you to enter a specific time
116. any go button to start learning Select Audio Resources Finish amp Create Cue List Clicking the drop down box for Use audio reveals a list of all audio files that you have loaded in the Audio Resources dialog If you the audio file you require has not been loaded you can click the small box beside the drop box to swap to the Audio Resources dialog and load the file The new master cue list will start learning your playback commands when you press any cue lists Go button or when you press the Start button If an audio file has been selected it will automatically start at the same time Playback your lighting cues in time with the optional audio file and Clarity will capture your playback commands as time stamped script events y Learn Master Cuelist Use audio C Program Files LSC Clarity Stay Together mp3 wv pm 0 0000 go Little Red 5 3500 go Band Home 10 2080 go Strobe 15 1090 go Neon Trees 18 6680 go Band Home Finish amp Create Cue List Press Finish amp Create Cue List to create the new master cue list If you selected an audio file then the name of the audio file will be used for the name of the master cue list Press Release all then playback the master cue list that you have just created The cues and optional audio will be played back with the same timing as when you manually played them If Page 162 eee C JSTE Control Booth Operator Manual V2 0 Pd L S amp CLEAR your origina
117. ap for grab active double tap for grab active default See section 21 8 3 e Off Sets the intensity of the selected fixtures to zero Hint Copy and Paste is a powerful function It allows you to duplicate attribute settings between different types of fixtures with just a few keystrokes For example you have 12 fixtures that use Red Green Blue additive colour mixing and 12 fixtures that use Cyan Magenta Yellow subtractive colour mixing Select the RGB fixtures and set them to a colour or even fan a range of colours then press Copy Select the CMY fixtures then press Paste All 24 fixtures are now set to matching colours Clarity s fixture translation engine is very comprehensive and will attempt to convert all programming for all attribute types The Esc button flashes whenever there is a modal dialogue box open that requires your attention Press Esc to close any dialogue box without making changes 8 6 PLAYBACKS The quantity and type of playbacks varies with the model of LX console e The LX300 has 15 fader playbacks and 15 button playbacks e The LX600 has 15 motorised fader playbacks and 60 Action Buttons for Groups Palettes Presets or Cuelists e The LX900 has 30 motorised fader playbacks and 60 Action Buttons for Groups Palettes Presets or Cuelists The LX600 amp LX900 consoles both include high resolution motorized faders on all playbacks as well as the Grand Master With 99 pages of playbacks the LX600 provi
118. applied to the last fixture in the selection All of the other selected fixtures gets an intermediate value that is graduated between the start and end values Page 98 Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C DEA IPCB Choose either Common or Separate IPCB This determines whether the Time preset will apply to any attribute type or to specific attribute types The Preview pane shows a graphical preview of the resultant timing that will be saved in the Time Preset 16 10 2 Applying Time Presets Select a fixture s and alter an attribute value Time presets can be applied from either e On the Programmer window select the timing tab and you will see the default times applied To apply a Time Preset either click From time preset or click the MENU button on a specific timing group and select From time preset e On the encoder wheel touchscreen s Timing mode you will see the default times applied To apply a Time Preset select the MENU button on a specific timing group then select From time preset Apply Live Time Select on the required Time Preset to apply it Time Presets are also used by the Live Times dialog in the Palettes window to control the timing for Presets and Freesets that you apply Page 99 5 gt OPEN Clarit a one CDER Operator Manual V2 0 17 Dynamics real time effects 17 1 OVERVIEW Dynamics can save you hours of programming time by creating movement from an otherwi
119. as Universe A B etc 37 10 1 DMX Slot A moving light colour scroller dimmer or any other DMX controlled device is known as a fixture Every Fixture has a selectable DMX starting slot and this is patched to that same DMX SLOT number on Clarity Clarity will then automatically patch all of the remaining DMX slots for that Fixture according to the information in the library for that particular Fixture 37 10 2 Attribute Each brand and model of Fixture has a specified number and order of control channels An attribute is one or two DMX control channels two channels used for higher resolution that uniquely controls one of the physical motions of the Fixture The manufacturer s specification of a Fixture lists each attribute and its control channel number s 37 11 HTP HIGHEST TAKES PRECEDENCE If the value for an attribute is emanating from several places at the same time then the highest of all those values will be the value at the output HTP is typically used for intensity control 37 12 LTP LATEST TAKES PRECEDENCE The value on the output will always be the value from the place where the latest action took place LTP is typically used for movement control 37 13 RDM RDM stands for Remote Device Management It is an extension to DMX Since the inception of DMX it has always been a one way control system Data only ever flows in one direction from the lighting controller outwards to whatever it may be connected to T
120. ator Manual V2 0 Fullscreen Resizable Hide toolbar Split Jor Right Playback Display Mode LX Programmer LX Palettes LX900 Playbacks LHS LX900 Playbacks RHS LX900 emulation Mode The wrapper window s toolbar provides several options e Fullscreen The wrapper is set to full screen mode and the wrapper s toolbar is hidden e Resizable The main window s size will follow the size of the wrapper window and the scrollbars are hidden unless the wrapper window is smaller than the main window s minimum size e Hide toolbar This option replaces the window wrapper s toolbar with a small yellow disc on the top right of the wrapper window Clicking on this presents the toolbar options as a drop down menu Fan Compact lt lt Capped Expanded e Split Join LX900 mode only The LX900 has two internal monitors This splits the wrapper into two separate wrapper windows If this is running on a system with two or more monitors then the other wrapper window will be presented on the other monitor and will appear full screen if the original wrapper was full screen e Left Right LX900 mode only This switches the view between the LX900 s left or right internal monitors unless the wrapper has been split e Playback display mode LX600 or LX900 modes The LX600 and LX900 have playback displays positioned at the bottom of the main screen s and this controls how they are presented in the wrapper o Auto If the ma
121. be connected into an LSC Nexus ArtNet to DMX converter which can accept both networks and will automatically change over in the event of a loss of a network The Ethernet connectors can also be used to connect the LX300 to a network or wireless access point for remote control See section 31 for details 5 2 4 DVI Video Out An external monitor with a minimum resolution of 1280x1024 is required to operate the LX300 The monitor must be connected before switching on the console Connect the monitor or touch screen to the Video Out connector using a DVI cable A HDMI monitor can be connected via a DVI to HDMI converter plug Not supplied Note The LX300 will not start correctly if an external monitor is not plugged in See section 34 LX Tools for details on how to setup the external monitor Only compatible external touch screens can be used Contact LSC or your local LSC dealer for compatible touch screen models 5 2 5 USB Four USB connectors are provided for connecting a keyboard mouse external touch screen or memory device or charging your phone A single USB connector is also provided on the front panel below the power switch 5 2 6 MIDI MIDI In MIDI Thru and MIDI Out connectors are provided See section 30 for details on the LX300 s MIDI functions 5 2 7 Audio I n Out Two 6 5mm Stereo jacks are provided for audio See section 24 7 for details on Audio playback 5 2 8 LED Desk Lamps Two 3 pin XLR connectors are provided f
122. best descriptions for functions and operations performed on Clarity and may not be terms adopted on similar equipment These key terms are printed in underlined text below 37 2 PROGRAMMER PLAYBACK Clarity uses a programmer and playback method of controlling fixtures e Ina programmer you create lighting looks and record them as cues in a cue list e Ina playback you playback the cue list There are many options available for you to choose what is recorded in each cue as well as how each cue list is played back Clarity is by default a tracking controller which means that Clarity usually only records and plays back the changes that you make between each cue that you record You can also choose to record everything that is grabbed in the programmer not just the changes since the last recording and to playback cues that include the entire look This is known as cue only playback mode The various options are described below See also the Record and Control Booth sections for more details on tracking and cue only 37 3 PRIORITY CONTROL Fixtures have attributes intensity pan tilt colour etc and Clarity controls those attributes by outputting values on the DMX slot associated with each attribute Attributes can be controlled by many different sources from within Clarity The source of control could be a programmer a playback of which there are many or possibly no source is currently controlling an attribute When multiple sources are
123. bject that you right click on These usually provide shortcuts to often used values or allow items to renamed deleted etcetera The 4 buttons on the right of the touch screen perform the following functions from top to bottom e Next Screen Not applicable to the LX300 e Right Click e Left Click e Trackpad Mode Trackpad mode makes the touch screen act as a touch pad as found on a laptop to control the cursor on the other monitor s Press and hold for momentary use or double press to latch into track pad mode Press again to return to normal touch screen operation 8 4 ENCODER WHEELS AND BUTTONS Current functions of Encoder Wheels Above the bottom row of virtual buttons on the touch screen are four labels that show the current functions of the four encoder wheels These functions change as different modes or attribute rows are selected For finer control hold either Fine button whilst turning a wheel Double press Fine to latch it on Press again to un latch The 9 round buttons above the encoder wheels are used together with the wheels They are ergonomically placed above the wheels so that you can tap them without letting go of a wheel The wheel modifier functions are e KO Knock Out Hold the button and turn a wheel to knockout remove the attribute s being controlled from the programmer e Home Hold the button and turn a wheel to send the attribute s being controlled to it s home position e Fan Ce
124. box you can drag to vary pan and tilt e Inthe Colour box you can drag to vary the colour If the fixture only has limited colour selections not full colour mixing available these will be indicated by small dotted boxes Click on or near a box to select that colour e Inthe Beam box you can drag to vary iris focus and zoom If the fixture has specific gobos click on the gobo or Open Gobo to select it 21 13 ATTRIBUTE CONTROLS The area below each attributes name is known as an Attribute Control The individual attribute values can be varied by dragging with the mouse in their respective area You can also hold Shift when dragging for finer control xt Grab Preview To Preset Record Append Last Update Highlight Blind Tea Toolbox a Seen Ia Logical Studio Spot 575 5 devices miensity Pan Tl Stusp575 1 Gobo hee Modetz lt S devices Infensity StuSp575 1 StuSp575 2 Stusp575 3 StuSp575 4 StuSp575 5 Colour Whee Colour Whea sz Stusp575 1 Stusno75 3 In this example the intensity of 5 fixtures has been dragged to 80 Page 140 ee ci c gt Programmer Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C JAREN 21 13 1 Attribute Quick Menus The name of each Attribute Control can be clicked or the Attribute Control itself right clicked to access the attribute quick menus These menus provide rapid access to common attribute settings Specific menus are available for each individual attribute For example
125. brary of over 2000 fixture personalities supplied by Carallon an independent supplier of fixture libraries However if you have a fixture that is not in the library you can either use the Clarity fixture editor described later in this manual or request a fixture file from LSC Please supply all details of the fixture including brand model version number operating modes and a DMX chart or list Submit your request including this information at http www sclighting com help centre clarity templates LSC will email you a Clarity fixture file for your new fixture e To add a new fixture to the library in the Patch window click Manage custom fixtures e Inthe User Fixtures dialog box click the symbol then navigate to the new fixture file on your computer cfx and click Open 11 12 CONNECTING OUTPUT DEVICES Clarity s internal DMX universes are labelled A B C etc When patches have been made you use the Connections pane to connect these internal universes to external universes 1 2 3 or 4 on the rear panel or to ArtNet subnets universes Clicking on the drop down arrow for each internal universe will list the available connections Disabled Select the required device DMX universe to make the connection Note also that universe connections are only presented for internal universes that have one or more devices patched empty universes are not listed 11 13 CONFIGURING ARTNET OUTPUTS iy New ArtNet broadcast for
126. butes window A single Attribute Control for controlling one dimmer looks like this Dimmer Channel 8 bit i gence Dimmer 1 To adjust the intensity of the dimmer click and drag anywhere in the bar below the attribute name Intensity If seven dimmers are selected the Attribute Control looks like this Dimmer Channel 8 bit 7 GEER AAG ETRE Dimmer 1 Dimmer 2 Dimmer 3 Dimmer Dimmer 5 Dimmer 6 Dimmer To adjust the intensity of all 7 dimmers click and drag anywhere inside the bar All these dimmers are set to 50 Page 19 Desktop Clarity OLER EN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 When you select different fixtures that have multiple attributes Attribute Controls automatically appear for each type of fixture and each attribute of each fixture type Dimmer Channel 8 bit 3 devices Dimmer 1 Dimmer 2 Dimmer 3 4 devices MUMIS A Stu5p575 2 Stu5p575 3 Stu5p575 4 StuSp575 1 StuSp575 2 Stu5p575 3 Stu5p575 4 Stu5p575 1 Stu5p575 2 Stu5p575 3 Stu5p575 4 3 15 2 Attribute Quick Menus To access the Attribute Quick Menus either click on the name of an Attribute Control or right click in the Attribute Control area Each individual Attribute Control has its own specific quick menu offering rapid access to common settings relevant to that attribute For example triangle G 1 Gabo Mode In o bar 2 Sb ode nde Gobo Colour Typical Attribute Quick Menus 3
127. button in Page 96 Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C DEA the top left corner of the Timing tab Selecting Confirm or the button or dragging in the new Timing Control to change the time will lock in the timing The right Timing Control now only controls ICB and the left Timing Control has taken control of P Position timing You can now set the Position timing independently of the ICB timing 16 5 1 Combining Filters Combinations of the Filters Attribute groups of Intensity Position Colour and Beam groups can be selected by using Function click to select and or de select them Individual attributes within a group can be selected by selecting Choose then selecting the attributes Combinations of individual attributes can be selected by using Function click to select and or de select them Position and Beam have been filtered Pan only from the Position group has been filtered 16 5 2 Complex Timing The separate Timing Controls allow you to see a lot of timing information at a glance even if attribute times are at very different orders of magnitude 8 dewices s s 100rns 1500ms i x pabesenecidasabas eb onetoabaseb lt bensutisasepebensusesesyseses sh Achabduaveusedasanananessanaessauaveua easceauaseucuscnesansscesuasdanesanevensaaasyaa The above complex example has the following timing Intensity I is delayed for 0 2 seconds then fades up over 1 second Colour and gobo wheels C
128. button or the real button to make a selection The currently selected row is blue Repeatedly tapping a button at the bottom of the screen will also step through and select the rows of its page Above the bottom row of virtual buttons are four labels that show the current functions of the four encoder wheels These functions change as different modes or attribute rows are selected When you have selected a fixture s universal mode provides universal attribute controls that are always in the same locations on the screen and operate in exactly the same way regardless of which fixture types you have selected This not only allows multiple types of fixtures to be controlled simultaneously but also simplifies the control of complex fixtures that might use multiple attributes to control an effect or fixtures that use one attributes to change the mode of another attributes Universal mode automatically interprets these attributes and presents a single control for each effect If a listed attribute does not exist on any of the selected fixtures then that attribute control is still visible but disabled it s name is crossed out and the background is grey Universal controls are arranged in 4 main pages that are selected by the 4 buttons at the bottom left of the screen The main pages are General Colour Beam Media Server For example selecting General provides controls for Intensity Shutter Gobo Wheel 1 Gobo wheel 2 Red G
129. button toggle When a cue list is assigned to an LX600 or LX900 palette button pressing that button while the cue list is active will release it e Release when fully overridden Default setting The cue list is automatically released if all of its channels fixture attributes have been overridden by another playback e Ignore release all The cue list is not released by the Release All button e Ignore grand master The cue will not be affected by the grand master Useful for cues such as work lights or providing constant power to fixtures e Release intensity first Default setting When released intensity fades out in the release time then other attributes snap release This prevents unwanted fixture movements being seen e Fader affects all attributes The playback fader normally only affects intensity When ticked the playback fader acts as a master over all attribute levels in the same way as the manual fader on the playback control panels e Restart from last active cue When a cue list is released then restarted it will go immediately to the last active cue Normally when a cue list is released it will start from the first cue e Solo on flash When a playback is set to Solo on flash it will black out the intensity of all other playbacks intensity levels when it is flashed If multiple playbacks are set to Solo on flash they will not black out each other if flashed at the same time e Solo safe When a playback is
130. ce 1 and Pixel Source 2 but does not contain any transforms 18 13 ACTIVATING SELECTED CELLS Selecting Menu then Activate selected cells allows you to activate a selected range of cells You select a range of cells by dragging on the right hand preview image with the right mouse button Only the selected cells are included when a cue is recorded This allows you to isolate selectable areas of the matrix so that you could have different Pixel Sources applied to the different areas or you might want to control some areas of the matrix by conventional programming using the Attributes tab You can right click without dragging to clear the selection rectangle Page 108 Clarity C Detear Matrix Operator Manual V2 0 A L S C CLEAR 18 14 PIXEL SOURCE LAYERI NG AND TRANSPARENCY If you use multiple Pixel Sources you can blend the media files from each Pixel Source Each Pixel Source can have any other Pixel Source set as its Background If you vary the Opacity of the foreground image then the background can blend into the foreground If the foreground PixelSource image file contains transparency then the background image will be visible through the transparent parts of the foreground image To select a background for a Pixel Source select that Pixel Source then click in the Background combobox and select another Pixel Source as the background Note The background calculation is only performed one level deep it is not possible to cascade ba
131. ces settings Click on Show Settings Preferences then make your selections User Preferences are described in section 33 10 10 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Keyboard shortcuts allow you to perform certain functions on Clarity by simply pressing a keyboard key or combination of keys Clarity comes with some pre programmed shortcuts but you can change the required keystrokes and also add your own shortcuts To open the keyboard shortcuts select Show Settings Keyboard shortcuts H System Shortc s Toggle Blind e To change a current shortcut select it by clicking on it then click in the Shortcut box Press your new key or combination of keys e To add a new shortcut click and the Choose Function dialogue appears Page 72 Clarity SES Customising Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 OjensSh Select a function from the list and press OK Now press your new key or combination of keys for the shortcut for this function e To delete a shortcut select it by clicking on it then click Page 73 fee ie 5 i entlie LSC ORAR Operator PE 11 Patching Fixtures 11 1 OVERVI EW Clicking on the Patch window tab reveals the patch window The Library sidebar lists fixtures by manufacturer and model If you click on a fixture additional information for the selected fixture is shown at the bottom of the patch window The right side shows the 512 patch slots for each in
132. ch intensity level between its current level and full For example if the fader is at 50 a fixture at 25 would be set half way 50 between 25 and full which is 62 5 A fixture at 50 would be set half way 50 between 50 and full which is 75 and a fixture at 75 would be half way between 75 and full which is 87 5 Page 63 LX Console Controls O L S C c Seren Clarity a 4 Operator Manual V2 0 e Inhibitive This is the default and operates in the same way as a fader assigned to a cue list For example if the fader is at 50 fixtures at 25 50 and 75 would be at 12 5 25 and 37 5 e Limiting The intensity level of each fixture is capped to the fader level For example if the fader is at 50 fixtures at 25 50 and 75 would be at 25 50 and 50 A group master will be deactivated when it is not on the currently selected page You can change this globally by un ticking Deactivate group masters while paged out in the User Preferences or individually by ticking the Lock Playback prevent page change box when configuring the group master When a playback has been programmed as a Group master it s Go and Il kd buttons now act as Group select and Group deselect buttons respectively For example pressing the gt button of that Group Master will select all of the fixtures in that group in the Programmer On LX consoles the color of the fader contents indicators of any faders set as group masters Show the ty
133. changed in the Programmer s toolbox See section 21 9 5 for details 11 14 3 Deleting Fixtures Select the fixture s to be deleted by clicking on them then right click and select Delete selected fixtures 11 14 4 Un Patching Fixtures Select the fixture s to be un patched by clicking on them then right click and select Unpatch selected When any fixtures have been un patched an UNPATCHED FIXTURES pane appears Showing those fixtures allowing them to easily be re patched when required Un patched fixtures do not count towards your license limit 11 14 5 Exporting the Patch The Export Patch button in the Patch Window allows you to save the patch information as a CSV file and then open it in a spreadsheet program Page 82 Operator Manual V2 0 L S C cCJ2TER 12 Rig 12 1 OVERVI EW Rig mode is a fixture selection tool and two dimensional visualiser It shows a geographical view of the patched fixtures and groups which you can arrange so that they are positioned as they actually are in your rig This allows you to rapidly find and select fixtures for programming by clicking on them or touching them or by dragging the mouse cursor through multiple fixtures This will remember the order in which you drag though the fixtures or you can click in whitespace to draw a selection rectangle A background image of your stage or venue can be added to aid selection and multiple views can be created using the toolbar at
134. ckgrounds through more that one level 18 15 PIXELSOURCE TRANSITI ONS You can transition between different Pixel Sources and hence between different media by recording them into successive cues in a cue list This transition is in the form of a timed wipe For example add another Pixel Source above and add some media files to it Select the required media for the next look on the new Pixel Source Click Activate then click Set Timing The Matrix Timing dialog box appears E Timing k e Timing profile is a graphical representation of the direction of the wipe Click the drop down arrow to select other wipes In the example above the wipe goes from left to right from dark to light e Invert reverses the direction of the wipe e Rotation allows simple rotation of the wipe Click the drop down arrow to select 90 180 or 270 degrees e Wipe duration controls the speed of the wipe e Blend time controls how long each pixel takes to transition In the above example the total crossfade time would be 2 seconds With the wipe selected append this to the cue list as the next cue remember to Activate the Pixel Source You can add additional wipes as simple monochrome images that you can easily create with any paint program Contact LSC for details 18 16 DYNAMICS You can add continuous dynamic effects to any of the transforms by using dynamics tab Select the Dynamics tab then click New Add How Effect ee ena Le Jerre
135. click on the group and select Update item Auto groups cannot be edited Page 130 Clarity YorPEN Programmer Operator Manual V2 0 nt LSC ORAR 21 6 2 Sort Clicking on the Sort tab shows the currently selected fixtures and automatically opens the Sorting Grouping pane Clicking on one of the following buttons allows you to re order the selected fixtures to suit the following criteria By ID by Unit ID order By Name Name in alphanumeric order Selection order by original selection order Random in random order Mirror in mirror order Re orders the current selection as first last second second last etcetera For ID Name and Selection order clicking the button a second time will reverse the sort order Clicking the Mirror button again will mirror the mirror Clicking the Random button again will re randomize the sequence Hint For a quick symmetrical effect select some fixtures in the order that they are rigged on stage Mir mirror the selection Set buddying to 2 Right click on an attribute control and select Full Fan 21 6 3 Subgroups In the Sort tab entering a number in the Subgroups box will split the fixture selection into multiple parts These subgroup parts can be used when performing fans and applying dynamics real time effects See Fanning and Dynamics for more details Dimmer Channel Dimmer Channel IS devices Dimmer 1 Dimmer 2 Dimmer 3 Dimmer 4 Dimmer 5 Diramer 6 Dimme
136. complete with the proportional levels 38 9 PROGRAMMER OVERRIDE If you are not familiar with a Programmer type of lighting controller you might often get caught out when a playback does not do what you expect it to do because you have some or all of its channels still being controlled by the programmer This is because the programmer has a higher priority than a playback so it prevents the playback from controlling the channels You can overcome this problem by setting the programmer to the same priority as a playback Select Show Preferences and tick the Programmer operates at normal priority check box Now the programmer can be overridden by a playback on a Latest Take Precedence basis 38 10 MEDIA SERVER THUMBNAILS The most common tech support issue we get with Clarity is how to make Media Server thumbnails work The great part is that with Clarity it is all automatic so there is nothing to set up in the Clarity software However there are a few tricks with the computer and or the Media Server itself Firstly check that you can control the Media Server via Art Net If not then you have a major network issue that needs to be resolved first This is outside the scope of this article If you have Art Net control but no thumbnails then read on Page 210 eee E 255h Hints and Tips Operator Manual V2 0 L S C JAREN 1 IP addresses For thumbnail exchange to work both the Clarity computer and the Media Server must b
137. create Presets and Palettes for Colours Gobos Positions etc Clarity extends this functionality to include Time Presets Any timing information no matter how simple or complex can be saved to a Time Preset for instant recall when programming or busking live Time Presets can include Fanned times allowing the action to be delayed across multiple fixtures In addition using the unique Freeset ability of Clarity a fanned delay can be recorded once and later recalled across 2 5 7 21 or any number of fixtures 38 16 SORTING BUDDYING amp SUBGROUPS The Sort Buddying and SubGroup controls allow you to quickly alter the way fixtures are controlled in the programmer Sorting can be ordered by Selection Numeric Mirrored or Random Buddying and Subgroups can be adjusted as required allowing Effects Fans and Freesets Positions and Colours to be patterned across a range of fixtures The Buddying control allows you to apply the same value or effect across pairs triples or any number of fixtures The Subgroup control repeats the pattern every 2 3 4 or more fixtures Even more creativity can be quickly achieved with the combinations of these controls as well as the Odd Even selection buttons 38 17 UNIVERSAL CONTROL One of the most powerful features of Clarity is the Universal Control function This presents every lighting fixture in a uniform manner So no matter what weird and wonderful things the manufacturer does such as share the dimmer
138. cue list folders to control booth Added UNPATCHED FIXTURES area to patch window plus ability to unpatch and re patch fixtures Unpatched fixtures do not count towards your license limit Add Patched slot count to About dialogue Redesigned sort controls so they pop in at the bottom of the programmer window Palette window s Remove menu item now called De activate Solo can trigger Button playbacks that have been configured as Go on fader up Ability to switch to fixture editor from Show menu Implement Function Release to do Release all and Function double tap Release to ignore the ignore release all preference Added ability to change extension type on VX wings 2 2 17 User Manual The individual user manuals for the desktop and console models have been merged into a single user manual that covers all versions of Clarity Page 5 Desktop Clarity to L S C c J2REN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 3 Desktop PC or MAC Clarity 3 1 OVERVIEW Desktop The desktop version of Clarity consists of a software application and optional control surfaces and interfaces In its simplest form Clarity can be run with just a computer where control is via a Graphical User Interface GUI or Command Line input and output is via ArtNet DMX over Ethernet Hardware can be added in the form of USB to DMX adaptors and USB Playback and Programming wings that also include DMX outputs The desktop version of Clarit
139. cue with the hard value that has been tracked through to the current cue If you deselect Trackback the updated attribute values will only be applied to the current cue Any presets that have been overridden are shown and ticked by default This means that the changes in the programmer will update the preset After the preset is updated any remaining changes in the programmer will either be tracked back or applied to the current cue according to your selection If the programmer also contains some new attributes that are not present in any of the cues currently contributing to the output then these will by default not be stored If you want to store this new information select a location for it by clicking the drop down list near the bottom of the Auto Update dialog box You can choose to add this new information to any of the cues currently contributing to the output The preferred method of adding new information into an existing cue is to create the new attribute values in the programmer click Record then select the existing cue and click Merge Record In addition to all of these choices the top of the Auto Update dialog box allows you to e Mask any of the Intensity Position Colour and Beam attribute groups e Only include selected fixtures Page 136 Opera ORSR Programmer Operator Manual V2 0 ed L S C JAREN e Preserve existing timing trackback only Finally you can choose to Clear stored information from programmer when fi
140. d Now switch back to Programmer 1 You can now continue to programme the show using Programmer 1 The contents of Programmer 2 remain on but will not be recorded in your new cues 2 If you want some channels to always be on whenever you start your show such as those that control DMX power racks for moving lights then you can do this by Page 139 i gt OPEN Clarit rogrammer ao L S amp c J2 Operator Manual V2 0 Recording a Cue list with the channels you want set to 100 intensity Set the Priority of the Cue list to be higher than the programmer use 150 Set the Ignore Release All option found under the More button Set the Preferences in the Show Menu to Restore Playback State e Activate the cue and save the show Whenever you load the show this cue will automatically run and stay on for the duration of the show 21 12 UNIVERSAL CONTROL PANEL The bottom of the screen contains the Universal Control Panel which has generic controls for Intensity Position Colour and Beam These controls work with any type of fixture that has been selected and are especially useful to simultaneously control selections of mixed fixture types Open Gobo Clicking and dragging in these controls uses low mouse gearing for accurate control but can be made even finer by holding down Shift e Inthe Intensity box you can click on a preset value 0 25 50 75 or 100 Closed or Open or drag in the Dimmer or Strobe areas e Inthe Position
141. d uses the Top and Bottom values together with Amplitude so that the attribute moves between the top and bottom extents Amplitude controls how far the output value travels towards the top and bottom value e Scaled is the same as ranged except that there is also a Centre value so that the output value can be asymmetrical e Pile add in this mode no base attribute values are specified so that the current attribute value e g from another cue list is modulated by the waveform For example this would allow you to create a cue that defines a circle effect that could be played over the top of any other cue list such as a cue list that moves the circle position between points on the stage e Link offset and link amplitude are for multi attribute operation so that all attributes can be adjusted simultaneously For example when adjusting the size of a circle effect clicking Link amplitude allows you to adjust the amplitude of both Pan and Tilt simultaneously by adjusting only Pan s Amplitude Attribute Control e Invert this check box inverts the waveform for the selected fixtures For example to achieve a can can effect set a row of fixtures to tilt up and down Next select only the odd fixtures and tick Invert 17 4 MULTIPLE ATTRIBUTE DYNAMICS To control another attribute by dynamics click New The Add New Effect dialog box opens and you can select another attribute or multiple attributes as described at the start of this section
142. d select Add Remove Media The Add Media dialog box appears C Program Files L5C Clarity frock gif The media files currently assigned to the Pixel Source if any are shown on the left e To add media click Add then select the file e Clicking on a file in the Current Media pane shows a preview in the Preview pane e To delete media select the file then click Remove When finished click OK 18 9 SELECTING MEDIA IN A PIXEL SOURCE To select any one of the loaded media for a Pixel Source select the Pixel Source by clicking on it then click on the drop down box at the bottom of the transform controls and select the required media es Page 107 CTLSC ne Operator Manual V2 0 18 10 ADDING AND DELETING PI XEL SOURCES To create a new Pixel Source click New Source The new pixel source appears at the bottom of the pane and it is automatically selected Media is added to the new source as describe above Clicking on a pixel source selects that pixel source Clickona PixelSource to n IE Se selectit ets att es _ X Rofstion Y Roton To delete a Pixel Source click on that Pixel Source then click Delete Source or right click on the Pixel Source and select Delete 18 11 VIEWER Clicking Viewer activates the viewer window which allows you to see exactly what will be sent out to the pixel matrix Images will not be shown on the output until the Pixel Source has been activated See below f
143. d you can also combine and subtract ranges using the and keys For example 1 Thru 50 100 Thru 120 enters fixture unit numbers 1 through 50 and 100 through 120 1 Thru 50 25 enters fixture unit numbers 1 through 24 and 26 through 50 e The order of number entry is respected so that 5 Thru 1 6 Thru 10 Enter will get a fixture selection order of 5 4 3 2 1 6 7 8 9 10 Also see Multi Patch below for additional commands 11 6 MULTI PATCH You can patch the same fixture unit number to multiple DMX locations This allows you to use a Single fixture unit number to control multiple fixtures Multiple patches can be made by using either keypad patching or by copying a patched fixture to another DMX slot as described below 11 6 1 Keypad Multi Patch Use the keypad to specify the multiple DMX slot numbers Page 77 Patching Fixtures tf L S cS ce nns Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 For example unit number slot number slot number Enter This command patches a fixture unit number to two DMX slot numbers When patching dimmers only you can supply a range of DMX slot numbers For example e unit number slot number gt slot number Enter Patches the unit number to a range of DMX slot numbers e unit number slot number slot number slot number Enter Patches the unit number to the DMX slot numbers 11 6 2 Copy Multi Patch Copy a patched fixture to another DMX slo
144. des 1 485 simultaneous playbacks and the LX900 doubles this number to 2 970 Managing this many playbacks is easy with motorised faders as they instantly slide to the correct position as soon as the new page is selected This provides instant visual feedback and allows the level to be manually overridden just by touching the fader 8 6 1 LX300 Button Playbacks See section 5 4 1 Page 56 Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 8 6 2 FE aN yy k e A C i D A O mm a CIEE lt gt Fader Playbacks AG HOC BOG E g of Foo FOR LX Console Controls H Iil v E Pat LX600 and LX900 Fader Playbacks EILIC teh Hoo _f__ The LX600 and LX900 use the lower part of the large touch screen s above the playbacks for assigning and configuring the playbacks and to show their contents and status A o A gt o A gt o a OUOU ononon UU U od oye ttt 288 8 o o o 0 LX 300 Fader OCI Playbacks e QG The LX300 playbacks are similar to the LX600 and 900 except that they are not motorized and do not have dedicated Select buttons You
145. difier or one of the wheel modifier buttons you latch it by holding it for one second Press it again to un latch it The playbacks on the LX600 and LX900 do not have dedicated contents displays as in the LX300 but show their contents on the touch screen located above them on the console These displays are emulated at the bottom of the screen on your computer Depending upon the screen resolution of your computer you might have to scroll to the bottom to see the playback displays LX600 playback with main screen scrolled down to see the playback displays The playback controls work in exactly the same manner as in the actual consoles See the playback sections of the consoles for details When hovering over an emulated LCD screen a zoomed version of the LCD is presented to aid readability This is also configurable via the tool menu The emulation views also snap to screen boundaries and to each other to aid layout 3 13 BASIC DESKTOP OPERATION The tabbed windows of the main menu bar follow the same order as the basic steps used in control lighting fixtures 1 Patch allows you to select your fixtures from a fully integrated fixture library of over 2000 fixture personalities supplied by Carallon an independent supplier of fixture libraries You patch a fixture to its DMX slot by drag and drop 2 Rig Programmer and Palettes allow you to select fixtures and control their attributes to create and edit looks effects cue lists and pal
146. ding flash to adjust the value then if you reach the fader Page 26 Clarity 2a L S E ir Desktop Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 end stop hold flash to reposition the fader So the fader is always connected giving you instant control but you can hold the Flash button down to scoot the fader See section 33 1 for User Preferences 3 22 PROGRAMMING WITH THE VX20 WING The VX20 s programmer section assists programming by providing hard controls for the main programming functions 3 22 1 Trackball The trackball is multi purpose and can be used for Programming and as a computer mouse e Pressing either Intens Intensity Position Colour or Beam turns the track ball blue and causes the trackball to vary the Intensity Position Colour or Beam values of the selected fixtures in the current programming session e Pressing the mouse button green and causes it to act as a mouse for the computer running Clarity When 6 mouse is selected the Ortho and Fine buttons act as the Left and Right mouse buttons respectively The Intensity Position Colour Beam and Mouse buttons are all interlocked so that selecting any one button deselects the previous button 3 22 2 Programmer Buttons The programmer buttons have the following functions e Next All Prev None HiLit Highlight Blind Clear All Release All Perform identical functions to the same buttons on the Programmer window s toolbar in the GUI Graphical User Interface Se
147. e An upgrade to a new version of Clarity only requires 2 components to be installed e Clarity e LSC QX VX USB Driver Continue the installation by clicking Next then follow the on screen instructions The QX VX drivers are certified 64 bit drivers however you may be asked to confirm their installation Installation of the Aladdin HASP SRM software can take several minutes You can check the operation as described in HASP Diagnostics below When the installation is complete click Close If you accept the defaults Clarity will be installed in C Program Files LSC Clarity You can now plug in a QX DMX node VX wing or USB license dongle Hasp The first time that you do this windows automatically installs their device drivers This takes a few moments and windows will inform you that Your device is ready to use To run Clarity click on Start All Programs LSC Clarity where you will see all of the installed files Wb Lsc Clarity WP Clarity uP Demo Mode P Fixture Editor ALPHA Operation Manual US TO Operation Manual Release Notes P Tracking Ba Uninstall ckup Slave Click on Clarity to run the program The above steps are for installation on Windows 7 The process for Windows Vista will be similar Page 7 Desktop Clarity H D L S E C 2 EN 3 3 INSTALLING CLARITY ON A MAC Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 To mount the installation package double click on Clarity Mac x y z dmg Note
148. e In the Programmers Attribute tab select and adjust the attribute to the required value then right click on the Attribute Control From the menu that appears select either Set as Highlight or Set as Lowlight 21 8 11 Blind Clicking Blind toggles blind on or off for the currently selected programmer or cue list being edited When a session is blind it will have no effect on the output When a cue list is selected for editing it is blind by default This can be changed in the user preferences 21 8 12 Clear Close e If the current session is in either Programmer 1 or Programmer 2 this button reads Clear Clicking Clear clears the current programmer e If the current session is editing a cue list this button becomes Close Clicking Close closes the current cue list being edited You will be prompted to save your changes if you have edited a cue 21 9 PROGRAMMER TOOLBOX Clicking Toolbox access further advanced functions as described below Page 137 Programmer SAR V2 0 L S G D Operator Manual V2 0 Show Undo view Trim knockout remainder Remainder Dim e Controls Renumber fixtures Grab DMs Copy Cbrl 0 Paste Ctrl Flip selected 21 9 1 Show Undo View Show Undo View shows the entire undo history for the current session Clicking on a line in the history instantly jumps to that undo level A separate history is saved for each programmer and each cue list being edited 21 9 2 Trim knock out remainder
149. e 1 and cue 3 replaces cue 2 Attributes that do not have a value in a cue are released and go to their default values Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Cue 1 100 50 25 Output 100 50 25 Cue 2 80 Output 80 0 0 Cue 3 25 Output 0 25 0 Cue 1 contains hard values for attributes 1 2 and 3 so when it is played back the attributes go to 100 50 and 25 respectively Cue 2 only contains a hard value for attribute 1 so when it is played back attribute 1 changes to 80 and channels 2 and 3 are released Cue 3 only contains a hard value for attribute 2 so when it is played back attribute 2 changes to 25 and channels 1 and 3 are released 37 8 RECORDING CUES When you record a cue you need to take into account the playback mode of the cue list that will be used when the cue is played back The default setting of Clarity are for tracking playback and therefore Clarity will by default record only touched values That is it records changes that have been made in the programmer since the previous cue in the cue list was recorded These cues are suitable for playback in tracking mode Page 204 Clarity He L S G Or Operating Concepts amp Terminology Operator Manual V2 0 If you intend to playback the cue list in Cue only mode then you should include any unchanged information in the cue and not just the changes In other word you should record all grabbed values not just the touched values When you click the Record button the Record C
150. e Cue list name or Chase name italics to be assigned All of the playback touch screens flash red Tap the playback s touch screen to which the cue list or chase is to be assigned e To clear a Playback tap Clear Playback All of the playback touch screens flash red Tap a playback s touch screen to clear it 8 6 6 Configuring a Playback To configure a cue list or chase already assigned to a playback double tap on that playback s touch screen and the Configure Playbacks screen appears Page 58 Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Ler EN LX Console Controls This screen allows you to change the cue list into a chase or vice versa and to alter all of its playback settings These settings are also available and fully described in the Control Booth window See section 24 2 for details 8 6 7 Playback Pages Each bank of 15 playbacks has 99 pages of Playbacks available split into left and right banks with an adjustable bank divider The LX900 has 30 playbacks and each bank of 15 playbacks has separate left and right pages The left right division of the playback pages playbacks is shown as a yellow vertical line with a green bar above the left section and a blue bar above the right section Pages are changed using either the virtual page buttons on the playback s touch screen or the real buttons below the playback s touch screen e The right A page up and W page down buttons step through the right pages
151. e The left A page up and W page down buttons step through the left pages e To go directly to a page number on a side press and HOLD either page button on that side then enter the page number using the numbered playback flash buttons For example Holding and pressing 6 page 6 Holding W and pressing 2 2 page 22 There are 99 pages available The division between the left and right sides can be moved by double taping the touch screen of any playback and selecting the Configure Paging tab Page 59 EN Clarity LX Console Controls Operator Manual V2 0 eae antiga E Doubie tap to configure playbacks a The yellow vertical line and green blue bars show the left right page division e The division between left and right can be moved by touching the screen at the desired position There are two 2 banks of 15 playbacks each on the LX900 and the left right page division can be individually configured for each bank 8 6 8 Locking a Playback You can lock a playback so that it is unaffected by page changes To lock a playback double tap on that playback s touch screen and in the Configure Playbacks dialogue tick the box for Lock playback prevent page change The letter L is displayed on the playbacks screen 8 6 9 Managing Pages Pages can be re ordered and named At the bottom of the Configure Paging window above tap Re order rename pages e Tapping in the
152. e existing cached servers If the identity of the new media server exactly matches that of an existing cached media server then it is automatically used If the new media server has not been used before a Configuration Wizard is displayed to walk you through some configuration choices These choices include whether to replace another existing cached media server and whether to patch new matching devices or re use some existing patched devices that are suitable for this media server 19 4 1 Reload The thumbnails for the selected media server can be updated by reloading them from the server Select the tab of the media server to be reloaded described below then on the toolbar click Reload A progress bar shows the status of the reload operation 19 5 MEDIA SERVER OPERATION In the Programmer window the Media Servers tab allows you to control a media server in the Same manner as you would program the attributes of a lighting fixture and then to record your settings as cues in a cue list You can of course include Timing values and Dynamics in the cues that you record See the Timing and Dynamics sections for details The available media servers are organized into individual tabs at the bottom of the screen and each server has two sub tabs the Browser tab and the Controls tab Page 111 Media Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Configure Reload Remove a b e e pe n eee 000_5D PAARA fem 001_HD Sai eef ete e E S
153. e lists can be in the session control at the same time Clicking on a cue list shows the cues in that list and makes it the current session If a cue list has had any of its cues edited then the cue list name turns yellow and so does the name of the individual cue s that have been edited When finished editing either right click on the cue list and select Close or click Close on the Programmer toolbar If you have made any changes to the cue list a dialog box will Selecting Save as allows you to keep the original cue list and save the edited cue list with a new name 23 3 1 Undo Redo Any recording or editing of cues in the Programmer can be by pressing the Control Booth s Undo on the Command Centre or they can be undone or redone by clicking on Undo or Redo at the top of the Control Booth window Page 150 Clarity Ho L S GS C OPEN Control Booth Operator Manual V2 0 24 Control Booth 24 1 OVERVI EW The Control Booth window is the location of all cue lists and provides controls to set the playback modes and settings of cue lists organise cue lists in folders and to arrange the order of cue lists and cues When a Cue list has been selected clicking List allows you to manage the selected cue lists from the drop down menu If a long cue list is selected Follow active by default causes the cue list to automatically scroll to keep the latest active cue on the screen Learn allows you to captu
154. e on the same IP address ranges We suggest using the 2 xxx xxx xxx range If you are not familiar with how to define IP addresses here are some settings to try Clarity Computer IP Addr 2 0 0 101 Subnet 255 0 0 0 Gateway 2 0 0 201 Media Server IP Addr 2 0 0 201 Subnet 255 0 0 0 Gateway 2 0 0 101 2 Do you have Sun VirtualBox installed on your computer If so then by default it re routes all the network traffic and stops thumbnail exchange from working In this scenario please disable the VirtualBox Host Only Ethernet Adapter from within the device manager to resolve the problem 3 If you are using Pandora s Box then you need to go into the preferences and Tick the Enable Thumbnails and CITP checkboxes 38 11 AUDIO PLAYBACK Clarity allows Audio playback to be programmed as part of a lighting show MP3 files can be loaded into the console and then patched as an Audio fixture for inclusion in a show This fixture has two attributes Volume and Play Pause Stop To play audio is a simple matter of selecting the audio fixture adjusting the volume and selecting Play It can be saved as part of a cue in a cuelist or operated live and because Clarity treats it as a fixture it can be given fade wait and delay times and the volume can be controlled via a fader if desired This feature can be used in many different ways One common method is to play a song and have the lighting cues automatically synchronise to the
155. e range you can release the flash button and move the fader to the opposite end then hold flash and move fader to continue adjusting the value If Invert flash button operation on rate faders is ticked you just move the fader without holding flash to adjust the value then if you reach the fader end stop hold flash to reposition the fader e Enable logging to file Default un ticked When ticked many of Clarity s actions are logged to a file called clarity log and stored ina public documents location These log files can be used by LSC to check the operation of Clarity Only tick this box if instructed to by LSC If the box is ticked it has no effect on the operation of Clarity but if the log files are not required they can accumulate over time e Trackball amp mouse divisor settings These setting adjust the sensitivity of the mouse or trackball movements The fine mouse setting is used when the Shift button is held whilst the mouse is dragged The fine trackball setting is used when the Fine button is held whilst the trackball is moved e VX Sticky timeout s Default 5 seconds When you press either Select Release or Edit all of the playback buttons flash waiting for you to select a playback If you do not immediately make a selection sticky timeout sets how long they wait before they stop flashing e VX Trackball timeout ms Default 200 ms Unlike a mouse where you click drag then release a
156. e section 21Error Reference source not found for details o The Clr All button lights when any attributes have been grabbed in either programmer o The Rel All button lights when any playbacks are active on the output Hint Inadvertently pressing Rel All will blackout all Playback To prevent this you can set a User Preference to require both Function and Rel All to be pressed together to release all playbacks e Ortho Orthogonal Holding Ortho whilst moving the trackball restricts the trackball output to only horizontal or vertical movements whichever occurs first When in mouse mode above it acts as a Left mouse button e Fan When multiple fixtures are selected holding Fan whilst moving the trackball will fan the values of those attributes The same as holding Ctrl PC or Cmd Mac when dragging with the mouse in the GUI Page 27 Desktop Clarity c ye PEN Clarity vat LSC 32 Operator Manual V2 0 e Fine Holding Fine whilst moving the trackball gives finer control The same as holding Shift when dragging with the mouse in the GUI When in mouse mode above it acts as a Right mouse button e Record opens the Record Cue dialog box and all playback buttons on VX wings flash To record the programmer contents to a VX20 playback press any flashing playback button If the playback is empty a new cue list will be created If the playback already contains a cue list the new cue will be appended to the end of that cue
157. e selected fixtures When fixtures are selected any applicable presets or freesets turn green to show that they are available Masking rules apply see below to presets or freesets in the Position Presets Beam Presets and Colour Presets panes Also see Build Mode below for details on how to apply multiple presets simultaneously 20 12 4 Build Mode In the Palettes window Build allows you to select combinations of groups preset freesets with individual live timing as described below and then trigger them all in one go When you click Build a command line appears at bottom of the encoder touch screen Now you can select a group or groups select a time select a preset and repeat for any further combination of groups times and presets as you wish then press Enter to trigger them all in one go For example you can Build a complex combination on the fly such as odd fixtures to the drummer and even fixtures to the guitar over 2 seconds with a fanned colour change over 5 seconds and a gobo snap after 10 seconds and then trigger it with a single press of the Enter key 20 12 5 Live Times In the Palettes window Presets and Freesets are usually applied instantly when they are selected When you are busking or Ad libbing a show you can use Clarity s Live Times feature to apply Presets or Freesets over time and hence make smooth changes as you select each Preset or Freeset Selecting the Time button on the Palette wind
158. e that the play button is pressed Pause Metronome pauses and retains the song position count Play Starts the metronome Song position Displays the current bar and beat Quantize Controls the boundary to provide exact trigger timing This can be used in conjunction with the cell s Trigger options Immediate Next Boundary or Immediate Adjusted to synchronize stepping of multiple cells For example if quantize is set to 1 bar then the next boundary is when the song position reaches the start of the next bar If quantize is set to note then the boundary is the next down beat 26 7 PERFORMANCE FREESETS GROUPS The Freesets Groups tab at the top left of the performance window offers a rapid method of putting together clips by combining freesets and groups and playing them from a cell in the Performance grid Select a group of fixtures from the Groups pane and a Freeset from the Freesets pane Drag either the selected group or Freeset and drop it on the desired cell in the grid The selection that you drag will take the other selection with it The I P C B Intensity Position Colour Beam buttons can be used to filter the attribute of the selected Freeset that you want to apply to this clip The cells containing these clips can be manipulated in exactly the same ways as cells containing cue lists as described above Page 173 Intensity Levels Window CA R E e c crsn Clarity T LS C Operator Manual V2 0
159. e to expire before they start to fade Increasing intensity values and all other attributes ignore this setting The default delay time is 0 seconds e Fade Out If any Intensity values are set to decrease when the cue fades out they will use the Fade Out time Increasing intensity values and all other attributes ignore this setting The default Fade Out time is 0 seconds 16 1 3 Playback Times In addition each cue list can be programmed with the following settings e Activate fade in time Default time O seconds This is the time taken for a Cue list to fade in when the first cue is played Normally this would be left at 0 and the affected fixtures in cue 1 would fade in over their programmed time for that cue However you can enter an activate time to scale the fade in over time e Release fade out time Default time 2 seconds This the time taken for the Cue list to fade out when released from a Playback e Playback Rate Proportionally changes all of the timing information in a cue list By default it is set to 100 The range is 1 to 1000 For Example If Rate is set to 50 it Slows all of the fades all times are doubled 100 no change to rates The way that each cue in the cue list is played can be set as either e Halt The cue is manually played by its GO button e Follow The cue is automatically played after the previous cue finishes e Wait time The cue is automatically played after a wait time after the previous cue fi
160. e zi4 mp iMac 300 Mode zi5 Mx 6 Mac 300 Mode 2 6 H MiMac 300 Mode 2 7 PM iMac 300 Modeziet M Position tilted up In the above example fixtures 1 and 2 are panned to the right 3 4 and 5 are centred and 6 7 and 8 are tilted up 21 7 SESSION CONTROL The area at the bottom of the Programmer screen is called the Session Control It contains two programmers and also any cue lists that you have selected to edit See Editing Cues for more details on editing cue lists When you want to create a new look and record it into a cue you do so by adjusting fixture attributes in a Programmer Clicking on a Programmer or a cue list being edited makes it the current session The current session programmer or cue being edited is coloured green Clarity s uses Programmer 1 by default but you can use either programmer when you are creating looks to record as cues or presets The programmers have priority over all other controls except for the GM Grand Master DBO Dead Black Out and Highlight buttons you can set the priority of cue lists to be higher than the programmer in the Configure playbacks dialogue or in the control booth The current session programmer grabs takes control of a fixture attribute as soon as you alter that attribute If a programmer has grabbed any attributes from any fixture then its name turns yellow and lt on stage gt or BLIND is displayed on that programmer 21 7 1 Altered Fi
161. echnobeam Full 6 Colour Wheel Mode Colour 6 Technobeam Full 6 Colour Wheel Colour 6 Technobeam Full 6 Gobo Wheel Beam 6 Technobeam Full 6 Focus Beam Intensity All of the channels in the cue are listed in the Device column and their status as a cue only channel is set by ticking their box The boxes at the top allow you to select either all channels specific groups of channels Intensity Colour Position or Beam Clicking Revert will restore the settings from the cue Click OK to save the settings You can also access this dialog from the programmer when editing a cue by right clicking on the relevant cue in the edit session and selecting Change cue only 25 4 1 Cue Only Indication You can see the cue only status of any channels in a cue by clicking on that cue in the Control Booth window Channels that are cue only are shown as q only beside their value Page 166 Opera JARAN Editing Operator Manual V2 0 L S C c JETEN ame Channel Value Start End Number Name Wait Delay Fade Activity Notes Ee 3 Cue l cue Halt 2 PFO i Studio Color 575 1 Pan O80 Cross qonly O 2000 2 Cue Halt 2 PC i Studio Color 575 1 Tilt 0 82 A452767 qonly O 2000 3 Cue Halt m i Studio Color 575 1 Colour Wheel Mode AA Yellow o 2000 4 Cue Halt z JPC j Studio Color 575 1 Colour whs 0 85 Yellow i Studio Color 575 1 Cue only channels oO 2000 0 56 Yellow m 2000 0 07 Yellow o 20
162. ectors also allow you to simplify your selection choices because only those Presets or Freesets that affect the selected IPCB attributes of the effect are available 20 13 2 Base When a dynamic is applied there is a base value plus a waveform that is applied over that base Therefore if you apply some programming to a fixture then apply a dynamic the programming will be replaced by the base value plus the waveform For example you position some fixtures to the right then apply a circle dynamic preset The dynamic moves the fixtures to the centre its base position then causes them to circle around the base If you want to use your programming as the base for a dynamic effect you can do so by de selecting the Base button The Base filter masks the base values from dynamic Presets and Freesets when they are applied For example you position some fixtures to the right de select Base then apply a circle dynamic preset The circle will be added to the existing position values instead of replacing your position values with its base values Page 123 Palettes gt YOPEN Clarit L S C CSR Operator Manual V2 0 20 13 3 Preserve Dynamics Selecting a preset or freesets will usually replace any existing programming There are times when you might want to apply a dynamic effect then apply a non dynamic preset or freeset to position the dynamic effect To preserve any existing dynamics click Preserve Dynamics then apply the non dynamic pr
163. ed when your computer s USB connector cannot supply sufficient power for the VX10 VX10 Rear Panel The rear panel is described in detail below 3 9 VX20 PROGRAMMING amp PLAYBACK WING Programming controls on a computer can be augmented by adding an LSC Clarity VX20 wing This has all of the features of the VX10 but adds 10 button Playbacks with LCD displays and multiple page selection Programmer controls including trackball MIDI in and out and includes four DMX512 universe outputs Connect the VX20 wing to a USB port of your computer using the cable provided The VX20 is designed to operate off USB power however for some computers and when using a LED gooseneck light there may be insufficient USB power to operate the VX20 To cater for this the VX20 is fitted with an internal universal mains power supply We recommend connecting the VX20 using the supplied IEC cable to a source of 85 to 264 Volts AC mains power wherever possible The backlight for the LCD screen only works when external power is connected VX20 Rear Panel 3 9 1 USB Indicator The LED beside the USB connector shows the status e Flashing RED No USB connected The DBO button also flashes e Steady RED USB connected but Clarity not running on computer e Green USB data is OK 3 9 2 DMX Indicators The LED beside each DMX connector shows the status e Green DMX data is OK Page 11 Desktop Clarity Pe L Ss C c SREN Clarity i EAR
164. edia files are copied to the Clarity media folder 29 4 DESKTOP CLARITY LOCAL MEDIA LIBRARIES When adding media to a show rig background audio files pixel mapping desktop versions will ask if you want to copy the media the Clarity media folder If you agree then a copy will be placed there and that will be the file added to the show This allows you to use a local media library that already exists on your computer Page 178 Opera JERAN Show Files Operator Manual V2 0 L S C c JETEN If you use existing media libraries that are not in the Clarity media folder and you export your show to another computer running Clarity save it on this machine and then import it back to the original machine you need to be aware that the second machine will place the media in its Clarity media folder When you import the show back on the original machine you will end up with a copy in the Clarity media folder as well as the original file but the show will now be referencing the Clarity media folder and not the original file In this case it would be best if you declined to either include the media files when exporting the show or un tick the media files when importing onto the target machine You will get the usual warnings that the media files can t be found but the media paths won t be changed by the export import export import process Page 179 LSC JERAR Operator Manual V2 0 30 MIDI 30 1 OVERVI EW MIDI Musical Inst
165. ee Ee e t pe e mi 003_Folder Papit 5 E ee 004_Folder C 005_Folder 008_Src_03_b mov 009_Src_04_b mov 010_Src_04_c mov 011_Src_04_d mov 012_Src_05_d mov 013_Src_06_a mov 014_Src_06_d mov 015_Src_08_a mov O07_Src_03_a mov gt 007_Folder gt 008_Folder gt 009_Folder gt 010_Folder I O11_Folder 012_Folder I 013_Folder b 014_Folder gt 015_Folder b 016_Folder gt 017_Folder gt 016_Folder O19 Folder gt 020_Folder gt gt 021_Folder 022_Folder gt 006_Folder 10_a mov O020_Src_10_c mov 021_Src_12_a mov Media Server Browser tab 19 5 1 Browser The Browser tab shows the available folders in the left hand pane and the contents media items of the selected folder in the right hand pane At the bottom are the Layer Control Attribute Controls one for each patched media layer of the selected server e Select a Layer Attribute Control by clicking on it The selected Layer has a yellow border e Clicking on a media item in the browser selects that item and sends it to the selected layer The output Level control at the bottom of each Layer Control Attribute Control can be varied by dragging with the mouse 19 5 2 Controls The Controls tab shows all of the attributes of the selected layer including the media selection and Level attributes controlled from the Browser tab MediaMaster
166. eeset and apply it to any fixture that has colour ability and it will output blue e Record a chase Freeset and apply it to any type and quantity of fixtures and they will chase e Record a fanned tilt Freeset and apply it to any type and quantity of moving fixtures and they will fan their tilts Freesets can also contain dynamic real time effects values See section 17 Dynamics for more details 20 8 1 Permutating Freesets Freesets permutate their values onto the destination fixtures If the Freeset was recorded using 3 fixtures and it is then applied to 12 fixtures it will apply the Freeset to the first 3 then apply it again to the next 3 the next 3 and so on Permutate is the default setting For example A Freeset is created from 4 fixtures at 25 50 75 and 100 intensity When it s applied to 4 fixtures they will be set to 25 50 75 and 100 When it s applied to 8 fixtures the first 4 will get 25 50 75 and 100 and the next 4 will also get 25 50 75 and 100 20 8 2 Scaling Freesets A scaling Freeset has only two values a start value and an end value When this Freeset is applied to a greater quantity of destination fixtures the start value is applied to the first fixture in the selection and the end value is applied to the last fixture in the selection All of the other selected fixtures gets an intermediate value that is graduated between the start and end values A scaling Freeset is created by selecting
167. efine endpoints and messages in the OSC setting dialogue box 31 4 SCHEDULER You can define various playback actions to occur at specific dates or times with optional repeats for n repeats or forever This function is intended for scenarios where Clarity operates unattended To schedule an event from the menu select Show Time date scheduler Sy Scheduled Events Shark if acti To add an event click on the button Sy Scheduled Event Byo1 2013 11 22 00 AM In the Start time pane select the date and time for the action to occur The action can be repeated by ticking the Repeat box and selecting how often the action will repeat The drop down box allows you to choose from seconds minutes hours days weeks months or years The number of repeats can also be set Setting Repeat count to O will make the action repeat forever The Target pane Page 186 eee C JELEAR Remote Control Operator Manual V2 0 y L S C JAREN The playback actions cover running a specific cue list jumping to a cue releasing a cue list or releasing all Page 187 Tracking Backup He L S eo c Se FEN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 32 Tracking Backup 32 1 OVERVIEW Tracking Backup allows another LX console to track a master instance of Clarity on the LX console so that the playback state and show contents are kept in sync on both sessions via a network connection If the ma
168. either e Press Undo immediately after applying the preset or Freeset e Right click on the Preset or Freeset and select De activate This removes all programming from the affected attributes Page 124 Clarity Ler EN Palettes Operator Manual V2 0 20 16 RECORDI NG CUES WITH PRESETS amp FREESETS When you have created the desired look record it as a cue using the Record or Append last buttons in the command centre Cues containing a preset only include a link to the preset so that if the preset is updated the cue will use the updated values 20 17 UPDATI NG A PRESET DURI NG PROGRAMMI NG Attributes that have had a preset applied will display the name of the preset in their respective Attribute Controls as shown on the Encoder touch screen Universal and Direct and on the Programmer tab If you adjust the attributes and want to update the preset to use these new values then either e Right click on the preset and select Update item e Press Record Preset then select the existing preset from the drop down box The preset will be activated on the currently selected e To update the preset click Record 20 18 UPDATING A PRESET DURI NG PLAYBACK e Playback a cue that contains the preset e Press Grab Attributes that have had a preset applied will display the name of the preset in their respective Attribute Controls as shown on the Encoder touch screen Universal and Direct and on the Programmer tab e Adjust the attributes
169. el used by the first fixture of the server must be immediately followed by the first channel of its next fixture etc e In the Patch window s Library pane select the manufacturer then the model of the media server Drag and drop the media servers master fixture and each layer fixture onto the required DMX universe and starting slots as set in the media server Refer to your Media Servers documentation for details on its DMX control and set up 19 3 NETWORK CONNECTION Media servers broadcast their presence over Ethernet If Clarity is on the same network it picks up these broadcasts and automatically connects to supported media servers Clarity will then download the available thumbnails of the media in the server Usually these are just media thumbnails but some will also supply effect thumbnails Most media servers also broadcast their configuration including their number of available layers and patch status Once thumbnails are downloaded they are saved to a cache file so that they are available for off line programming without the physical media server being connected When the show is loaded if the media server is not physically present cached is shown on the relevant media 19 4 CONFIGURATION To configure a media server in the encoder wheel touch screen s Media mode select Menu Configure Auto Configure OK When a new media server is discovered on the network its identity name and IP address is compared to th
170. elect Clear where is the actual attribute name 21 8 PROGRAMMER TOOLBAR At the top of the Programmer window is the Programmer Toolbar It provides additional functions that you can use as you program as listed below Show Patch Programmer Palettes Control Booth Performance Levels Redo None Prey All Mesct Grab Preview To Preset Record Append Last Update Highlight Blind Clear Toolbox T Programmer Toolbar 21 8 1 Undo Redo You can undo and redo all operations that you have performed in the Programmer window A separate undo history is maintained for Programmer 1 Programmer 2 and any edit sessions Repeatedly click Undo or Redo to step through the programming that you have performed Hint The Control Booth window has separate undo and redo commands for every cue list that is saved or edited Clicking Toolbox Show Undo View reveals the history list of all of the programming commands You can instantly undo or redo to any step in the list by clicking on that step 21 8 2 None Prev All Next When more than one fixture is selected you can refine your control to an individual fixture whilst still maintaining you multiple selection by pressing Prev or Next Clicking All restores control to all selected fixtures Clicking None deselects all fixtures See Selecting Fixtures above for more details Page 134 Opera ORSR Programmer Operator Manual V2 0 ed L S C JAREN Hint Use the Hig
171. els Stage Scan Lamp control Cyan MADAN A inftenaty ra iz Inhouse Prog ammer Progammer 1 Programmer Programmer I Gabe Inder Rotated ENect Ue Piatt Wheels Piet Inder Rotated k Focwa Joon lanp Contri E MA A Freri Interet y dewxes infenmty Mac 300 Mode 4 f NA va e zw A Infenaly f doves Feno y Dien Dirrie anty Satter Strode Pan Zz E Postion beed ionaty Mpeed Source of control for each fixture ighen 1 4 If the source is a playback each Attribute Control shows you the name of the cue list plus the cue number and name Page 174 Clarity C Jen EN Levels Window Operator Manual V2 0 27 4 PROGRAMMER VALUES The Programmer tab allows you to view the output of either Programmer or any edit sessions that ere open by clicking on the drop down box or you can tick the Follow current check box to show the contents of the current programmer 27 5 CUE LIST VALUES Selecting the Cue List button allows you to view the output of any Cue List by clicking on the drop down box and selecting from the Cue List box Recently viewed cue lists are also listed in the drop down selection cl ick on a cue to B eee 5 Antanas ee Click on a cue to see its contents Tick the Follow active cue check box to automatically see the contents of the active cue in the selected cue list 27 6 CUSTOMIZING THE DISPLAY Clicking the icons in the top right corner of each type of fixture type allows a trade off between
172. end Last buttons allow you to record your programming Programmer Tab Selection StuCl575 10 Selection Sidebar Session Control Programmer Toolbar Clear All Release All DBO 2 Highlight Blind Clear Toolbox Attribute Controls Universal Control Panel Programmer Window with Attribute tab selected Page 127 eeu e L S C ORAR Operator P 21 3 SELECTI ON SI DEBAR All patched fixtures are available in the Selection Sidebar Patched fixtures are automatically organized into tabs of each fixture type and the Groups tab automatically contains a group for every type of patched fixture You can create your own groups and add them to the groups tab The Sort tab provides additional fixture sorting Fixture tabs can be renamed by right clicking on them Groups and Sort are described below 21 4 SELECTI NG FIXTURES Clicking on a fixture type tab reveals a list of all of the patched fixtures of that type To Group Studio Color 575 All None Odd Even 5 9 Studio Color 575 1 iG 10 Studio Color 575 2 Be fj 11 Studio Color 575 3 E 12 Studio Color 575 4 Be hea 13 Studio Color 575 5 BE 14 Studio Color 575 6 P 15 Studio Color 575 7 E i 16 Studio Color 575 8 BE A 17 Studio Color 575 9 ag 18 Studio lor 575 10 BE Selection Sidebar Current Fixture type tab e Select All None Odd or Even to select relevant fixtures of that type Selecting Odd or Eve
173. enue with no need to reprogram the whole show possibly just trim and update the position presets 11 5 KEYPAD PATCHING Fixtures can be patched using the numeric keypad when Patch window has been selected In the Patch window select the required fixture from the Library If you don t select a fixture type from the library a generic dimmer will be automatically selected for you On the numeric keypad or a keyboard type in a fixture unit number and the command line automatically appears at the bottom of the screen showing the fixture type and the unit number you have entered Type then a DMX slot number and press Enter to make the patch The patch s will be made to the current universe as selected by the tab at the top of the Patch window Additional patching commands are listed below 11 5 1 Patching Commands The patching commands are e unit number slot number Enter Patches a single fixture unit at the given DMX slot number For example 1 1 Enter will patch fixture 1 to DMX slot 1 e unit number Enter Patches a single fixture at the next available patch slot number For example 1 Enter will patch fixture 1 to the next available DMX slot e slot number Enter Patches the next available fixture unit number at the given patch slot number For example 1 Enter will patch the next available fixture number to slot 1 e A range of fixture unit numbers can be selected by using either the Thru key an
174. erating Concepts and Terminology section at the end of this manual before proceeding The basic steps in controlling lighting fixtures are e Patching the fixtures to the DMX slots Universes that will control them e Programming The basic principles of programming are Select a fixture or multiple fixtures Adjust the fixtures attributes to get the desired look Record the fixture attributes values to a Preset or a Cue Cue list e Playback of the Cues Chases etc 9 2 PATCHI NG Clicking on the Patch tab of the monitor reveals the patch window To patch a fixture e Inthe Library click on the fixture manufacturers name to show all of their models then select your model of fixture Dimmers are located in the Generic listing e Drag the fixture name and drop it into the desired DMX slot in the Patch Field or double click the fixture name to patch it to the next available slot e Enter the quantity of fixtures in the pop up Add Devices dialog then click Patch e Continue to select fixtures and patch them as above e Inthe Connections Pane click the down arrow beside the Universe that you have patched your fixtures to and then select the output DMX connector or Artnet universe to use See section 11 for more details Page 68 Clarity S9 L S E C JAREN Basic Operation Operator Manual V2 0 9 3 PROGRAMMI NG Clarity provides many methods of selecting your fixtures e Touching fixtures or groups in Rig mode
175. ery slow in middle rae Slow in middle Jf Fast in middle J Very Fast in middle Snap in middle Bounce at end 11 10 MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM INTENSITY You can set minimum and maximum intensity values for a fixture or dimmer These values are applied proportionately throughout the dimming range Setting a maximum value for a fixture will reduce the intensity value on the output relative to the intensity value that you have programmed For example If you set a maximum of 80 then when you program an intensity value of 100 the fixture intensity will be 80 If you dim the fixture to 50 its intensity will be 40 A Minimum value is often used with incandescent lamps to pre heat the filament This can increase lamp life by reducing the surge of current that flows through a cold filament It also Speeds up a lamps response when it is instantly flashed to full power A minimum value of between 5 to 10 usually provides enough heating effect without producing noticeable light to an audience To set a minimum or maximum values select the Intensity fade profile as described above and enter your required values in the minimum and maximum boxes The current curve shows the minimum and maximum values and the proportional level of the fade Intensity Fade Profile Page 80 Clarity tH L S G C OREN Patching Fixtures Operator Manual V2 0 11 11 CUSTOM FIXTURES Clarity s contains a fully integrated fixture li
176. eset When this check box is ticked the preset will be automatically activated in the programmer Set as Favourite When this check box is ticked the preset will be automatically added to the Favourites tab in the Palettes and Programmer windows Page 118 Operal Oscar palettes Operator Manual V2 0 Y L S C CLEAR 20 11 PALETTE ICONS 20 11 1 Group Icons Group Icons e Each group icon displays its name and a number e auto indicates groups that have been automatically created Clarity automatically creates a group for every different type of fixture that has been patched Auto groups cannot be edited or deleted e When the icon has a Yellow border the group is selected e If the border is dotted only some of the fixtures in the group are selected possibly by another group or by the current programmer e Clicking on an icon selects that group refer to Selection phase vs Programming phase earlier in this manual e If you right click on a Group icon you can choose e Activate This is the same as clicking on the group Activate replace Selects this group ONLY and removes other selections De actvate Deselects this group Rename Delete Update Updates the group with the current fixture selection Favourite Adds removes this group in the Favourites tab 20 11 2 Preset amp Freeset Icons Preset amp Freeset Icons e At the top of each icon is the name of the preset or freeset and its number
177. esets or freesets Show Patch Programmer Pale es Control Booth Perfor Safe arrange Auto mask PPreserse Creirnalics Time Build Palettes tab Preserve Dynamics 20 14 CONTROLLI NG DYNAMI CS The settings of the dynamics can then be varied by either e Selecting the Dynamics mode on the encoder wheel touch screen and adjusting the controls as described in the Dynamics section e Using the playback faders in extended fader controls mode See section 8 6 12 for details e Using the Rate and Amp controls in the Palettes window To vary the rate you can either enter a value click the up and down arrows or move the spin box roller which provides smooth variable control Just click then drag with the mouse to activate a virtual spin roller wheel that adjusts the box values When adjusting the value you can drag over the entire height of the screen If you hold Ctrl and click and drag then when your mouse pointer moves above or below the virtual wheel it continues to spin with inertia When a dynamic effect is active in the rate control in the encoder wheel touch screen Dynamics mode will either display a bpm beats per minute value if all effects are at the same rate or a percentage change value if the rates are different The amp amplitude control always displays a percentage change value 20 15 DEACTI VATE A PRESET OR FREESET To deactivate a preset or Freeset that you have applied
178. ession opens in live mode Select channels use number keypad entry for speed and change levels using the intensity wheel Intensities mode gives you an instant picture of the output intensity levels The cue can still be faded up or down with the playback s master Multiple cue lists can be edited at the same time and the edit sessions will follow the selected playback and the active cue on that playback To keep the changes click Save updates to the current playback or to revert to the original cue values on the playback click Close Discard Hint If you record several cue lists that only contain one cue each and load them onto playbacks set the Go on fader up option for each cue list Now each playback will always be active when it is faded up Page 92 Operator Manual V2 0 L S C c JETEN 16 Timing 16 1 OVERVI EW Clarity provides comprehensive controls for the timing of your Playbacks and Cues 16 1 1 Cue Times Every attribute in every cue can have individual values for e Delay The time from when the cue starts until the attribute s begin to change The default delay time is 0 seconds e Fade The time taken for the attribute s to change to the value in the cue The default fade time is 2 seconds Cue times as fully described below 16 1 2 Intensity Fade Out times e Out Delay If any Intensity values are about to decrease when the cue fades out they will wait for the Out Delay tim
179. et Flashing red boxes appear around each group of settings Click inside a red box to reset those controls Page 151 neni one DEAR Operator Mania de Hint The current settings that you choose for a cue list can be used as the defaults for all new cue lists by right clicking on a cue list and selecting Use Current options as default 24 2 1 Cue list Playback Options These options affect the way a cue list will playback Tracking ca E Clicking the Mode drop down box allows you to select the way that the information in the incoming cue is applied Tracking t Tracking Tracking not jumps Cue Only e Tracking Default setting When a cue is played back the attribute values in the cue are applied to the output Any attribute information from previous cues that has not been updated by the new cue is retained on the output Therefore the cue list will track unchanged information from previous cues to the current cue until overridden by a new value For example Cue 1 fixtures 1 amp 2 to 100 Cue 2 fixture 1 to 50 When cue 2 is played back fixture 2 stays at 100 because it has no new value in cue 2 Fixture 2 levels have tracked through A random jump in Tracking mode from one cue to a later cue will collect all the intervening value changes so that the destination cues exact state is achieved as if the playback had stepped through all cues up to that point For example Jumping over missi
180. et to be combined with any existing dynamics that have been applied The resulting combined effect can also be recorded as another preset De activate Clears all programming from the affected attributes Rename Enter a new name Delete The preset or freeset is instantly deleted No undo Replace Only available for freesets Freesets cannot be updated but can be replaced with a new version Previously recorded cues are not affected by the replaced freeset e Duplicate Only available for freesets Makes a duplicate that you can edit to create a variation of the original freeset e Update Only available for presets Updates the preset with the current programmer s settings for the attributes in the preset The updated preset will be used when any cue with a link to that preset is played back 20 12 APPLYING PRESETS AND FREESETS Preset and freeset can be applied from the Palettes Programmer or Performance windows or directly by keyboard command See section 25 Performance Window for details on how to use presets and freesets in the Performance Window 20 12 1 Keyboard Commands Every preset and freeset has a number You can apply a preset or freeset number to the currently selected fixtures or to a group or to a playback For example e To apply a preset to the currently selected fixtures press Preset enter a number on the keypad Enter e To apply multiple presets to the currently selected fixtures press Preset
181. ettes Page 16 Clarity tf L S E C JAREN Desktop Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 3 Control Booth and Performance provide extensive methods of playback 4 Levels shows you what is happening on the output All of these operations are described in detail in their relevant sections of this manual The right end of the top toolbar has buttons for Clear All Release All and DBO e Clear All clears all fixtures from all Programmers e Release All releases all fixtures from all Playbacks See the Programmer and Control Booth sections for more details on Clearing a and Releasing e DBO Dead Black Out instantaneously blacks out all fixtures and dimmers This is a momentary action When the button is released all output is instantly restored e GM Grand Master When you hover the mouse over the DBO button the Grand Master GM appears You can click on O Black Out or 100 Full level or drag the virtual fader to set an overall intensity level The DBO button flashes red if the Grand Master is set to any level below 100 It stays red when the Grand Master is set to 0 Clear Al Release Al DBO 100 Page 17 Desktop Clarity Ra c yo Fen Clarity a5 SC a Operator Manual V2 0 3 14 PATCHING Clicking on the Patch tab reveals the patch window To patch a fixture e Inthe Library click on the fixture manufacturers name to show all of their models then select your model of fixture Dimmers are located in the Generic listi
182. eypad to enter your patching commands Keypad patching is described below 11 3 1 Drag and Drop Patching To patch a fixture e Click on the fixture manufacturers name in the Library side bar to reveal the available fixture models Hints To quickly jump to a manufacturer click on any manufacturer then type in the first letter of the required manufacturer s name or type their name in the search field Recently patched fixtures can also be found at the top of the Library e Click on a fixture name then drag and drop it into the desired DMX slot on the Universe View or double click the fixture name to patch it to the next available slot 11 3 2 Patching Dimmers To Patch a dimmer in the Library select Generic then Dimmer then double click or drag and drop as described above 11 3 3 Clarity Universes You can patch fixtures to a new universe by dragging them and hovering over the New tab for a second or so You can also click on the New tab to create a new universe Clarity calls its internal universes A B C etc Later in the connections pane you connect Clarity s universes to hardware universes When you drop a fixture into the patch or double click a fixture the Add devices dialog box opens For example if patching Mac250 s Page 75 Patching Fixtures Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 e Quantity allows you to enter the quantity of fixtures to patch e Location sets the Universe A B etc and starting DMX slot
183. f device irrespective of how many of that type of device are selected a ompact Z capped Expanded Studio Color 575 Shutter Strobe Pa Wt Cyan m ps gt aa Stu 1575 10 eee ee Me i e me Colour Wheel Mode Colour vee Hee fact MWAeai t Fixture Global Reset StuciS75 l ic7c Intenaty Shutter Strobe y Ti Postion Macros Colour Wheel Mode Colour Wheel Mode ase 7 rt a s me 100 E a B oars 2s ra ee SN 5 Cafour Wheel Colour Wheel Gobo Wheel Mode ei Gabo Wheel Mode 2 Gobo Wheel Gobo Wheel Gobo Mndex Rotate iji CLET ta Aa e Pil ws aay ne sve Eee E ATi i Si H Yun Jiii x Pale AZN obo Index Rotate Lamp Controf Global MSpeed Capped Display max 5 lines per device Selecting Expanded displays an attribute control that shows all selected device of that type Page 71 Clarity Customising Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Logical Compact Capped gt Expanded Studio Color 575 Shutter Strobe Pan Toe Cyan Colour Wheel Mode Colour Wheel Effect Wheel Effect Wheel Fixture Global Reset Global Moeed YA A XY Studio Spot 575 A Vv P Shutter Strobe Pan Tat Postion Macros Calour Wheel Mode Colour Whee Modez i a i Colour Wheel Colow Wheelt Gobo Wheel Modei Gobo mee Mode 2 Gobo Whee Gobo WheelF2 obo index Rotate St d uSnS7S Expanded Display All selected devices shown 10 9 PREFERENCES You can customize many of Clarity s features in the User Preferen
184. f fades back to the previous step Press Function Il dto snap to the previous cue o The indicator in the button lights when the fade to the next cue has completed e Select Selecting a playback allows it to be controlled by the Master and Master II kq buttons and also selects the playbacks cue list in the Control Booth window allowing you to see and or change the playback settings of the cue list o To select a playback tap Select then tap any button of the desired playback o The cue list name of the currently selected cue is displayed in reverse video black text on white background e gt Master Go Plays the next cue or restarts a paused fade of the selected playback See Select above e kK Master Pause Go Back Pauses the fade of the selected playback If no fade is in progress if fades back to the previous step See Select above e Release To release a playback tap Release All buttons of all playbacks flash Tap any button of the playback to be released To clear remove a cue list from a playback right click on the name of the cue list on the virtual playback then click Clear e Edit To edit a cue on a playback tap Edit All buttons of all playbacks flash Tap any button of the playback to be edited e Record opens the Record Cue dialog box TO append a cue to the last recorded cue list press Record twice To record the cue on a playback on a VX wing press the flash button of that playback e Page
185. f it is varied after being recorded it is again touched When an attribute is no longer controlled by a programmer it is said to be cleared from the programmer Page 201 Operating Concepts amp Terminology H O L S C C Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 37 6 PLAYBACK CONTROL When a cue is played back any fixture attribute values in that cue appear on the output subject to priority rules above When a playback no longer controls any attributes the playback is said to be released 37 7 RECORDING AND PLAYBACK CONCEPTS When you record a cue there are several options that control exactly which attribute values will be recorded The options that you choose determine the suitability of the cue for the style of playback that you choose to use Each cue list can be individually set for its own mode of playback In its simplest form there are two modes of playback Tracking and Cue Only These playback modes determine how the output of a playback will change when a cue is played back The default settings in Clarity will record cues that are suitable for playback in tracking mode and play them back in tracking mode Let s firstly look at how the different modes of playback work and then see how to record cues that are best suited to the selected playback mode 37 7 1 Tracking Playback When a cue list is set to Tracking mode and the first cue is played back the fixture attribute values in the first cue appear on the output of the playback
186. f the LED desk light on the VX wing control can be controlled by holding down Function and Select together 3 26 FREE MODE Early versions of Clarity will run in free mode Clarity will only run in free mode if it was downloaded as version 1 3 or earlier and registered for free mode prior to April 8 2011 To continue running the free version it must be upgraded to version 1 3 2 and cannot be upgraded further The following restrictions are applied to the free mode of Clarity Limited to a single universe output of 32 fixtures and 128 channels The VX10 and VX20 wings have the front panel controls LCDs faders and buttons and the remote trigger inputs disabled However the DMX outputs on the rear and the USB port on the top still work MIDI functionality is disabled Media Servers functionality is disabled Matrix functionality is disabled RDM functionality is disabled Tracking Backup is disabled The template request service is not provided to users of the free version however Clarity does have a built in fixture editor which can be used instead Technical support for the free version is via the user forums only Page 30 opera ORAN LX Consoles Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C JAREN 4 LX Consoles 4 1 OVERVIEW There are three models in the Clarity LX range of consoles LX300 LX600 The following three sections of this manual describe each model respectively including the rear panel connection
187. f the source area window allowing you to select all or only some of the source image e Source X Adjusts the horizontal position of the source area window e Source Y Adjusts the vertical position of the source area window You can also click on the actual source window and drag its position e Rotation Rotates the source image about the Z axis e Source Aspect Adjusts the aspect ratio of the source image e Seek Sets the current still frame of a movie but only when the Run Stop control is paused at 0 e Run Stop If the current media is a movie file then this starts stops or restarts the movie When set to zero playback is paused and above zero playback is running If the control is moved to full then the movie restarts from the beginning e Speed Set the playback speed The remaining controls affect how the selected Pixel Source image is mapped onto the matrix Output transformations allow you to scale and position the resultant image and apply rotation in the x y and z planes Perspective adds perceived depth to x and y rotations Page 106 Operator Manual V2 0 A L S C CLEAR e Output Zoom Sets the size of the output image e Output X Adjusts the horizontal position of the output image e Output Y Adjusts the vertical position of the output image You can also click on the actual output image and drag its position X Rotation Rotates the output image about the X axis Y Rotation Rotates the outp
188. figure an intensity view on the Intensity Levels tool bar click Settings or right click ona view and click Configure 1 Intensity Levels View Config Z Follow current playback Follow current cue Show fader level Values Stored values or edit session w E p wr a F f Zero Levels 7 Show Zero Levels w Animate activity changes The options for each view are View Mode If you are configuring a new window you can set it to display either e Playback contents with additional options to follow current playback follow current cue and show fader level of the playback e Console Output Values only for playback contents mode e Stored values only Always display the values stored in the current cue irrespective of whether the cue is active or under edit e Stored values or edit session Same as above but channels being edited are shown in red e Live values Only values from the current cue are shown if they are active Zero levels e Show zero levels All levels are shown e Hide zero levels Zero levels are removed from the view and all non zero levels shuffled up to avoid empty space e Shade zero levels This also hides zero levels by making them appear very faint but doesn t shuffle non zero levels so all channels always appear in the same place Page 176 o i rir Intensity Levels Window Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C Jane Animate Activity changes If ticked the channel number will be highlig
189. g for more details If the programmer settings are satisfactory then record the cue 21 8 5 To Preset Clicking To Preset records a new Preset or Freeset or updates an existing one See section 20 Palettes for more information on Presets and Freesets 21 8 6 Record Save e Clicking Record opens the Record Cue dialog box allowing you to record the current programmer settings as a cue in a Ccue list e If the current session is editing a cue list this button becomes Save 21 8 7 Append last Save As e Clicking Append last provides a one click method of automatically recording a cue as the next cue in the last recorded cue list If you hover over the button with the mouse pointer a tool tip will tell you which cue list will be appended to e If the current session is editing a cue list this button becomes Save As 21 8 8 Update When you are playing back a show the look on stage may be built up from several cues from different playbacks at the same time You might decide to change the look on stage by using the programmer to override the attribute values from the cues or possibly add new attribute values When you want to save the changes that you have made to the look it can be difficult to know into which cue to record each altered values because the current look is made up of Page 135 T OPENI i Pa ey L S C c Operator A several cues plus the programmer output The cues might also have been linked to presets and
190. hat tracking is suspended and a resync is needed and a button is presented for that purpose When you resync the master sends the show data over the network to the slave which will load the data via a restart and reconnect with the master Click on Tracking Backup Slave and Clarity will start and automatically connect to the master The slave will auto reconnect if the connection is lost 32 3 OPERATING FROM THE SLAVE In the event of a main system crash Close the Tracking Backup Slave dialog box on the Slave and the slave back up will already have the same looks running live Page 189 ores gt OPEN Clarit rererences p L S C Cer Operator Manual v2 0 33 Preferences and About 33 1 USER PREFERENCES Selecting Show Settings Preferences from the main menu allows you to customize the operation of Clarity The default settings for new cue lists can also be customized or reset to standard See section 24 2 for details When a show is saved the user preferences and new cue list default settings are always saved as part of the show file When an existing show is loaded e If Store Preferences Globally is ticked the user preferences as set in the dialog box and the new cue list defaults are retained e If Store Preferences Globally is NOT ticked the user preferences and new cue list defaults in the show file are loaded When a NEW show is loaded e If Store Preferences Globally is
191. hat use Cyan Magenta Yellow subtractive colour mixing Select the RGB fixtures and set them to a colour or even fan a range of colours then press Copy Select the CMY fixtures then press Paste All 24 fixtures are now set to matching colours Clarity s fixture translation engine is very comprehensive and will attempt to convert all programming for all attribute types Page 138 Opera ORSR Programmer Operator Manual V2 0 ed L S C JAREN 21 9 9 Flip Flip will alter the current pan and tilt values of the selected moving yoke fixture s to the other possible combination of values that achieves the same position on stage Moving yoke fixtures typically have 2 combinations of pan amp tilt values that can aim the fixture at the same location When a cue list transitions from one position to another it might be that the yoke does an undesired twirl because it current pan and tilt values cause it to take the indirect route to the new position If this occurs edit the cue containing the starting position and select the fixture that is taking the wrong path then from the programmer s Toolbox click Flip then save the edit The fixture will now transition to the next cue via the opposite route 21 9 10 Personalizing the Toolbar The Programmer Toolbar can be personalized by moving any button from the main toolbar to the Toolbox and vice versa e Right click on any toolbar button and select Move to toolbox e Right click on any toolbox
192. have the following functions e pb Plays the next cue e l K Pause Back Pauses a fades in progress If no fade is in progress if fades back to the previous step e Function Il k Snap to the previous cue e Function gt Snap to the next cue Normally the manual faders become active when the cuelist is active and paused However pressing Il K Pause Back when the cuelist is inactive or already paused will cause it to play the previous cue Taping the split playbacks Select button will arm the playback which will always pause the cuelist at the current position even if it s inactive It will pause at cue 1 Os Page 45 LX Console Controls ee L S cS ce nns Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 8 LX Console Controls 8 1 OVERVIEW The following controls on the LX consoles that are common to all models 8 2 GRAND MASTER The Grand Master and DBO Dead Black Out button only affects the intensity of your fixtures The DBO is a momentary action and the button lights when active or flashes if the Grand Master is set to any level below 100 The LX600 and LX900 both have motorized Grand Masters When multiple consoles are networked the Grand Masters are all synchronized so adjusting the GM on any console moves the GM on all consoles to ensure that all operators have the correct visual feedback from the position of the faders The grand master and DBO can be disabled in the Preferences menu See sec
193. he Page 207 Operating Concepts amp Terminology H O L S C C JAREN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 controller has no idea what it is connected to or even if what it s connected to is working switched on or even there at all RDM changes all that allowing the equipment to answer back An RDM enabled moving light for example can tell you many useful things about its operation the DMX address it is set to the operating mode it is in whether its pan or tilt is inverted and how many hours since the lamp was last changed But RDM can do more than that It isn t limited to just reporting back it can change things as well As its name suggests it can remotely manage your device RDM has been designed to work with existing DMX systems It does this by interleaving its messages with the regular DMX signal over the same wires There is no need to change any of your cables but because RDM messages now go in two directions any in line DMX processing you have needs to be changed for new RDM hardware This will most commonly mean that DMX splitters and buffers will need to be upgraded to RDM capable devices Page 208 oe Cc Sea Hints and Tips Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C JESEN 38 Hints and Tips 38 1 SIMPLE CUE PLAYBACK If you are a novice and are having trouble understanding tracking the following settings will make Clarity operate in Cue Only mode with the cues automatically playing and releasing when a fader is ra
194. hlight function below to identify the fixture being controlled 21 8 3 Grab The Grab function automatically selects active fixtures Clicking Grab offers two selections e Grab Active Grabs all attributes that are active on the output of Clarity into the current programmer e Grab Active Default Grabs all attributes that are active on the output of Clarity PLUS all the other attributes of those fixtures that are at their Default level into the current programmer In other words it grabs every attribute of any fixture that currently has any of its attributes active on the output of Clarity 21 8 4 Preview Preview allows you to rehearse the transition from the previous state to the cue that you are creating before you actually record it e Clicking Preview pops up the Preview Cue dialog and the fixtures revert in 0 5 second to their original attribute settings prior to being altered by the current Programmer session if you are editing a cue list then they will revert to the state of the preceding cue Ty Preview Cue Waiting For go e Click Go to see the fixtures change back to the current programmer state the cue that you are currently creating using the times that you have set in the Timing tab e To see the move again click Reset then Go e Click Close to finish If the new look or the timing is not satisfactory adjust the attributes or timing then preview the move again See section 16 Timin
195. how Save show Save show as Export show Settings Tracking Backup Timecode Timefdate scheduler About LSC Clarity Switch bo Fixture Editor Exit Restart Clarity 3 12 MODES OF OPERATI ON Clarity s top toolbar is available in all modes of operation and has tabs allowing you to switch between the main windows of Patch Rig Programmer Palettes Control Booth Performance Levels and I ntensity Levels Show Patch Rig BPogremmer Palettes Control Booth Performance Levels Intensity Levels Release All DBO Undo None Prey All Next Grab Preview To Preset Record Update Highlight Blind le Toolbox Desktop Mode When Clarity is started in a LX console emulation mode described above the main window is contained within a special wrapper window which can be scrolled to navigate the main window This allows the main window to remain at the original size it would be on the console to preserve graphical layouts and positions Fullscreen Resizable Hide toolbar f Show Patch Programmer Palettes Control Booth Performance Levels Intensity Levels Console Release All DBO LX Programmer L300 Playbacks f LX300 emulation Mode Fullscreen Resizable Hide toolbar Playback Display Mode Programmer Palettes Control Levels Intensity Performance Console Booth Levels LX Programmer LX Palettes LX600 Playbacks LX600 emulation Mode Page 13 Desktop Clarity Er C OPEN Clarity ES Oper
196. hted in yellow whenever its level is changing The Detail pane allows you to select the detail that is displayed for each channel number Unit number Fixture name Source Playback Source Cue list Source Cue Graphical Level The font size can also be set 28 3 CONSOLE VI EW The Console view in the Intensity Levels window shows all intensity levels on the output of the console The channel displays can be configured as described above Channels shown in red are under Programmer control Console Follow MidStageCans 3 Cue 28 4 FOLLOW VIEW The Follow view shows the contents of the selected cue list or current cue list as selected in the views configuration as described above Pressing the Select button of a playback will show its contents on the Follow view Page 177 Show Files c ye REN Clarity s L SC Operator Manual V2 0 29 Show Files and Packages 29 1 OVERVIEW Version 2 of Clarity has changed the way that show files are handled Clarity Shows can still be saved and loaded but you can also Export or Import Clarity Show Packages that contain the show as well as optionally any media backups and fixtures associated with the show 29 2 SAVING AND LOADING SHOWS Show save amp load only operates on the Clarity shows folder and uses just the show name without an extension or file location Note Any old Clarity shows that are not in the new cla
197. ill be e Select fixtures and grab them in a programmer by adjusting their attributes for the desired look All of these attributes have now been touched e Record the look as a cue in a new cue list The first cue in the cue list will contain the values of all attributes that have been touched by the programmer After the cue is recorded no attributes have been touched Page 202 Clarity H O L S G C JAREN Operating Concepts amp Terminology Operator Manual V2 0 e Adjust attributes in the programmer for the next look Now only these varied attributes have been touched e Record the look as the next cue in the cue list With the default record settings this cue will only contain the touched values Repeat until all cues are recorded Clear the programmer Playback the cue list Release playback when finished 37 7 3 Advantages of Tracking The major advantage of tracking is that if a change edit has to be made only the initial cue that contained the hard values has to be changed and the change will then track through to all Subsequent cues For example A cue list containing 50 cues is recorded The first cue sets the colour of the cyclorama cyc to red and it remains unchanged for the entire cue list Cues 2 to 50 make other changes but never affect the colour of the cyc You now want to change the cyc colour to blue This is quickly achieved by editing cue 1 and changing the colour There is no need to edit the other 49 c
198. in D SUB connector are Pin Button Playback Go 10 Go 11 Go 12 Go 13 Go 14 Go 15 Common To remotely operate a Go button provide a contact closure short circuit from its control pin to the common pin Button Playback i Go10 2 Goll 3 G01 G03 5 Gol4 6 Gols 9 Common Pin 1 d Pin 9 Circuit to operate button playback 10 6 2 12 Reset The Reset button should only be used if instructed by LSC technical support The LX600 GUI Graphical User Interface can be reset from the LX tools utility See section 34 6 3 SWITCHING ON OFF There is a mains power switch located on the rear There is also a Power switch on the front panel To switch on the console switch on the rear panel power switch then press the front POWER button To shut down Clarity press and hold the front Power button for 5 seconds To re set Clarity tap the front Power button On the touch screen select Restart If power has not been disconnected or switched off at the rear since the last use tap the Power button on front panel to start Clarity Page 39 f LSC Daan Operator Manual V2 0 6 4 LX600 FRONT PANEL The main areas of the LX 600 are Grand Master and DBO Dead Black Out button 10 4 inch multi function encoder wheel touch screen Encoder wheels and modifier buttons Keypad and command centre 15 fader playbacks 60 Button Playbacks for Group Palette Preset Cue each with LCD touch screen 4 pages
199. in the fixtures If the LED fixture does not have a real dimmer channel then Clarity uses a Virtual Dimmer which works as a type of Grand master over the RGB channels This is OK but makes the above task a little tricky Page 211 Hints and Tips HC L S C c SREN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Here is what to do 1 Record a cue with the Intensity at 100 and all the colours at 0 Set the priority to Low 50 and set the Options to Ignore Release All Play this cue and leave it on 2 Record a Blue cue with the Blue at 100 and then right click on the Red and Green attributes and select the Clear option Set the Options to Go on fader up and Fader affects all attributes Set the Fade Time to 0 3 Do the same for the Red and Green cues Now you can use the Red Green and Blue cues to have live colour mixing of the RGB fixtures 38 14 RECORDING ONLY PAN OR TILT When you only adjust Pan Clarity automatically selects Tilt as well as usually a position needs both The same applies when you only adjust Tilt Clarity automatically selects Pan as well e To record a Pan only cue or palette on the encoder wheel touch screen select the Tilt attribute Hold KO Knock Out and move the Tilt encoder wheel or in the monitors Programmer window right click on Tilt and select the Clear Tilt item Now you can record just the Pan information into a cue or Palette 38 15 TIME PRESETS Every console provides the ability to
200. in window size is normal 1280x1024 then the playback display is positioned at the bottom as usual If the Resizable option is enabled then the playback display is only displayed if the main window size is 1280x1024 For example if running on a 1280x1024 host system in full screen mode o Always Hidden Playback displays are never shown o Always Visible Playback displays are always shown at the bottom of the main window even if the main window size is not 1280x1024 Note that if the main window width is less than 1280 then the playback display will be truncated 3 12 1 Console Window When running in an emulation mode a top level Console tab is provided to show the console s internal encoder wheel touch screen and includes tabs for displaying the virtual control surfaces of the relevant LX console For example the LX600 Console tab allows you to select the LX Programmer LX Action Buttons and LX600 Playbacks controls Page 14 Operal Osean Operator Manual V2 0 rd L S G CLEAR ixFrogane Acton Dutions Loo Plaptacks fT eine TET U Dinaan am Urf LX Action Buttons Desktop Clarity Page 15 Desktop Clarity Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 LX600 Playbacks The buttons and faders all work as if they were on the actual console If you need to press two buttons at the same time pressing and holding a button for 1 second will latch that button down For example if you wanted to hold the Function mo
201. indow122 17 3 Controlling Dynamics 101 20 12 7 Masking id 17 3 1 Waveform Control 4101 20 13 Applying Dynamic Presets 123 17 3 2 Dynamics Attribute Controls 102 er ees Dynamic Presets ee ae ae ADUE Dynamics oe 20 13 3 Preserve Dynamics 124 4 pping Dynamics 103 l 17 4 2 Resync 103 20 14 Controlling Dynamics 124 17 4 3 Attribute Control Dynamics Indicators _ 103 20 15 Deactivate a Preset or Freeset__124 20 16 Recording Cues with Presets amp Freesets 125 18 Matrix 104 20 17 Updating a Preset During Programming 125 20 18 Updating a Preset During Playback 125 18 1 Overview 104 18 2 Terminology 104 18 3 Patching a LED Matrix 104 21 Programmer 127 18 4 Creating a Matrix 104 21 1 Overview 18 5 Editing a Matrix 105 21 2 Programmer Attributes Tab 127 18 5 1 Deleting a Matrix 105 21 3 Selection Sidebar 128 18 6 Matrix Control 106 21 4 Selecting Fixtures 128 18 7 Transforms 106 21 4 1 Selection phase vs Programming phase 128 18 8 Adding Media to a Pixel Source 107 21 4 2 Selecting Multiple Types of Fixtures 128 18 9 Selecting Media in a Pixel Source 107 ape ee a A eee 18 10 Adding and Deleting Pixel Sources ___ 108 51 45 Attribute Quick Menus 129 18 11 Viewer 108 21 4 6 Programmer Toolbar Fixture Buttons__ 129 18 12 Activating a PixelSource ___ SC d108 21 5 Individual Fixture Control 130 18 13 Activating Selected Cells 108 4516 Groups 130 18 14 Pixel Source Layering and Transparency109 21 6 1 Editing Groups 130 18 15 PixelSource Transiti
202. ing and dragging on the unit numbers The intensity level of the selected fixtures can be varied by clicking and dragging on the bar area When editing blind you can see at a glance the difference between the on stage values on the right and the blind programmer levels on the left 15 2 CHANNEL CONTROLLER MODE Channel Controller Mode is a method of lighting control commonly used in television production Channel controller mode differs from Programmer Mode in that when a cue is edited the edits are live and the cue including its edited values remains under the overall level control of its playback master Therefore if the playback master is at 100 then editing is live to stage if the fader is at zero the edits cannot be seen on the output If the fader is at 50 it is live to stage but dimmed to half levels In Channel Controller mode the edit session can remain open and the edited cue can be used without necessarily updating the original cue This is useful for a one off edit that might not Page 91 iti gt YoreEn i ae i LS Cee Operator Manual V2 0 be required when the same cue is used again at a later time or on another day The playback s master still fades the cue up and down and if the cue list is advanced to the next cue the edit session automatically keeps track If the edit is to be kept the changes are saved back to the original cue If the edits are not to be kept the edit session is closed and
203. ing it to be either re sized and repositioned or dragged to another screen Closing an un docked window double pressing the same button above the touch screen will automatically re dock it to the main display In the Levels and Intensity Levels tabs you can create multiple new un docked levels windows of the currently selected Level window by clicking New 10 5 RESI ZI NG PANES Windows have their various areas organized into panes A pane can be identified by its double line borders Most panes can be re sized by clicking and dragging on the double line border 10 6 RIG MODE I CONS In Rig mode you can choose detailed or compact combined Icons to optimize the display See section 12 4 10 7 UNI VERSAL AND DI RECT In universal and direct modes you can Expand the display for finer control when using the touch screen and also select virtual encoder wheels See section 8 4 4 10 8 ATTRI BUTE CONTROL SI ZE On the Programmer window tab when multiple fixtures with multiple attributes are selected the Attribute Control area can become quite large Scroll bars automatically appear when required but you can also control the size and detail of the Attribute Controls to reduce screen clutter Page 70 ea cl Cc Dear Customising Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C JAREN In the top right corner of the Attribute Control window are buttons that allow you to control the size of the Attribute Controls for all of the
204. ing the port on the Iphone e New Clients can be set to either Reject Ask or Allow If it is set to Ask then any newly detected OSC client will cause a pop up screen to appear to confirm the operation If you enter your Iphone address in the Predefine client IP address then it will bypass the confirmation If New Clients is set to Allow then it will automatically connect but beware that unwelcome users might connect without your knowledge Detailed instructions for downloading and installing TouchOSC and setting up the LX console can be found on the LSC website www sclighting com 31 3 CONTROLLING OTHER DEVICES FROM CLARITY Open Clarity s OSC server from the Show OSC settings menu and tick the Enable OSC client OSC messages can be defined in the Script fields of cues See section 24 8 for information on the script field When the cue containing the script is played the message is sent to the device Page 185 Remote Control Ler EN Clarity P Operator Manual V2 0 For example The script osc 192 168 1 7 audio volume 50 sends the value 50 to the OSC address audio volume at OSC endpoint IP address 192 168 1 7 The script osc 192 168 1 7 message label ha ha sends the string ha ha to message label The script osc cdplayer play sends the predefined OSC message play to the pre defined OSC endpoint called cdplayer You can pre d
205. irectly into memory you can double tap an empty playback touch screen then touch a cue list from the Assign and Cue lists tabs Touch a playback to assign the selected cue list to it The Control Booth window tab provides extensive controls for managing manipulating and analyzing the contents of your cue lists Right click on a cue list to see the available options See section 24 for details Clarity provides several means of playing back the cues that you have recorded See section 8 6 for details on the operation of the playbacks 9 4 1 Performance Window The Performance window tab provides a unique and intuitive method of playback especially designed for busking or improvising a show It is fully described in section 26 Page 69 Customising Clarity He L S C c Seren Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 10 Customizing Clarity 10 1 OVERVIEW You can control the look and feel of Clarity to suit your individual requirements Windows and panes can be un docked moved and re sized and attribute controls can be expanded or compressed as described below User Preferences can be selected for many settings and controls as described in section 33 Default settings for new cue lists can be selected as described in section 24 2 10 2 LX TOOLS The LX Tools utility provides tools for setting up the monitors calibrating the touch screens and setting the intensity of the LED s screens and desk lamps It also contains the He
206. ised or lowered 1 Set the Playback mode to Cue Only 2 Open Options and select the 2 options highlighted in red 3 Select the Keep Settings option at the bottom so that Clarity will use the new settings each time you record a new cue g a 38 2 PARKED CHANNELS If you want some channels to always be on whenever you start your show such as those that control DMX power racks for moving lights then you can do this by e Recording a Cue list with the channels you want set at 100 intensity e Set the Priority of the Cue list to be higher than the programmer use 150 e Set the Ignore Release All box found under the Options button e Set the Preferences in the Show Menu to Restore Playback State e Activate the cue and save the show Whenever you load the show this cue will automatically run and stay on for the duration of the show 38 3 ONE SHOT CHASE You can do a one shot chase by setting the Release at end option and setting the release time to 0 seconds Setting Go on fader up will make the chase run automatically when the fader is raised Page 209 Hints and Tips HC L S C c SREN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 38 4 PERFORMANCE WINDOW TIPS Allocate the Performance Window to an external touch screen monitor if Supported and set the monitor resolution really low in order to get make the executor buttons large and easy to press In the Performance Window create rows that just con
207. item and select Move to toolbar 21 10 DMX INPUT DMX data from other DMX devices can be grabbed by the current programmer Click on the programmer s Toolbox menu and select Grab DMX C firudirabber Tokel i rae Inge Gace tuner ae and Clery inner 16 ea inde rea ag eal be socked to the com espera sekecbed dune thor the never ureverse when wou prese tab inner A te aude ea Linnea p Let pure ures 2 Liia E athe duet 0 unneeded e Inthe Input devices universes pane on the left select an available DMX input At the time of writing only ArtNet input is supported e Inthe Clarity universes pane on the right select the Clarity universe to which the input DMX is to be applied e Inthe current programmer select the fixtures to which the input DMX levels are to be applied e Click Grab to apply the current input DMX levels to the selected fixtures in the current programmer e Click Close when finished 21 11 PARKING FIXTURES Fixtures or just some attributes of fixtures sometimes need to be isolated from regular programming and playback For example you want some work lights that always stay on at low level or a fixture has become faulty and you don t want it moving and making a noise during a show When you isolate a fixture for these purposes it is commonly known as being parked Clarity provides a several methods of parking fixtures 1 Select Programmer 2 then select the fixture s and set them as require
208. ium with of the Front Of House fixtures in their positions around the auditorium e Ina television studio the selection of fixtures can be greatly simplified by creating an individual view for each set or performance area that only contains the fixtures to be used in that set 12 5 1 Creating a new View To add a new view click either e Add View opens a new blank view without any fixtures or e Copy View creates a copy of the currently selected view that you can configure to your requirements To delete a view select that view by clicking on its name tab then click Del View from the menu bar 12 6 CONFIGURING A VIEW When a view has been selected by clicking on its name tab that view can be configured by either clicking Configure on the menu bar or right clicking in the view pane and selecting Configure View This opens the Rig Schematic View Settings dialogue Page 85 i ORREN oa Operator Manual V2 0 9 fg Scena Ven Ce The Contents pane allows you to select either Fixtures or Groups tabs and then make you selection by clicking on the fixture or group names You can then assign or un assign them from the current view by clicking on the arrow buttons At the top you can enter a name for the view and also select the type of fixture icon to be used as the default icon for this view The options pane allows you to Auto add newly patched fixtures and Auto add newly created
209. ixture specific Control functions Lamp on Reset etc for the selected fixtures These will typically execute a pre defined sequence as defined within the fixture library The duration of these commands can be set in the user preferences 21 6 6 Intensity and Colour Icons Each fixture has an icon showing its current intensity and colour at the output The icon s area varies from all black 0 intensity through to all white or colour 100 intensity depending upon the intensity of the fixture The colour changes to match the output of the fixture If the current programmer is set to Blind the icon shows the fixtures intensity and colour in the programmer even though the Programmer does not contribute any intensity to the output See Blind for more details INO intensity 1 Mac 300 Mode 2 1 2 Mlac 300 Mode 2 2 3 Mac 300 Mode 2 3 4 Mac 300 Mode 21 4 SMac 300 Mode 2 5 6 Mac 300 Mode 2 46 Mac 300 Mode 2 7 eMac 300 Mode 2 8 In the above example there are a range of colours and fixturel is at 0 black 2 amp 3 are at 25 4 amp 5 are at 50 6 amp 7 are at 75 and fixture 8 is at 100 21 6 7 Position Icons Each fixture has an icon with a white dot showing its current position of its beam at the output Page 132 Opera ORAN programmer Operator Manual V2 0 ml L S C Jens Position panned right _ 2 Mac 300 Mode 2 2 EE 3 Mac 300 Mode 2 3 EG 4 Mac 300 Mod
210. k the state from the most recent non cue only cue is restored automatically plus any new values in the incoming cue are used See section 37 7 5 for more details Merging a cue only cue into a non cue only cue will only tag the merged values as q only See section 25 4 for more details Page 147 Record a YOrPEN Clarit e L S C ORAR Operator Manual V2 0 Cue Cue Group Preset m a 5 Keep settings Vel Cancel Record Record to Existing Cue list 23 2 5 Contents Options When recording a New Cue list setting Playback to either Tracking Default or Cue Only will automatically select the appropriate Contents Options for playback in that mode However you can change these options if you desire or select exactly which attribute groups you want to include in the cue e You can choose which attribute groups Intensity Position Colour and Beam are included in each cue by clicking on them When an attribute group is Green it is included Clarity includes all attribute groups by default e If you are merging a new cue into an existing cue you can choose to Preserve existing timing of the existing cue e Selected Fixtures only check box The fixture attribute information that is recorded into a cue is usually dependent on the settings of 4 Radio Buttons listed below It doesn t matter if the fixtures are still selected in the current programmer session or not However by placing a
211. king in the left column displays a menu where you can choose to Set delay times Align delay times that have been skewed Equalize uneven skewed delay times e Right clicking in the centre column displays a menu where you can choose to Set fade times Align delay times that have been skewed and shift fade times accordingly Equalize unevenly skewed delay times and shift fade times accordingly e Right clicking in the right column displays a menu where you can choose to Set duration times Align duration times Equalize unevenly skewed duration times 16 4 FADE CURVES Fade curves determine the way that attributes move during the times entered in the cue The curve icon shows its current path setting Clicking on the icon reveals the available curves and allows you to select a curve by clicking on it Page 95 Timing Ra OPEN Clarity S SLSC OOS RAR Operator Manual V2 0 The available curves are AIA A Tui If multiple attributes are selected and they have different timing paths selected then is Shown as the curve 16 5 FILTERING TIMES Every attribute of every fixture can have its own individual set of times It is common practice to set different times for different attribute groups For example When a cue is played back the colour might instantly go to the desired setting but the position might wait for a second then move for 2 seconds The delay and fade times shown in the Timing Control below are
212. l as any recording or editing of cues in the Programmer can be undone or redone by clicking on Undo or Redo at the top of the Control Booth window and in the command centre 24 4 5 Cue Notes Notes can be added to any cue by clicking on the cue then double clicking on the cue s Notes cell and entering your text Page 158 Clarity tf L S E Or Control Booth Operator Manual V2 0 24 5 SYNC FX If a cue contains dynamic effects created in the dynamics tab of the programmer or applied by a dynamic preset or freeset the rate of the effect can be kept relative to the performance window s metronome Right clicking on a cue that contains dynamic effects and selecting Sync FX toggles whether the effects are synchronized to the metronome or not Number Mame Wait Delay hade Activity Motes 1 Lead 1 Lead Halt he not 575 1 Pan 0 352 S478 0 2000 Edit Wait 2 Band Halk pot 575 1 Tilt V3 22716 0 2000 Halt ea een pot 575 1 5hutber 5 245 o 2000 S ync FA saii pot 57 G 0 372 155 oF 2000 Is active Rename qMacros 0 374 Lead oF 2000 ticked Delete cus indicates that the 0328 267580 2000 Channel contains a naan Anann n annn Dynamic Effect e If Sync FX is not active the dynamic effect will run at its recorded rate e If Sync FX is active the effect will run at a rate that is normalized to a metronome rate of 60BPM Beats Per Minute Therefore when Sync FX is active the run rate of the
213. l playback timing was not correct you can select any cue in the master cue list and edit the timing to suit 24 10 BOOKMARK Bookmark allows you to record a page bookmark for rapid recall of a Playback pages a Select the required pages on the left and or right playbacks Tick the boxes for the LHS Left Hand Side and or RHS Right Hand Side to be recorded in the bookmark You can also name the bookmark To record click Create PageBookmark The bookmark can be recalled from either the encoder wheel touch screen s Palettes mode or the Palettes window Page 163 LSC JERR Operator Manual V2 0 25 Editing Cues and Cue lists 25 1 OVERVI EW Playback settings times and names can be changed in the Control Booth window Section 24 and in the Playback configuration Section 8 6 6 The selected settings are automatically saved with the cue list To change the contents of a cue you Edit the cue When the selected cue or cue list is edited it automatically opens an edit session in the Programmer window and that session becomes the current session meaning that the encoder wheel touch screen and controls can be used to perform the editing 25 2 EDITING A CUE To edit the contents of a playback press Edit then press any flashing button on the playback to be edited To edit the contents of a cue list in the Control Booth window select the cue list by clicking on it then click List Edit cue list You c
214. layback 37 3 Priority Control 37 4 Attribute Default Values 37 5 Programmer Control 186 188 188 188 189 190 190 193 194 195 195 195 195 196 196 196 196 198 198 198 198 198 199 200 200 200 200 201 201 201 201 201 201 LREN 37 6 Playback Control 202 37 7 Recording and Playback Concepts 202 37 7 1 Tracking Playback 202 37 7 2 Typical Tracking Operations 202 37 7 3 Advantages of Tracking 203 37 7 4 Disadvantages of Tracking 203 37 7 5 Cue Only Playback 204 37 8 Recording Cues 204 37 8 1 Content Options 205 37 8 2 Cue Only recording 206 37 8 3 Mark Cues Move in Black 207 37 9 DMX 512 207 37 10 DMX Universes 207 37 10 1 DMX Slot 207 37 10 2 Attribute 207 37 11 HTP HIGHEST TAKES PRECEDENCE __ 207 37 12 LTP LATEST TAKES PRECEDENCE 207 37 13 RDM 207 38 Hints and Tips 209 38 1 Simple Cue Playback 209 38 2 Parked channels 209 38 3 One Shot Chase 209 38 4 Performance Window Tips 210 38 5 Flashing a cue 210 38 6 Quick Record 210 38 7 Snapping Forwards or Backwards 210 38 8 Operate Clarity Like a Manual Desk ___ 210 38 9 Programmer Override 210 38 10 Media Server Thumbnails 210 38 11 Audio Playback 211 38 12 Automated Follow Spot Audio Cues 211 38 13 Simple RGB Mixing 211 38 14 Recording Only Pan or Tilt 212 38 15 Time Presets 212 38 16 Sorting Buddying amp SubGroups 212 38 17 Universal Control 212 38 18 Copy And Paste 212 38 19 Fans Buttons 213 38 20 Multiple Progr
215. le Square Ramp up Ramp down Hump Random slow med or fast Random Slow snap Medium snap or Fast snap e Phase shift when working with multiple attribute types e g pan amp tilt each attribute can have its own phase offset from the others The 25 and 25 buttons provide rapid phase shift alterations For example if a sine wave is used to modulate Pan and Tilt selecting only the Pan and setting its offset to 25 will achieve a circle e Duty factor this controls how much of the total time is spent within the waveform itself For example if duty factor is set to 1 the waveform runs continuously If duty factor is set to 2 the waveform runs for half of the time then waits for the other half of the time before it runs again You can use this in conjunction with offset see below to establish chase type effects e Rate Sets the rate of the modulation in bpm Beats per minute e Mirror check box Doubles the waveform and reflects it about the middle e Metro Sync Synchronizes the stepping of the waveform to the Performance window s metronome Buttons at the bottom of the screen provide quick variations Page 101 D A Pen Clarit a on ee ORAR Operator Manual V2 0 17 3 2 Dynamics Attribute Controls The dynamics Attribute Controls allow you to modify the values that are applied to each individual fixture attribute being modulated by the selected waveform The values can be directly changed by dragging with the m
216. lected attributes for example only focus values or only colour values If ticked intensity will not be included when a preset is recorded You can temporarily override this by clicking on the intensity button when recording the preset e Show unit number instead of fixture label Default un ticked Each fixture has a unique Unit number and a Name as set in patch The unit number is used to select fixtures when using command line programming If un ticked fixture names are displayed in the programmer and the levels windows If ticked fixture unit numbers are displayed in the programmer and the levels windows e Programmer operates at normal priority Default un ticked If ticked the Programmer has the same priority as a normal playback and therefore can be overridden by a playback on a Latest Take Precedence basis e Auto enter commandline on 2 digit after AT Default ticked If ticked this alleviates the need to press Enter after entering an 2 digit intensity value when using command line programming e Swap programmer window side buttons LX Default un ticked This only applies to the console models of Clarity If ticked it swaps the buttons on the side of the encoder wheel touch screen e Close edit session when saved Default un ticked If ticked any edit session in the programmer will be automatically closed when the edit session is saved Page 191 Preference
217. licking the up and down arrows or by moving the wheel which provides smooth variable control HTP intensities check box If the intensity value for a fixture is contained in several active cue lists and HTP Highest Takes Precedence is ticked the intensity will come from the play back with the highest intensity level The default setting HTP not ticked is Known as LTP Latest Takes Precedence In LTP mode the latest cue to be played back will take control of the intensity Options Clicking Options offers more playback options Tick a settings box to activate the option Page 153 Control Booth Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Playback Options e Release at end When the last cue has completed its fade the cue list is automatically released If not set to release at end it will loop back to the first cue e Loop at end Default setting When the last cue has completed its fade and the cue list is not set to release at end it will loop back to the first cue If not ticked it will remain on the last cue e Goon fader up The first cue of the cue list is automatically started and faded up when the playback fader is raised above zero Subsequent fader movement only controls intensity e Release on fader down The cue list is automatically released when the playback fader is lowered to zero e Release on pause back Causes the pause back button to release the playback instead of stepping back useful for chases e Action
218. lights in the other programmer sessions Another common scenario is where the you are busy working on a complex cue and you need to put this aside and work on a different part of the show By putting the current Programmer into Blind mode and selecting a different programmer you can work on the other part of the show saving and editing cues then when you are finished it takes just 3 button presses to return to the original programmer un blind it and you are back exactly where you left off Even the Undo information is unaffected as each programmer has its own Undo Redo history Page 213 Compliance Statements He L S eo c pe Fen LSC Clarity Operator Manual V1 39 COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS Declaration of Conformity This is to certify that the LX QX and VX products are approved for use in Europe and Australia New Zealand and conform to the following standards European Norms Australian New Zealand Standards EN55103 1 AS NZS 4251 1 EN55103 2 AS NZS 4252 1 EN60950 AS NZS60950 To ensure compliance with EMC Directive 89 336 and the Australian Radio communications Act 1992 the following conditions outside of LSC s control must be met gt The computer on which Clarity and the QX or VX peripherals are connected to must itself be compliant to the above standards gt High quality data cables with continuous shield must be used gt Connectors with conductive back shells must be used LSC Lighting Systems Aust
219. list TO append a cue to the last recorded cue list press Record a second time 3 22 3 VX20 Soft Menus The top row of playback buttons can be toggled to become additional programming buttons acting as shortcuts for some common operations To switch the buttons between normal playback operation and soft functions right click on the VX20 s virtual wing display and select Toggle soft menus There is only a single row of functions and both buttons above each label will trigger the same function as shown on the LCD display C eee ee Soft Menu Functions Left Bank Soft Menus Undo Prog Undo Ctrl Auto Clear Prog Save All Update Undoes the last Undoes the last See Removes all Saves all operation in the operation in the section attributes from the currently open current Programmer Control Booth 21 8 8 current Programmer edit sessions Grab Active Right Bank Soft Menus Grabs all attributes Unselected fixtures Selects Selects Closes that are active on currently grabbed in the Programmer 1 Programmer 2 any open the output into the programmer have their as the current as the current dialog current Programmer intensity in the session session boxes Programmer set to zero Page 28 Clarity H D L Ss C OPEN Desktop Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 3 23 EXTERNAL CONTROL I NPUTS The 9 pin D SUB connector on the back of the VX10 and VX20 wing can be used to remotely control several of the Go Next
220. lls can be simultaneously played with a single Row Master gt Play button 26 5 2 Cell Properties Clicking in an active cell reveals the properties of that cell in the Properties pane at the bottom of the screen The Properties pane provides a comprehensive set of options that apply to each individual cell Page 170 Clarity Performance Window Operator Manual V2 0 2 IP 2 P ee IP e Source This allows you to select the source for the cell or to make a deep copy of the current cue list A deep copy duplicates the cue list and sets the new copy as the current source e Trigger These options are used in conjunction with the metronome at the top of the Performance window see below for details and rely on the concept of a boundary which is given by the metronome s Quantize setting For example if quantize is set to 1 bar then the next boundary is when the song position reaches the start of the next bar If quantize is set to note then the boundary is the next down beat The available options are e Immediate the cell is triggered as soon as it or it s Row Master is pressed e Immediate adjusted the cell is triggered immediately but jumps forward to suit the quantize setting so that it s at the same position it would have been if it had been triggered on the boundary For example if quantize is set to 1 bar and a chase is triggered on the second beat of the bar then the cell will trigger immediate
221. lly applied to any selected fixtures no_ matter what the type See section 20 for more details Page 53 LX Console Controls Ps L S E c enns Clarity PA Operator Manual V2 0 8 5 KEYPAD AND COMMAND CENTRE Command Centre Numeric Keypad Clear Record t ooarrmner 1 a JAE go5G Undo Append dd new effect g Undo Name La BE TE he BE Select Preview Inno iil z E 5 JL L L E F 3 n et a So 3 5 Command Centre User Pages 8 5 1 User Buttons The 5 user buttons U1 to U5 on the right are used to save and recall your favourite screens and attribute selections on the encoder wheel touch screen e To save a screen setting make your selections on the encoder wheel touch screen then press and hold one of the user buttons for 2 seconds Confirm by pressing OK on the dialogue box that pops up on the encoder wheel touch screen e To recall a screen setting tap it s user button For example you might be regularly selecting the Universal mode then selecting the Beam group then the Gobo Wheels 1 4 page and controlling the third row of attributes If you save this to one of the user buttons you can recall the entire selection with one push 8 5 2 Intensity Wheel The intensity wheel always controls the intensity of the selected fixtures 8 5 3 Numeric Keypad The
222. lobal Reset StuCl575 1 pees J sores JS l 8 fixtures devices are selected but control has been refined to a single fixture StuCl575 1 allowing its attributes to be individually controlled e Step through the selected fixtures by pressing Next e Pressing Prev will step back to the previous fixture This function is especially useful when focusing fixtures one at a time particularly when combined with the Highlight function See Highlight in the Programmer Toolbar later in this section for details e Pressing All will restore control to all selected fixtures Hint You can also use the keyboard s Cursor down and Cursor up to select the next and prev fixtures Cursor left restores control to all selected fixtures 21 6 GROUPS The Group tab shows all of the available groups of fixtures Clarity automatically creates a group from each type of fixture that has been patched e Selected fixtures can be saved as a new group by clicking To Group entering a name and pressing Record The order in which the fixtures were selected is saved in the group This order is used by Clarity when performing effects such as fans and dynamics The group is automatically assigned a number The number can be used to select the group 21 6 1 Editing Groups To edit a group that you have created e Select the group then use the fixture selection methods described above to alter the fixture selection e Inthe Palettes window
223. lp section documents and video tutorials See section 34 for details 10 3 TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION Normally Clarity uses mouse scaling to get continuous fine level control for parameter controls What this means is that behind the scenes when you drag on any parameter control Clarity hides the mouse cursor scales the actual mouse move by some factor then repositions the mouse cursor back to its original position The enables parameter changes and ensures that the logical mouse cursor position never reaches the screen boundary otherwise it would hit an invisible end stop The drawback is that this only works in cases where the system can actually reposition the mouse which excludes touch screen input devices or virtual machines Enabling the settings preference Show Settings Control widget touch mode changes this so that the mouse move is still scaled but the cursor is not hidden and the logical position is not changed This also makes it easier to make larger changes without having to scoot the mouse because you can flick any parameter control and the value will continue moving with inertia similar to scrolling on an iPhone 10 4 DOCKABLE WINDOWS The tabbed main windows of Patch Programmer Palettes Control Booth Performance Levels and Intensity Levels are un dockable to suit multi monitor set ups or multiple windows Double clicking on a tab or double pressing the button above the touch screen will un dock the window allow
224. ly but will jump forward to the point that corresponds to the second beat as if it had been triggered at the start of the bar and will continue from there as normal e Next boundary the cell will wait until the next boundary is reached before triggering For example if Quantize is set to 1 bar then the pressed cell will trigger at the start of the next bar This allows you to easily pre trigger one or more cells that will start at exactly the same moment in time with the music ree The time to trigger is indicated by a green dot moving from right to left e Special action Ticking Special action will provide a degree of automated variation by taking the action that you select after an adjustable number of loops The available actions are Release will release the cell Release 7 GoNext will trigger the cell below this cell g Release y GoPrev will trigger the cell above this cell e Use local player By default each cue list cell in the Performance window uses its own local player playback options that are entirely separate from the source cue list Changing these won t affect how the cue list behaves in the Control Booth window Page 171 Performance Window Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 The Chase and Playback controls are identical to those in the Control Booth window See section 24 2 1 Cue list Playback Options in the Control Booth for details e Lock to tempo When ticked this causes the cue list chase to use
225. ly contain changes e To remove all blocking cues from a cue list edit the cue list as described above then in the edit session in the programmer window right click on the cue list and select Unblock cue list 25 7 UNDO REDO EDITS Edits can be undone or redone by clicking Undo on the Control Centre or Undo or Redo in the Control Booth window 25 8 EXPORTING A CUE TO THE PROGRAMMER When you edit a cue above it opens a separate cue list session in session control If you want to build a new cue list based on the contents of an existing cue you can export the cue directly into the current programmer session e In the Control Booth window select the cue list by clicking on it then right click on the cue and select Export to current programmer If the current programmer is not empty you can choose to either replace or merge with the current contents Page 167 Performance Window HC L G Diir EN aar PO 26 Performance Window 26 1 OVERVI EW The performance window provides a unique and intuitive method of playback especially designed for busking or improvising a show The grid area of the performance window is arranged as a grid of playable items The top row is fixed and provides column master stop buttons The left column is also fixed and provides row master go buttons Existing cue lists are dragged from the cue list browser and dropped onto locations on the grid providing one click triggering of a large and
226. mode This is because every time you cleared the programmer you set all selected fixtures to their default values or to a playbacks value if they were previously controlled by a playback Typically you will see the fixtures blackout when the programmer is cleared When you create and record the next cue you are not recording new values for the previously cleared fixtures unless you specifically grab them in the programmer and set a value They go off on stage but this off state is not in the programmer so it will not be recorded in the next cue When the cue list is played back in tracking mode each cue does not replace the attribute values from the previous cues unless there are specific values for those attributes in the new cue Therefore a fixture that has intensity in a cue will stay on when the next cue is played back unless it has been told to turn off or go to a different level in that cue For example Record a simple cue list of 3 cues with a single dimmer turned on in each cue e Select dimmer 1 and set to 100 Record cue 1 Clear programmer dimmer 1 fades off Select dimmer 2 and set to 100 Record cue 2 Clear programmer dimmer 2 fades off Select dimmer 3 and set to 100 Page 203 Operating Concepts amp Terminology HC L S C C Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Record cue 3 Clear programmer dimmer 3 fades off Playback cue list in tracking mode Playback cue 1 dimmer 1 fades on Playback cue 2 dimme
227. ms however there are small differences that are particular to each platform due to the different hardware controls of each platform The common operating system is described in detail with separate sections for of the various operations that can be performed The screen shots used in these sections of the manual are all from the LX600 There might be slight variations in the screen layout in other modes of operation The Desktop version can be configured to run in desktop mode or to emulate any of the console platforms Emulating a console is most useful for pre programming a show for a console when the console is not available 1 2 DESKTOP VERSION Clarity Desktop shown with optional VX20 wing and external monitors The desktop version is described in its own section of this manual A range of USB accessories are available for desktop operation 1 3 CONSOLE MODELS There are three models in the LX range of consoles m LX300 Each console is described in its own section of this manual 1 4 FEATURES The desktop and LX consoles all run the renowned Clarity software with many years of proven reliability on thousands of shows Some of the main features of Clarity are e Full Drag and Drop Patching with intelligent fixture Cloning e Rig View with 2D simulation and easy fixture selection e Seamless fixture substitution brand to brand model to model type to type etc from the world s most comprehensive Fixture Libra
228. n multiple times will create pairs triples etcetera The All Odd and Even buttons are also available in the Sort tab below e Individual fixtures can be selected by clicking on them and deselected by clicking on them again See Selection phase vs Programming phase below e A range of fixtures can be selected by clicking the first fixture and dragging to the last fixture e A range of fixtures can also be selected by clicking on the first fixture then using Shift clicking to select the last fixture in the range e Ctrl A selects all fixtures in the current tab 21 4 1 Selection phase vs Programming phase When selecting fixtures every fixture or group that you select is added to the current selection This allows you to build up complex selections of fixtures Re selecting a currently selected fixture or group removes it from the current selection Clarity calls this the selection phase As soon as you change any values of any of the selected fixtures Clarity changes to the programming phase When the next fixture or group selection is made Clarity changes back to selection phase and clears all previous selections You can now build up your next selection of fixtures or groups to be programmed The selections from the previous selection phase can be retained by holding the Ctrl key when making new selection 21 4 2 Selecting Multiple Types of Fixtures Select a different fixture type tab and select your fixture
229. n pages that are selected by the 3 buttons at the bottom left of the screen The main pages are Position Colour Gobo The Position page allows you to move the selected fixtures by eng and dragging a p Position The Colour page allows you choose a colour for the selected fixture s by touching a colour It has two sub pages Hue Sat and Swatch Swatch view can be viewed in Chromatic order or by gel swatch manufacturer Touch the manufacturer s name to see the available choices Page 51 LX Console Controls Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Hue Sat Swatc The Gobo page allows you choose a gobo for the selected fixture s by touching a gobo shape It also has additional sub pages for controlling gobo indexing and gobo rotation by touch and drag using the widgets at the bottom or with the encoder wheels 8 4 8 Timing If an attribute or multiple attributes have been altered timing mode provides a means of altering its fade times Menu l Times can be individually set at the bottom of the screen for the attribute groups of I ntensity Position Colour and Beam or All times can be selected Attribute times can be further filtered by touching Choose and then selecting the attributes to be included Use the encoder wheels or touch and drag to set the times e Touching the Fade Curves box reveals a range of fade curves to choose from e Touching the Menu box reveals a range of choices to set
230. nds running Clarity on Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 8 operating systems Note The Clarity software and device drivers must be installed before connecting any QX DMX nodes or VX wings to your computer Install the software by double clicking on the Clarity installation file supplied on the CD or downloaded from the LSC website www lsclighting com Note The name of the Clarity installation file will be different depending on which version of software you are loading but will be of the form Clarity PC x y z exe where x y z is the version number of the software Windows will ask you if you want to allow Clarity to make changes to your computer Click Yes and the LSC Clarity Setup dialog box appears Page 6 Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Desktop Clarity LSC Clarity Setup D Component Choose which features of LSC Clarity you want to install Check the components you want to install and uncheck the components you don t want to install Click Next to continue Select components to install Clarity p Desciption LSC Qx Vx USB Driver Aladdin HASP SRM Components are selected for installation by checking there box Position your mouse over a component to see its description A new installation of Clarity requires all 3 components to be installed e Clarity e LSC QX VX USB Driver e Aladdin HASP SRM The Aladdin HASP SRM software is for the USB Dongle that contains your Clarity licens
231. ng e Drag the fixture name and drop it into the desired DMX slot in the Patch Field or double click the fixture name to patch it to the next available slot e Enter the quantity of fixtures in the pop up Add Devices dialog then click Patch Add devices e Continue to select fixtures and patch them as above e Inthe Connections Pane click the down arrow beside the Universe that you have patched your fixtures to and then select the output DMX connector to use Page 18 ae C je ear Desktop Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C 25 3 15 PROGRAMMING Clicking on the Programmer tab reveals the programmer window All patched fixtures are available in the Selection sidebar organized in tabs of patched fixture types and groups e Select the tab for the fixtures to control then click on the fixtures to select them e Click and drag to quickly select multiple fixtures e Clicking on a selected fixture de selects it e When a fixture s is selected its attribute controls appear Fixtures can also be selected in the Rig view See section 12 for details 3 15 1 Attribute Controls Clarity uses Attribute Controls in many of its windows to control the values of fixture attributes dynamic effects and timing controls Specific Attribute Controls automatically appear when required for the fixtures or objects that you select Attribute Controls are adjusted by clicking and dragging with a mouse anywhere within each attri
232. ng a cue that changes colour will still get the colour change at the completion of the jump e Tracking Not jumps Tracking applies as above but if you jump out of order to a later cue in the list then the values in the jumped cues are NOT tracked forward to the current cue For example Cue 1 intensity to 100 Cue 2 colour to green Cue 3 intensity to 50 If you play cue 1 then jump to cue 3 you do not collect the values in cue 2 That is the lights don t go green e Cue Only The entire cue list does not track The next cue replaces the previous cue When a cue is played back its recorded attribute values are applied to the output and any attributes from the previous cue that are not present in the current cue will be released from the playback For example Page 152 oe Cc yo ren Control Booth Operator Manual V2 0 L S C JAREN Cue 1 intensity to 100 and colour to green Cue 2 Colour to red When you transition from cue 1 to cue 2 the intensity attributes will be released Activate fade in time Default time 0 seconds This is the time taken for a Cue list to fade in when the first cue is played Normally this would be left at 0 and the affected fixtures in cue 1 would fade in over their programmed time for that cue However you can enter an activate time to scale the fade in over time This is most useful with chases or when cues are set to automatically follow each other For example If you had
233. nished by ticking the box any information that wasn t stored remains in the programmer To update all of the selected cues and or presets click Update 21 8 9 Highlight Clicking Highlight toggles the highlight function on or off There is also a Highlight button on the command centre When more than one fixture is selected clicking Next or Prev cycles through the currently selected fixtures one at a time If Highlight is on the single fixture that is selected by Next or Prev is set to the highlight settings and the remainder of the selection is set to the lowlight settings e The default highlight setting is an open clear beam at 100 intensity e The default lowlight setting is an open clear beam at 50 intensity This provides an easy means of identify the single fixture that is currently under control See also Individual Fixture Control earlier in this section for more details Hint Use the Home key to toggle highlight on or off Use cursor up A or down Y arrows to select individual fixtures within your selection You can also load the current highlight lowlight values into the programmer by clicking either the Menu Button for an entire fixture or clicking an Attribute Control name and selecting either Load from Highlight or Load from Lowlight from the pop up menu Menu Button Stusp575 1 21 8 10 Highlight and Lowlight settings You can set your own highlight and lowlight values for every attribut
234. nishes Playback times are described in section 24 16 2 CUE TIMES Clarity provides several methods for setting the delay and fade times for each attribute in a cue e Timing mode on the encoder wheel touch screen e The Timing tab in the Programmer window e Command line programming See section 22 Timing mode and the Timing tab provide similar controls for setting times 16 2 1 Timing Mode Timing mode on the encoder wheel touch screen displays the timing of the attributes that are grabbed in the Programmer and provides a means of altering the times Page 93 Operator Manual V2 0 2000n T i F i TP Menu E peal T Beam F 3 IP 1 Beam FIP T Beam F 5 1P T Beam F 6 IP Lal T Beam F 7 1P T Beam F 8 IP a eT Duration The buttons at the bottom of the screen allow you to filter your selection by the attribute groups of ALL Intensity Position Colour or Beam You can select them individually or they are multi selectable by holding Function when you select Attribute groups can be further filtered to individual attributes by selecting Choose and then selecting the attributes to be included Use the encoder wheels or touch and drag to set the times e Selecting the Fade Curves box reveals a range of fade curves to choose from as described below e Selecting the Menu box reveals a range of choices to set reset align and straighten times and to recall preset times or save preset times as described below
235. nsole switch on the rear panel power switch then press the front POWER button To shut down Clarity press and hold the front Power button for 5 seconds To re set Clarity tap the front Power button On the touch screen select Restart If power has not been disconnected or switched off at the rear since the last use tap the Power button on front panel to start Clarity 7 4 LX900 FRONT PANEL The main areas of the LX 600 are Grand Master and DBO Dead Black Out button 10 4 inch multi function encoder wheel touch screen Encoder wheels and modifier buttons Keypad and command centre 15 fader playbacks 60 Action buttons for Group Palette Preset Cue each with LCD touch screen 4 pages of memory Page 43 LX900 OPEN Clarity i Operator Manual V2 0 LX900 See section 8 for descriptions of the Encoder Wheel Touch Screen Encoder wheels and modifier buttons Keypad and Command centre and the Grand Master There are 30 motorised fader playbacks arranged in two banks of 15 each Each playback has a Flash button below the fader and gt Go Il Pause Back and Select button above the fader A coloured contents function indicator surrounds the fader and the playback status contents is shown on the touch screen above it Each bank of 15 playbacks has 99 pages of Playbacks available split into left and right banks with an adjustable bank divider See section 8 6 for descriptions of the Playbacks There are 60 Action Bu
236. ntre Hold the button and turn a wheel to fan the attributes being controlled The centre is fanned symmetrically about the ends Turn the wheel in the opposite direction to reverse the fan Double press Fan Centre to latch it on Press again to un latch e Fan End Hold the button and turn a wheel to fan the attributes being controlled The ends are fanned symmetrically about the centre Turn the wheel in the opposite direction to reverse the fan Double press Fan End to latch it on Press again to un latch e Prev Step through the attribute s being controlled one attribute at a time e Next Step through the attribute s being controlled one at a time in the opposite direction To reselect ALL fixtures press Prev and Next at the same time See section 21 5 for more information Page 47 LX Console Controls tf L S C ce nns Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 e Spread Hold the button and turn a wheel to snap the attribute s being controlled into a spread from maximum to minimum values Turn it in the opposite direction to reverse the spread e lt gt Hold the button and turn a wheel to mirror the values The attributes have a range from 100 to 100 This button inverts the values Positive values become negative values and negative values become positive The 10 touch screen modes as selected by the top buttons are Rig Universal Direct Intensities Graphical Timing Dynamics Matrix Media Palettes _ These modes allow
237. nts No liability will be accepted whatsoever for any loss or damage caused by service maintenance or repair by unauthorized personnel In addition servicing by unauthorized personnel may void your warranty LSC Lighting Systems products must only be used for the purpose for which they were intended Clarity LX products are manufactured in Australia Clarity orPENn Contents Operator Manual V2 0 s L SC lt JERAR Contents 3 18 2 Page Bookmarks 23 1 1 Overview 1 3 19 Wing Playbacks 23 1 2 Desktop Version 1 3 20 Wing Group Masters 24 1 3 Console Models 1 3 21 Extended Wing Controls 5 1 4 Features 1 3 22 Programming with the VX20 Wing 2 1 5 Help 2 3 22 1 Trackball 27 3 22 2 Programmer Buttons 27 3 22 3 WVX20 Soft Menus 28 2 Latest Features 3 3 23 External Control Inputs 29 2 1 Overview 3 3 24 VX20 MIDI 29 2 2 Version 2 3 3 25 Desklamp Intensity 30 2 2 1 Rig Mode 3 3 26 Free Mode 30 2i2ue OSC 3 2 2 3 Page Bookmarks 3 2 2 4 User Definable Keyboard Shortcuts 3 4 LX Consoles 31 2 2 5 Date Time Scheduler 3 4 1 Overview 31 2 2 6 Audio Control Device 3 2 2 7 Intensity Levels windows 3 2 2 8 Touch Screen Input Support 3 5 LX300 Console 32 2 2 9 Touch Mode 4 5 1 Overview 32 2 2 10 Redesigned Record Dialogue Box 4 5 2 LX300 Rear Panel 32 2 2 11 Out Timing 4 5 2 1 Power Input and Mains Switch 33 2 2 12 Console Emulation 4 5 2 2 DMX Outputs 33 2 2 13 Show Files 4 5 2 3 Ethernet 33 2 2 14 New User preferences 4 5 2 4 DVI Video Out 33
238. nts pane click Learn The Learn button turns green If Clarity is receiving MIDI Timecode the box beside the Learn button will flash red and automatic entry of events is possible e Playback your show using any of Clarity s playbacks Each time a cue is played back a new event is automatically created containing the cue list cue number and the current Timecode when the cue is played e When finished click Learn to de select it e If necessary you can edit any of the events and their times as described below 30 3 2 Manual Entry of Events To create a new Playlist click on the symbol in the Playlists pane Clicking on that new Playlist will enable the Playlist Contents pane In the Playlists Contents pane clicking on symbol will add a new Event no set cue Clicking on that Event will enable the Event Details pane In the Event Details pane clicking on the Cue list box allows you to select a cue list that you have previously recorded then clicking on the Cue box allows you to select a cue in that cue list See also Recede below e The time for an event can be set by clicking in the time boxes and either entering a number or using the mouse wheel Press Tab to advance to the next time field Timecode is entered in Hours Minutes Seconds and Frames e To add another event click on the symbol in the Playlists Contents pane e Clicking on that Event allows you to select a Cue list Cue and Time for that even
239. nual V2 0 Right clicking on a cue that contains dynamic effects in the Properties pane above and selecting Sync FX toggles whether the effects are synchronized to the metronome or not See section 24 5 for more details on Sync Fx 26 5 MANAGING THE GRID To manage columns Right Click in the top cell of the column and select either e Insert blank column e Delete selected column To move a column click and drag the top cell of the column Dropping a cue list anywhere in the right column of the grid will automatically add a new column To manage rows Right Click in the left cell of the row and select either e Insert blank row e Delete selected row e Clear selected row Sets entire row to stop buttons e Capture to new row Copies active cells to selected row see below TO move a row click and drag the left cell of the row Dropping a cue list anywhere in the bottom row of the grid will automatically add a new row 26 5 1 Copying Active Cells to a Common Row If you have played some cells from different rows and you find a combination on stage that you like you can copy all of the active cells to a single row To record all active cells into a blank row of your choice hold Function and the Row Masters of all blank rows turn into a red record button Whilst holding Function click on a red record button e E E Ea De Active cells copied to row 6 The previously scattered combination of ce
240. number e Use custom interval when ticked quantities of fixtures greater than 1 will be spaced apart in the patch by the number slots that you enter in the box e Unit sets the unique identifying number for each fixture shown in front of the fixture name It is used to select a fixture when using command line programming and to identify fixtures in the Programmer s Intensities tab e Name The name of the fixture from the library is used by default To change the name click in the box then enter your own name Clarity automatically appends a number after each name to aid identification e Flow onto empty new universes When ticked if the selected fixtures require more DMX slots than there are available on the current universe then the fixtures will be patched to the next empty universe or a new empty universe will be created 11 4 CLONE FROM OTHER FI XTURE S Cloning is an advanced feature of Clarity If you are reading this manual for the first time or just want to patch some fixtures you can skip this section Cloning allows you to substitute different fixtures in a show or to add more fixtures of the same type without the need to reprogram the show An example of cloning is described below In the Add devices dialog box above if you click in the Clone from other fixtures check box the Patch button becomes a Next button and clicking it allows you to clone the programming presets and cues of any patched fixture s to
241. o http localhost 1947 to view the HASP SRM Admin Control Centre Make sure you USB license dongle is plugged into a USB port then click on HASP Keys to verify that your key is recognized You might have to refresh the page if you are too quick Page 9 Desktop Clarity C 25 EN Clarity Pd ZAH Operator Manual V2 0 Sentinel HASP Admin Control Center HASP Keys a me http localhost 1947 _int_ devices htm Q7 Google M HEH Apple Yahoo Google Maps YouTube Wikipedia News 10 Populary a Sentinel HASP Admin Control Center SafeNet Sentinel HASP HASP Keys available on BigMac local HASP Key ID Key Type Actions o C O Update Attach 3 5 DEMO MODE If Clarity is run without a USB dongle it will run in Demo mode Demo mode has full functionality but the intensity of all fixtures will black out and all non fadable channels will freeze for a short period on a regular basis It is therefore not suitable for running a show however it is ideal for training and demonstrations or to create off line shows that can be run on a purchased version of Clarity or on a LX console 3 6 DESKTOP DMX OUTPUT DMX512 output is obtained by connecting any of the following devices to the USB port of your computer Multiple devices can be connected e LSC Clarity QX1 interface provides 1 universe of DMX output e LSC Clarity QX2 interface provides up to 2 universes of DMX output e LSC Clarity VX10 wing provides up
242. oaded playback to provide greater live control of Chase Rate Playback Rate FX Rate and FX Amplitude To create extended controls double tap on the touch screen of the playback to be controlled and the Configure Playbacks screen appears Page 61 LX Console Controls Er Cc OPEN Clarity ES Operator Manual V2 0 Single column 2 columns CO ot acous 4 columns 5 columns Co EE e Eoo E e eee At the top right of the screen choose either single column 2 3 4 or 5 columns The number of columns that are available depends upon the number of clear playbacks to the right of the playback containing the cuelist Each column represents a playback e The first single column is the playback loaded with the cue list e If you choose 2 columns then the playback to its right controls that cue lists Chase Rate e If you choose 3 columns then the next playback to the right controls that cue lists Playback Rate e If you choose 4 columns then the next playback to the right controls that cue lists FX Effects Rate e If you choose 5 columns then the next playback to the right controls that cue lists FX Effects Amplitude The buttons and fader on each of these playbacks columns now perform the following functions e Pressing Go or Pause steps the values up or down respectively If you hold the button it will auto repeat after a delay e Holding the Flash button when pressing Go or Pause makes them
243. of the MIDI Timecode in both directions of time If the Timecode jumps back in time the events will follow When Recede is NOT enabled events will only follow forward changes in MIDI Timecode For example if recede is enabled an event to trigger cue 2 at 0 0 10 0 will trigger cue 2 when the Timecode first becomes later than 0 0 10 0 and will trigger cue 1 when the Timecode first becomes earlier than 0 0 10 0 e Receding from the first cue in a cue list will release the cue list 30 3 7 Skip Intervening Events If the incoming Timecode suddenly skips to a new point in time you can choose whether or not to skip any events that would have been triggered in that missing time period 30 3 8 Big Time Clicking Big Time opens a time code reader box that displays the current Timecode and is persistent over all Clarity windows Big Time can also be accessed directly from the Show Timecode menu 30 3 9 Simulator Clicking Simulator opens a Timecode generator that provides Timecode for testing time code controlled playback when an external feed of Timecode is not available e Click Run to start or stop the clock e Click Reset to set the time to zero Page 183 MIDI E C OPEN Clarity ES Operator Manual V2 0 Timecode Simulator 25 Frames Clicking in the Format box allows you to select your required Timecode format from the drop down box e 24 Frames For film projection rate e 25 Frames For PAL video rate
244. only two fixtures and setting the first fixtures attribute values to the start value and the other fixtures attribute value to the end value It is then recorded with the Scale option selected in the Create Preset dialog box below For example Select 2 fixtures and set them to different colours Record this as a Freeset and select the Scale option in the record dialog box When this Freeset is applied it will use the two colours Page 117 Palettes OPEN Clarit L S C ORSR Operator Manual v2 0 as the start and end values thus creating an evenly spread rainbow across any quantity of selected fixtures 20 9 DYNAMIC PRESETS Dynamic presets are presets or freesets that contain dynamics real time effects See section 17 Dynamics for more information on dynamics Clarity includes many dynamic presets in its inbuilt library ready for you to use or you can create your own as described below When a dynamic preset is applied the selected attributes will be modulated by the dynamic effect 20 10 RECORDING A PRESET OR FREESET To record a Preset or Freeset select the fixtures to which the Preset or Freeset will apply then using the programming controls or other presets set the attributes to the desired values or apply dynamics Either e Press Record Preset e Inthe Programmer tab click To Preset and the Record Preset dialog box appears Freret Record Preset Gy Aetate recorded preset
245. ons 109 21 6 2 Sort 131 18 16 Dynamics 109 21 6 3 Subgroups 131 18 17 Recording Matrix Settings 110 21 6 4 Buddying __ ___ 131 21 6 5 Ctrl Tab 132 i 21 6 6 Intensity and Colour Icons 132 19 Media 111 21 6 7 S 132 19 1 Overview 111 21 7 Session Control 133 19 2 Patching Media servers 111 21 7 1 Altered Fixture Indication 133 19 3 Network Connection 111 21 7 2 Blind Programming Cid 19 4 Configuration 111 21 7 3 Clearing a Programmer 134 19 4 1 Reload 111 21 7 4 Clearing a Fixture from a Programmer _ 134 wer aaa A 21 7 5 Clearing an Attribute from a Programmer134 es Gee ieee OO A 21 8 Programmer Toolbar 134 19 5 2 Controls 112 21 8 1 Undo Redo COs C CSC CSCS 384 19 6 Recording Cues 112 21 8 2 None Prev All Next 84 19 7 Supported Media Servers 113 aS Grab ______135 21 8 4 Preview 135 21 8 5 To Preset 135 20 Palettes 114 21 8 6 Record Save 135 50 1 Overview 114 21 8 7 Append last Save As 135 502 A PalsuceonatGiouse lett dG 115 21 8 8 Update 135 rranging Palettes an roupSs _ _ _ _ 21 8 9 Highlight 137 20 3 Groups _ AS 21 8 10 Highlight and Lowlight settings 137 20 4 Colour Presets __ I115 21 8 11 Blind 137 20 5 Beam Presets 116 21 8 12 Clear Close 137 20 6 Favourites 116 21 9 Programmer Toolbox 137 Contents VorEnm Clarit e L S C C JELEAR Operator Manual 2 0 21 9 1 Show Undo View _ 138 25 2 Editing a Cue 164 21 9 2 Trim knock out remainder 13
246. ontrol Booth window click on the cue list then click on the cue that is to contain the script Either double click on the script cell or right click on it and select Edit Script Learn new cuelist Delete cuelist Edit cuelist Duplicate cuetist Name wa Activity Motes Script Script 1 Cue Halt instructions 2 Cue Halk ee I ie 2 3 Halt play audio 1 4 Cue Halt 5 Cue Halt The simple instructions that you can enter in a script are described in the following table All Spaces and punctuation marks as listed in the table must be included in your script Names of cues and cue lists are case sensitive Scriptinstruction Description play audio Plays or resumes if paused the specified audio file Audio files must be pre loaded in the Audio Resources dialog via the Audio button is either the slot number from the Audio Resources dialog e g play audio 1 or the name of the file preceded by a forward slash e g play audio prettyfly or play audio prettyfly mp3 There is no need to include the path Pauses the specified audio file Stops the specified audio file Pauses the last played audio file Stops the last played audio file Resume the last played paused audio file a go listname Plays the named cue list e g go StdColPos Plays the specified cue number in the named cue list e g jump StdColPos 2 Snaps to the specified cue number in the named cue list Play
247. or LED desk lamps Pins 1 and 2 are ground and pin 3 is 12 Volts The brightness of the LED desk light can be controlled from the LX Tools utility See section 34 for details on LX Tools 5 2 9 External Inputs The 9 pin D SUB connector can be used to remotely control six of the Go buttons on the button playbacks The connector is wired to accept 6 inputs in the form of contact closures Page 33 LX300 lt LS C pA Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 The pin assignments on the 9 pin D SUB connector are Button Playback 3 Go 12 6 9 Common To remotely operate a Go button provide a contact closure short circuit from its control pin to the common pin Pin 1 t o Pin 9 Circuit to operate button playback 10 5 2 10 Reset The Reset button should only be used if instructed by LSC technical support The LX300 GUI Graphical User Interface can be reset from the LX tools utility See section 34 5 3 SWITCHING ON OFF There is a mains power switch located on the rear There is also a Power switch on the front panel To switch on the console switch on the rear panel power switch then press the front POWER button To shut down Clarity press and hold the front Power button for 5 seconds To re set Clarity tap the front Power button On the touch screen select Restart If power has not been disconnected or switched off at the rear since the last use tap the Power button on front panel to start Clarit
248. or details 18 12 ACTIVATING A PI XELSOURCE Up to this point all of your media selections and image transforms have been applied to the Pixel Sources virtual fixtures and grabbed in the current programmer session No intensity information media images has been grabbed by the current programmer or sent to the output When you select a Pixel Source and click Activate the relevant channels of the actual LED fixtures that make up your matrix are grabbed into the current programmer session so they can be recorded to the desired cue The transformed image is sent to the LED matrix and you can also see it in the viewer see above The LED cells of your matrix array are sent intensity values that are calculated based on the current transforms if any and the current media data This media data might be constantly changing if the media is a movie file e If you record a cue without clicking Activate the cue will only contain any transformations and media selections that you have made e If you record a cue after clicking Activate the cue will also contain the relevant channels of the actual LED fixtures to which the media data will be sent These choices allows you to create cues that only control the transforms or cues that only select the media or cues that control both the transforms and media For example Program a chase that only varies the image transformations of Pixel Source 1 Program a cue list that performs transitions between Pixel Sour
249. or more information see Metronome in section 26 6 Performance Window 24 2 3 Cue list Priority Settings Priority Default value 0 When fixtures are being controlled by multiple cue lists attributes are normally controlled on a LTP Latest Takes Precedence basis However you can override the LTP action by entering a priority value for each cue list Higher numbers have priority over lower numbers The value can be set as a positive or negative number 150 to 150 Preset values for priority can be easily applied by clicking Prog Sets LTP priority to Programmer 100 High Sets LTP priority to High 50 Normal Sets No LTP priority 0 Low Sets LTP priority to Low 50 Manually setting a priority higher than 100 prevents a Programmer grabbing control of the fixtures in the cue list 24 3 PLAYBACK CONTROL PANEL Clicking on a cue list allows you to control it from the Control panel e The l Intensity fader controls the overall intensity of the fixtures in the cue list e The Mni Manual fader controls the overall level of all attribute values in the cue list It is normally set at full but can be used to manually fade the entire cue list in and out e gt Go Plays the next cue in the cue list or restarts a paused fade Pressing gt will start the fade to the next cue even if the current fade has not finished e I lt Pauses any fades in progress If no fades are in progress if fades back to the previou
250. oup preset or freeset by touching it The borders around all Action button touch screens flash red Touch an Action touch screen or press its button to make the assignment Continue to select and assign to other buttons You can use the A B C or D buttons to change pages When finished either press Assign Action Button again or press Cancel or select another screen 8 7 3 Clearing an Action Button To clear an Action button select the page A B C or D then select the Palettes window or the Control Booth window Select Clear Action Button The borders around all Action button touch screens flash red Touch an Action touch screen or press its button to clear it You can use the A B C or D buttons to change pages When finished either press Clear Action Button again or press Cancel or select another screen 8 8 TOUCH SCREEN S On the touch screens or external monitors the tabbed main windows of Patch Programmer Palettes Control Booth Performance and Levels are un dockable to suit multi monitor set ups or multiple windows Double clicking on a tab or button will un dock the window allowing it to be either re sized and repositioned or dragged to another screen Closing an un docked window or double pressing its button above the touch screen will automatically re dock it In the Levels and Intensity Levels tabs you can create multiple new un docked levels windows of the currently selected Level window by clicking New
251. ouse in their respective Attribute Control and they work in the same way as regular Attribute Controls Standard Ranged Scaled Pile add Compact Z capped ys Cyan A Sottom Magenta Ampitude Sottom Sottom Dynamics Attribute Controls The Offset Centre and Amplitude Attribute Controls control how the waveform is applied to the attributes e Amplitude sets the size of the waveform and hence the size of the effect e Offset defines the starting position on the overall waveform Offset is commonly used to spread the spacing of an effect between several fixtures For example a sine wave is applied to the position attributes of 4 fixtures Pan is filtered and phase shifted by 25 This produces a circle effect with all 4 fixtures focused on the Same point as they move around the circle Select both Pan and Tilt then fully fan the Offset values The beams of all 4 fixtures are now evenly spaced apart as they move around the circle Hint To fully fan the Offset right click on Offset then select Full Fan Hint You can use Duty Factor in conjunction with the offset control to create interesting chase type effects The Centre Top and Bottom Attribute Controls can be used in different ways depending upon the selection of the Standard Ranged Scaled or Pile add buttons e Standard uses just the Centre value with Amplitude so that the centre value is modulated with an amount controlled by the amplitude e Range
252. ow toolbar displays the Live Times dialog Live Times Page 121 Palettes gt a L S C ce nns Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 There are 3 methods of time selection 1 Enter atime in the Fade time box see below 2 Select one of the time shortcut buttons 3 Select a previously recorded Time Preset The entry in the Fade time box can type a simple fade time a fade time range or a delay and fade time with optional range Use to specify a range d to specify a delay time and f to specify a fade time For example Fade Time Entry Result gt O 5 5 second fade 1 sec to 5 sec fade time spread across the selected fixtures d2f2 Delay of 2 seconds then a fade of 2 seconds d1 5f5 1 Delay of 1 to 5 seconds spread across the selected fixtures then a fade of 5 to 1 sec spread across the selected fixtures The current entry in the Fade time box can be added to the shortcuts by clicking To delete a shortcut time select it then press Once a time is set or selected the next Preset or Freeset that is activated will use the selection in the Live Times dialog By default the Live Time value will be automatically reset every time that it is used To retain the Live Time setting for continual use un tick the Auto reset live time checkbox By default the dialog will close once a Preset or Freeset is triggered You can keep it open by ticking the Keep open when undocked checkbox You can al
253. pe has the attributes arranged in the order they appear in the fixture itself 21 14 FANNING ATTRIBUTES Fanning attribute values of multiple fixtures is a common procedure to achieve symmetrical looks on stage Fanning spreads the values between the selected fixtures For example fanning the pan of several fixtures might spread their beams evenly across the stage Pressing and holding Ctrl on the keyboard activates the Fanning function and a vertical bar with three nubs appears on each Attribute Control ah FA Mac 250 Mode 2 7 m r m aL a Fan ir i ca Ned kn Ta Gea thas hoale Sffect Wael Whilst holding Ctrl move the mouse cursor over the top or bottom nub it changes to a double headed arrow then click and drag whilst holding Ctrl the nub left or right to fan the values e Ctrl dragging the top or bottom nub rotates the bar around the centre nub and fans the values accordingly e Ctrl dragging the centre nub fans from the middle out to the ends 21 14 1 Offset Fanning Whilst holding Ctrl move the mouse cursor over the centre nub it changes to a four headed arrow then click and drag the nub up or down to move the fanning point off centre Whilst still holding Ctrl click and drag the top or bottom nubs left or right to create an offset fan Page 142 Clarity OPEN Programmer Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C C JaTER 21 14 2 Fanning Selection Order Fanning uses the order in which the fi
254. pe of master as listed below 8 6 18 Playback Contents Indicator On the LX600 and LX900 there is a back bezel around each fader On the LX300 there is a backlit indicator above the fader The colour of the LED bezel indicator shows the current contents or function of the fader LX600 LX900 indicators Scale Group Master Inhibitive Group Master Extended Playback Control Chase or Playback Rate Effects Rate or Amplitude Page 64 ate C e 2h LX Console Controls Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C Je mae 8 7 ACTION BUTTONS The LX600 and LX900 both have 60 Action Buttons arranged in 6 banks of 10 buttons with 4 pages of memory Each of these banks comprises a 3 2 LCD touch screen with 10 physical buttons located around its peripheral LX600 LX900 Action Buttons Any Action button can be configured to control either a e Group e Preset e Freeset e Cuelist You can put any type of action on any button in any bank mixing and matching as you please You can press either the button or the touch screen to action the function The buttons are divided into 6 banks to assist you in organizing your shows For example one bank might be used for selecting groups another to select positions another for colours another for effects or freesets etc Hint When a cuelist containing a single cue is assigned to an Action button setting the Action button toggle user preference allows you to play and release the
255. r 7 Dimmers Diramer 9 Dimmer 10 Dimmer 11 Diramer 12 Dimmer 13 Dimmer 14 Dimmer 15 35 devices Dimmer 1 Dimmer 2 Dimmer 3 Dimmer Dimmer 5 Dimmer 6 Dimmer 7 Dimmer amp Dimmer 9 Dimmer 10 Dimmer 11 EA 12 Dimmer 13 Diramer 14 Dimmer 15 In this example subgroups is set to 1 so In this example subgroups is set to 2 so when the intensity is fanned the intensity when the intensity is fanned the fixtures are fanning is performed across all of the fixture split into 2 subgroups and the fanning is selection performed separately on each subgroup 21 6 4 Buddying In the Sort tab entering a number in Buddying will group the fixture selection into buddies of 2 3 or 4 etc Buddy groups are used when performing fans and applying dynamics real time effects See Fanning and Dynamics for more details Page 131 Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 Programmer Dimmer Channel infenaty In this example buddying is set to 2 and the In this example buddying is set to 3 and the intensity has been fanned so that each pair intensity has been fanned so that each trio of fixtures gets fanned by the same amount of fixtures gets fanned by the same amount Subgroups and Buddying can be re set to 1 by pressing Reset Grouping 21 6 5 Ctrl Tab The Ctrl tab is available when any suitable fixture tab is selected in the selection sidebar Clicking on the Ctrl Control tab provides easy access to f
256. r 2 fades on dimmer 1 stays on because of tracking Playback cue 3 dimmer 3 fades on dimmers 1 and 2 stay on because of tracking This is not the same as seen on stage when the cues were recorded However if the same cue list was changed to Cue Only playback mode below the playback will be the same as seen on stage when the cues were recorded e Playback cue 1 dimmer 1 fades on e Playback cue 2 dimmer 2 fades on dimmer 1 fades off e Playback cue 3 dimmer 3 fades on dimmer 2 fades off 37 7 5 Cue Only Playback When a cue list is set to playback in Cue only mode and the first cue is played back the fixture attribute values in the first cue appear on the output of the playback When the next cue is played back its values replace all values from the previous cue and any attributes that do not have values in the new cue are released The output of the playback is the latest cue only e Therefore in Cue only mode when a cue is played back the current state on the output of the playback is only the hard values in that cue Note Cue Only playback should not be confused with Cue Only recording A cue that is recorded as Cue only is intended to be used as a one off cue in a cue list set for tracking playback See section 37 8 2 below For example Here are the same 3 cues used in the previous example but this time they are played back in cue only mode Cue 1 sets the look on stage and then cues 2 replaces cu
257. r in the Selection Sidebar in the PixSrc tab as PixelSource 1 PixelSource 2 etc This allows Clarity to treat each Pixel Source just like a regular lighting fixture It can be manipulated in the programmer media selection size position shape speed etc recorded into cues and it can also be controlled by Presets and Dynamics real time effects 18 3 PATCHING A LED MATRIX In the Patch window select your manufacturer model of LED matrix and patch the appropriate quantity to the DMX locations addresses that match the addresses of the fixtures See section 11 Patch for details 18 4 CREATING A MATRIX In Matrix mode select New Matrix to create a new Pixel Matrix and display the Matrix Settings dialog box 12 8 i i vo Beal 12 15 a3 did ys oe a ect SETSSSSSSS555 a P Use the controls at the top to select the appropriate width and height of the matrix to suit your physical array You can enter a descriptive name for the matrix in the Name box Page 104 Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C pA The available patched devices are listed on the left hand side and are divided into two categories e RGB AW All fixtures that use Red Green Blue colour channels including those with Amber or White Typically these are LED arrays e Intensity All fixtures with an intensity channel ColorBlask 12 1 ColorBlast 12 2 ColorBlask 12 3 To setup a matrix select the category that matches your type of fixture then
258. r when some fixtures in group are selected and a solid blue border when all of the fixtures in the group are selected To de select all fixtures click on the background area of the window Page 87 Universal Cc pe REN Clarity p L S C Operator Manual V2 0 13 Universal 13 1 OVERVIEW When you have selected a fixture s Universal mode on the consoles encoder touch screen provides universal attribute controls that are always in the same locations on the screen and operate in exactly the same way regardless of which fixture types you have selected This not only allows multiple types of fixtures to be controlled simultaneously but also simplifies the control of complex fixtures that might use multiple attributes to control an effect or fixtures that use one attribute to change the mode of another attribute Universal mode automatically interprets these attributes and presents a single control for each effect For example the fixture being controlled might have a gobo mode attribute and a gobo index rotate attribute or it may use a single gobo index rotate attribute that has index from 0O to 127 and rotate from 128 to 255 When you use the Universal mode you don t need to care about these modes because Clarity automatically interprets these attributes and always provides a control for gobo rotate and a control for gobo index If a listed attribute does not exist on any of the selected fixtures then that attribute
259. re and time stamp the button presses that you make when you playback cues over time Audio resources can be added and synchronized to playback Bookmark allows you to record a page bookmark for rapid recall of a Playback pages The central right pane is divided into 3 columns which display from left to right e All cue lists e Cues within the selected cue list e Contents of the selected cue This column is usually hidden You can drag this column into view to see the contents of a cue Clicking on a cue list in the first column shows the cues of that cue list in the second column Clicking on a cue in the second column shows the contents in that cue in the right column The order of the cue lists can be re arranged by dragging and dropping a cue list or multiple cue lists The left hand side has 5 panes that provide controls for the currently selected cue list These settings can also be accessed on console models by double clicking on a Playback s touch screen 24 2 CUE LIST PLAYBACK SETTINGS To see or alter the playback settings of a cue list select the cue list in the cue list column then use the Chase Playback Tempo and Priority controls on the left hand side to set the required options as described in the following three sub sections All selected settings are automatically saved with the selected cue list Each group of settings can be reset to the standard settings by clicking on a cue list and selecting Res
260. re personalities supplied by Carallon an independent supplier of fixture libraries However if you have a fixture that is not in the library you can either request a fixture personality file from LSC or use the Clarity fixture editor to create your custom fixture personality 36 2 FIXTURE REQUEST SERVICE To request a fixture file from LSC please supply all details of the fixture including the brand model version number operating modes and a DMX chart or list Submit your request including this information at http www l sclighting com help centre clarity templates LSC will email you a Clarity fixture file for your new fixture See section 11 11 for details on how to add the custom fixture file to Clarity 36 3 FIXTURE EDITOR To start the fixture editor from the Show tab select Switch to fixture editor The easiest method of creating a new fixture is to load an existing fixture that has similar functions to that of the new fixture then edit the attributes to match those of the new fixture When you have made the edits click Save as and enter the new fixtures name Page 200 Clarity H O L S G C JAREN Operating Concepts amp Terminology Operator Manual V2 0 37 Operating Concepts and Terminology 37 1 OVERVI EW The operation of Clarity is easily understood when you know the meaning of certain key terms that are frequently used by Clarity These terms have been adopted by LSC as the
261. re selected and connected to the encoder wheels in the same way as in Universal mode described in the previous section You can save a shortcut to a page and row allowing you to navigate to it with a single key press See section 8 5 1 for details Page 90 Clarity C JSR EN Intensities Operator Manual V2 0 15 Intensities 15 1 OVERVI EW The Programmer s Intensities tab displays the intensity channel of every patched fixture represented by two separate vertical bars The left bar shows the programmer level if any and the right bar shows the output level The numbers below each channel are the fixture unit numbers as set in the patch To mae TT TT i 4d sy N lt id J 33 34 35 36 37 38 The cells are colour coded to indicate the following e Inactive The channel has no intensity value in an active playback or in a live programmer e Active Playback The channel has an intensity value in an active playback e Main Playback The channel has an intensity value in the main selected playback and the playback is active e Programmer changed The channel has an intensity value in a live Programmer e Programmer unchanged A cue containing the channel is being edited live and the channel value has not been changed by the programmer Touch the Legend button to display the colour code Select channels by clicking on them A range of channels can be selected by touch
262. reen Blue Colour Wheel 1 Focus Zoom Frost o Jooo y O Taping the button on the left of a row connects the encoder wheels to the 4 attributes in that row The Colour Beam and Media Servers are arranged in a similar manner but they also have additional sub pages that can be selected by either holding a Colour Beam or Media Server Page 49 LX Console Controls Pe LS C c Seren Clarity 0 EAR Operator Manual V2 0 button and selecting from the sub pages that appear or using their page buttons at the bottom of the screen See section 13 for more details on Universal Mode 8 4 3 Direct Direct mode provides another means of controlling the attributes of the selected fixture s When you have selected a fixture s direct mode provides attribute controls for the selected fixture as specified for that fixture in the fixture library Only one type of fixture can be controlled at a time The controls are divided into groups of Intensity Position Gobo Effects Groups and rows are selected and connected to the encoder wheels in the same way as in Universal mode above Direct mode also allows you to control any unusual attributes that a fixture might have that aren t covered by the controls in Universal mode See section 14 for more details on Direct Mode 8 4 4 Expand When either Universal or Direct mode is selected you can expand the display to show only the currently selected row by selecting the Expand button at the bottom of the
263. rity shows folder created prior to Version 2 can only be opened by importing them Once you have imported them you can save them again they will now reside in the clarity shows folder as a show You can also export them as described below 29 3 IMPORTING AND EXPORTING SHOWS Shows are imported or exported as a Clarity Show Package file This file contains the show file plus optionally any of the following e Audio files Pixel mapping files Rig view background images Media servers thumbnail cache Extracted fixture personalities The extracted fixture personalities will generate a standalone fixture library sfl file that contains just the personalities used by the show When the show is imported on another system if any fixture types are not found in that system s fixture library then this sfl file is also searched e Show backup files These are just the backup_ cls files that exist in the show s data directory that are automatically created by Clarity The Show menu allows you to Export a show and you can choose which elements go into the Show package file Sy Export Show Pixel mapping Files Rig background Files Media servers thumbnail cache Extracted fixture personalities Show backup files When you load or change a show you can choose to either a Load regular Clarity show file clS or Import a previously exported Clarity Show Package csp If you import a show all the m
264. rol individual fixtures from a selection of fixtures clicking All restores control of all selected fixtures See Individual Fixture Control below for more details e If any fixtures have attributes grabbed in the current programmer session clicking All will select all of those fixtures Further clicks of All will cycle between selecting all patched fixtures and selecting programmer contents Page 129 Programmer C Jen EN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 e Ifthe current programmer is empty clicking All will select all patched fixtures 21 5 INDIVIDUAL FIXTURE CONTROL When more than one fixture is selected you can use the Programmer Toolbar buttons or the Prev and Next buttons above the Encoder wheels to refine your control to an individual fixture whilst still maintaining your multiple selections Mone Prey All Programmer Toolbar Studio Color 575 8 devices Stat intenat Shutter Strobe Pan Tilt cyan StuclS75 1 5 eke Stucls 7s 5 100 uclS 75 Stucls75 8 Yelow StuclS75 1 Stucis75 3 Stucis75 5 Stucls75 7 Stucis75 8 Colour Whee Mode Colour fee Effect Whee Effect Wheal 2 Fixture Global Reset 8 Fixtures devices are selected Each Attribute Control controls all 8 fixtures e Pressing Next will refine control to a single fixture within the current selection Studio Color 575 8 devices Aiat Shutter Strobe Pan Yel Fixtu re bei n g Colour Whee Effect Wheel Effect Wheelf Fixture G
265. rument Digital Interface is an international standard for data communication between musical instruments computers and other equipment such as lighting controllers The MIDI IN connector on the rear panel receives signals from a MIDI device such as a keyboard MIDI sequencer or computer with MIDI output and uses the signals for various functions Clarity uses MIDI in two ways 1 MIDI Control of Selected Playback Simple MIDI 2 MIDI Timecode can be used to playback cues at specific times 30 2 MIDI CONTROL OF SELECTED PLAYBACK A MIDI signal can be used to remotely control the playback of the selected playback A playback is selected by touching it touch screen The cue list name of the currently selected playback is displayed in black text on a white background e MIDI Note ON messages can be assigned to trigger the Go Pause Back Release and Jump functions of the selected playback e MIDI Control Change messages can be used to pre select a cue in the cue list of the selected playback that will be triggered by the next Note on message to be received that is assigned to the Jump function 30 2 1 MIDI Settings To enable and setup Simple MIDI select Show Settings MIDI The Simple MIDI Setup dialog box appears ar Simple MIDI Setup Cancel To enable MIDI tick the Enable Simple MIDI box 30 2 2 MIDI Channel MIDI signals are sent and received on 16 separate channels on the one cable
266. ry e Multiple programmers each with independent unlimited Undo Redo Page 1 Introduction Models 2 L S C c 2TEN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 e Media Server Integration with clip thumbnails supports Arkaos VJ DMX ArKaos Media Master Catalyst Green Hippo s Hippotizer Pandora s Box ROBE Digispots e LED pixel mapping with picture and video playback maximum size limited only by available DMX slots Full Dynamics Editor and Effects Engine with smooth cross fading of effects Freesets just like Presets but independent of fixture type and quantity Time Presets and Live Time Busking interface Unlimited Groups Presets Freesets Cues and Chases Audio playback and time code synchronization Full tracking cue lists with Macro scripts and Undo Redo of cue record delete Unique Performance window live interface Performance Grid a very powerful ad lib playback matrix grid 1 5 HELP The desktop installation includes a copy of this manual that can be found in the LSC folder The LX consoles contain a copy of this manual that can be viewed on screen and on board video tutorials of common operations They are contained in the LX Tools utility e To start LX Tools from the console press Function Fine Fine at the same time e To start LX Tools from the keyboard press Ctri Alt L at the same time If you are experiencing problems with Clarity either contact your local LSC agent or post a message on the LSC forum at http
267. s 1 4 22 5 Fade Time Entry 145 27 3 Output Values 4 22 6 Fixture Numbering for Keypad Entry __ 145 27 4 Programmer Values _o 175 22 6 1 Changing Fixture Unit Numbers 145 27 5 Cue List Values YS 27 6 Customizing The Display 175 23 Record 146 27 7 New Window 175 23 1 Overview 146 23 2 Recording a Cue 146 28 intensity Levels 19 23 2 1 New Cue list _ 1462 28 1 Overview Ca 23 2 2 Cue list Playback Settings and Options 147 28 2 View Setings 176 23 2 3 Cue Options ______________ 147 28 3 Console View 177 23 2 4 Existing Cue list 147 28 4 Follow View 177 23 2 5 Contents Options 148 CE 23 2 6 Keep Settings 149 23 2 7 Clear care values 149 29 Show Files and Packages 178 23 3 Editing Cues 149 29 1 Overview 178 23 3 1 UndoRedo_CCC UCCISO 29 2 Saving and Loading Shows 178 29 3 Importing and Exporting Shows 178 24 Control Booth 151 29 4 Desktop Clarity local media libraries ___ 178 24 1 Overview 151 24 2 Cue list Playback Settings 151 30 MIDI 180 24 2 1 Cue list Playback Options _ 152 30 1 Overview 180 24 2 2 Cue list Chase Options____________ 155 30 2 MIDI Control of Selected Playback __ 180 24 2 3 Cue list Priority Settings 156 30 2 1 MIDI Settings 180 24 3 Playback Control Panel 156 30 2 2 MIDI Chanel 180 24 4 Manipulating cues and cue lists 157 30 2 3 MIDI Note On Messages 180 24 4 1 Cue list Folders oS 30 2 4 MIDI Control Function 181 24 4 2 Copying and Merging Cues __157 30 2 5 Learn Midi 181 24
268. s HC L S C c Seren Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 e Ignore GM DBO Default un ticked If ticked the GM Grand Master and DBO Dead Black Out functions are disabled e Deactivate group masters while paged out Default ticked When ticked a playback configured as a group master will be deactivated when it is not on the currently selected page e Only allow Rel All together with Function Default un ticked Applies to VX20 wing only When ticked the Release All button will only operate if the Function button is pressed at the same time This is a safety mechanism to prevent the inadvertent releasing of all playbacks e Run lamp on macros in parallel Default un ticked Normally the Lamp on command is executed sequentially for each fixture to avoid overloading the rig but in some cases this is unnecessary so this option causes all selected fixtures to be lamped on at the same time so that the operation completes quicker e Invert flash button operation on rate faders Default un ticked If a cue list is loaded on a playback and there are un used clear playbacks to the right of the loaded playback then the unused playbacks can be linked to the loaded playback to provide greater live control of Chase Rate Playback Rate FX Rate and FX Amplitude Normally you need to hold the Flash button while moving the rate amplitude fader to adjust the value If you reach a fader end stop but you need to mor
269. s and the front panel control surfaces There are several areas on the consoles that are common to all models These common controls are described in section 8 following the individual console descriptions The software is common to all platforms however there are small differences that are particular to each platform due to the different hardware controls of each platform The common operating system is described in detail with separate sections for of the various operations that can be performed The screen shots used in these sections of the manual are all from the LX600 There might be slight variations in the screen layout in other modes of operation The Desktop version of Clarity can be configured to run in desktop mode or to emulate any of the console platforms Emulating a console is most useful for pre programming a show when the console is not available Page 31 LX300 Ps OPEN Clarity OTAR Operator Manual V2 0 5 LX300 Console 5 1 OVERVIEW pens LX300 with External Monitor The LX300 has the following features One 10 4 inch encoder wheel touch screen 15 Fader Playbacks Each playback has a fader with RGB mode indicator plus Select Go and Pause Back buttons 99 pages of memory 15 Button only playbacks Each playback has Select Go and Pause Back buttons 99 pages of playback memory split into left and right pages Individual full color screens for each playback Four DMX512
270. s as described above Previously selected fixtures are retained as long as Clarity is in selection phase see above 21 4 3 Deselecting Fixtures e Individual fixtures can be de selected by clicking on them e To deselect all fixtures in the current type tab click None in the Selection Sidebar Page 128 Clarity C eter Programmer Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C JAREN e To deselect all selected fixtures in all type tabs click None in the Programmer Toolbar Keyboard shortcut Space bar e To clear all programmers and deselect all fixtures click Clear All twice 21 4 4 Selection Order The order in which you select the fixtures is used for certain effects such as fans and dynamics and can be also utilized by the sort function described below Selection order can be Saved in a group see below 21 4 5 Attribute Quick Menus As an aid to quick programming the name of each Attribute Control can be clicked or the Attribute Control area itself right clicked to access the Attribute Control Quick Menus These menus provide rapid access to common settings Each individual Attribute Control has its own specific quick menu offering functions relevant to that attribute For example Intensity Colour Typical Attribute Quick Menus 21 4 6 Programmer Toolbar Fixture Buttons Mone Prey Programmer toolbar fixture selection buttons The All button on the Programmer Toolbar has multiple functions e If Next or Prev has been used to cont
271. s automatically executed It will move all of the attributes except intensity to their settings in the following cue They therefore move in black When the next cue is executed the fixtures fade up but nothing else changes because all other attributes were pre set by the Mark cue Mark cues have a default fade time of 0 5 seconds Mark cues are inserted by right clicking on a cue in the Control Booth window and selecting Insert mark cue 37 9 DMX 512 DMX512 is the industry standard for the transmission of digital control signals between lighting equipment It utilizes just a single pair of wires on which is transmitted the level information for the control of up to 512 DMX slots As the DMX512 signal contains the level information for all slots each piece of equipment needs to be able to read the level s of the slots s that apply only to that piece of equipment To enable this each piece of DMX512 receiving equipment has an address that you can set This address is set to the first slot number to which the equipment is to respond The end of the DMX line is terminated 120 Q to prevent the signal reflecting back up the line and causing possible errors 37 10 DMX UNI VERSES If more than 512 DMX slots are required then more DMX outputs are used The slot numbers on each DMX output are always 1 to 512 To differentiate between each DMX output they are called Universe Universe 2 etc Clarity s internal DMX universes are designated
272. s cue e gt gt Snaps to the next cue in the cue list ignoring all times e lt lt Snaps to the previous cue in the cue list ignoring all times e Jump Allows you to jump out of order and fade directly to any cue that you select in the cue list Select the cue by clicking on it then press the Jump button to perform the jump e Inhibit If Inhibit is active green no output from the selected cue list is permitted and an X is displayed beside the cue list name This setting is retained by the cue list until Inhibit is de selected e Release Releases the cue list from the output e If the cue contains any dynamics then the Fx Rate Amp controls become active and can be used to vary the dynamics by either entering a value in their respective boxes clicking the up and down arrows or by moving the wheel which provides smooth variable control Page 156 eee C JSTE Control Booth Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C pa 24 4 MANIPULATING CUES AND CUE LISTS In the Control Booth window click on a cue list to select it Clicking Back or Forward lets you step through your previous selections The order of the cue lists can be re arranged by dragging and dropping a cue list Right clicking on a cue list offers the Right clicking on a cue offers the following following options options e Rename cue list e Rename e Delete cue list e Sync Fx e Insert new cue list e Delete cue e Edit cue list e Insert new cue e Duplicate cue list
273. s the previous cue in the named cue list Plays the last cue in the named cue list Pauses the last cue in the named cue list If the cue list is Page 161 Control Booth Cc ye PEN Clarity s L SC JERAR Operator Manual V2 0 already paused it steps it backwards skipnext listname skipprev listn ame T gt O inhibit listname 1 Activates Inhibit on the named cue list No output from the cue list is permitted and an X is displayed beside the cue list name inhibit listname 0 De activates Inhibit on the named cue list Releases the named cue list reinstate listname Gives the named cue list latest LTP priority Multiple instructions can be included in the one script by separating them with a semi colon For example play audio 2 go band When the cue containing this script is played it will play the audio file listed in slot 2 of the audio resources and also play a cue list named band 24 9 LEARN NEW CUE LIST The Learn Master cue list function allows you to capture and time stamp the button presses that you make when you playback cues over time This can be in time with an audio track that you can optionally select When you playback the Master cue list your cues will be automatically played back exactly as you played them In the Control Booth window pressing the Learn button opens the Learn Master Cue list dialog y Learn Master Cuelist Waiting to start press space or
274. sal Mode Pages 14 Direct 14 1 Overview 15 Intensities 15 1 Overview 15 2 Channel Controller Mode 15 2 1 Settings for Channel Controller Mode 15 2 2 Operating in Channel Controller Mode 16 Timing 16 1 Overview 16 1 1 Cue Times 16 1 2 Intensity Fade Out times 16 1 3 Playback Times 16 2 Cue Times 16 2 1 Timing Mode Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 88 88 88 90 90 91 91 91 92 92 Opera ORAN Contents Operator Manual V2 0 ma L S C JeEeR 16 2 2 TimingTab ss CO 20 7 Presets 116 16 3 Setting Times 94 20 7 1 Fixture Specific Presets 117 16 3 1 Setting Times by Direct Entry 95 20 7 2 Fixture Type Presets 117 16 4 Fade Curves 95 20 8 Freesets 117 16 5 Filtering Times 96 20 8 1 Permutating Freesets 117 16 5 1 Combining Filters 97 20 8 2 Scaling Freesets Ci 16 5 2 Complex Timing 97 20 9 Dynamic Presets 118 16 6 Wait Time 97 20 10 Recording a Preset or Freeset 118 16 7 Previewing Times 98 20 11 Palette Icons 119 16 8 Recording Times 98 20 11 1 Group Icons __ 119 16 9 Reset Timing 98 20 11 2 Preset amp Freeset Icons 119 16 10 Time Presets 98 20 11 3 Preset and Freeset Shortcuts 119 16 10 1 Recording Time Presets og 20 12 Applying Presets and Freesets 120 16 10 2 Applying Time Presets 99 20 12 1 Keyboard Commands 120 20 12 2 Apply in Palettes Mode 120 17 Dynamics real time effects 100 o Aen eel racic dali E 17 1 Overview 100 20 12 5 Live Times 121 17 2 Applying Dynamics 100 20 12 6 Apply Palettes in the Programmer w
275. se static cue Dynamics mode on the encoder touch screen allows you to add modulation variation to any attribute or combination of attributes When a cue has been played back the attribute values will normally be steady on the recorded values in that cue Dynamics add movement by continuously varying the selected attribute values These varying values are created by waveforms Different waveforms such a sine wave a ramp or a square wave etc have different shapes and therefore cause different movements Varying the rate phase duty cycle etc of a waveform will cause a corresponding change in the attributes that it controls 17 2 APPLYING DYNAMICS On the encoder touch screen select the required fixtures in Rig Mode then select Dynamics mode and at the bottom of the screen tap New The Add New Effect dialog box appears ar Add New Effect Cs CMY Colour Wheel Effect Wheel Effect Wheel 2 ee ne fe ee Intensity lt Selected Intensity Pan amp Tilt eR A attributes Shutter Strobe Channel Sets The Channel Sets pane on the left provides quick access to some predefined attribute combinations Touch on a channel set to select it The channel set selected in the left pane can be further filtered in the right pane by touching Intensity Position Colour or Beam or on the individual attributes Combinations of attributes can be selected by using by dragging If you select a channel set then alter the selection of
276. sed fader pair with 2 4 full colour LCD display Select Go and Pause Back buttons Six DMX512 A output connectors XLR5 Two DMX512 A input connectors XLR5 DMX capacity up to 8 192 DMX slots Slide Out alphanumeric Keyboard Two DVI monitor outputs MIDI In Out Thru SMPTE LTC Linear Time Code input Motorized Grand Master Stereo Audio In amp Out on balanced XLR3 connectors Dual Gb Ethernet ports PowerCon power input Two IEC power outputs Dual 160GB RAID 1 disc storage system 7 2 LX900 REAR PANEL Page 41 LX900 lt LS C pA Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 7 2 1 Power Input and Mains Switch A Power Con mains input socket and mains switch connects to the LX300 universal power supply that operates on input voltages between 100 volts and 240 volts 50 60 Hertz AC The maximum power consumption is 450 watts 7 2 2 Mains Outputs Two IEC mains outputs are provided for external monitors 7 2 3 DMX Outputs Six DMX universes A B C and D are available To use these outputs they must be connected in the Patch window to the internal universes within Clarity The LED below each DMX connector lights when it is connected See section 11 12 for details 7 2 4 DMX Input Two DMX512 A tnput connectors Not currently active 7 2 5 Ethernet Two identical Ethernet connectors provide DMX output via ArtNet ArtNet is a protocol that is transmitted over Ethernet LAN Local Area Network or WAN Wide Area Network
277. selected fixtures e Clicking Compact Capped or Expanded allows a trade off between screen area and detail as described below Compact a Sapp F Expanded AII Attribute Controls Display Selector Each different type of fixture also has its own set of individual size controls When multiple fixtures are selected you can use these controls to expand the Attribute Controls of the fixture that you are currently controlling BE a n oe Individual Fixture Attribute Controls Display Selector The symbols on these size buttons match those used on the All Attribute Controls buttons above Selecting Compact displays an attribute control that is only one line high for each type of device irrespective of how many of that type of device are selected Logical X Compact Capped 9 Expanded Studio Color 575 x JO devices Ait Shutter Strobe Ta Cyan StuciS75 1 x Colour Wheel Mode Colour Whee rect W pa Effect E Wheel Sixture Global Reset Stucl575 1 Studio Spot 575 5 devices intensity Shutter Strobe Pan Tit Position Macros oe ONL Wheel Mode Colour mee othe z StuSp575 1 100 ey 73 heel Colour Wheel Gobo Wheel Mode i obo Wheel Mode 2 Gobo Wheel Gobo Whealt2 Gobo Index Rotate StuSp575 1 ew WN orteas J ET un Ta obo Index Rotate 2 Lamp Contro Soba Speed cope a tl mmm nem ea RR eT Compact Display 1 line per device type Selecting Capped displays an attribute control that is only five lines high for each type o
278. selection phase and clears all previous selections You can now build up your next selection of fixtures or groups to be programmed The selections from the previous selection phase can be retained by holding the Function button near the Playback faders when making new selection The fixture icons show the intensity colour and positions settings of the fixtures Page 48 Clarity tf L S E Or LX Console Controls Operator Manual V2 0 To aid selection a background image of your stage or venue can be added and multiple views can be created See section 12 for more details on Rig Mode 8 4 2 Universal Universal mode provides a means of controlling the attributes of the selected fixture s In Universal and Direct mode the screen is divided horizontally into 4 rows Attribute Control Encoder Wheel Labels Each row shows the attributes of the selected fixture s that you can control by dragging the attribute control on the touch screen Attribute controls can also be flicked to scroll the value in either direction If you tap a scrolling attribute control it will stop at the current value The four attributes in any row can also be controlled with the encoder wheels if that row is selected Rows are selected by taping in any of the green sections on the left of the screen The 4 real buttons on the left of the screen duplicate the green touch selection areas on the screen You can use either the virtual
279. slave the Tracking Backup Slave Dialog must remain open whilst tracking backup is active This is to prevent any inadvertent changes to the slave show whilst it is tracking the master Page 188 Clarity Cc ye REN Tracking Backup Operator Manual V2 0 gL SC Di Hy pi ik i J R ptg Fae i i Heun y Tracking Backup Slave Connecting bo master Connection aborted Waiting For connection From master Patch Programmer Control Booth Performance Levels Although the Tracking Backup Slave dialog box must remain open on the slave computer you can still observe the operation of the slave s windows in the background by clicking on the Patch Programmer Palettes Control Booth Performance or Levels buttons in the dialog box The slave operates on the same show file name as the master but with _tb tracking backup appended to the name This alerts you as to which show file is the master and which is the Slave preventing you from inadvertently operating the backup computer and tracking in reverse thus overwriting any changes to the proper master show As the master show is modified the items listed above are automatically tracked by the slave show which is also automatically saved whenever the master show is saved As mentioned above anything that modifies the master show that is not automatically tracked will cause a warning banner message to be displayed on the master This tells you t
280. so keep it open by docking it on the left or right edge of the palette window by dragging it to either side of the screen or by double clicking on its header to maximise it 20 12 6 Apply Palettes in the Programmer window On the Programmer tab only Favourites palettes are available To place palettes in the favourites tab in either Palettes screen right click on the palette and select Favourite Then in the Programmer window select the Favourites tab then click on the presets or freesets to apply them to the selected fixtures 20 12 7 Masking When you record a preset Clarity automatically places it in the appropriate categories in the Palettes window according to the P Position C Colour and B Beam attributes that it contains Intensity does not have a separate pane and is included in the Position pane If a preset contains two categories say C B it appears in both the Colour and Beam panes and if it contains all 3 categories PCB it will be in all 3 panes When Auto Mask is ON under Options on the encoder touch screens Palettes mode activating a Preset from a Position Beam or Colour pane only applies the preset to that pane s type of attribute e Auto Arr IP CB Encoder touch screen Palettes ede Auto va Page 122 OPEN Palettes CLEAR Show Patch Programmer Palettes Control Booth Perfor Safe arrange Auto mask Preserve Dynamics Time Build Clarity Operator Manual V2 0
281. step in larger increments e Pressing both Go and Pause together resets to the default value e On fader playbacks holding the Flash button allows you to use the fader to make fine adjustments to the value If you reach a fader end stop but you need to more range you can release the flash button and move the fader to the opposite end then hold flash and move fader to continue adjusting the value This is known as scooting the fader The user preference Invert flash button operation on rate faders changes this operation so that you just move the fader without holding flash to adjust the value then if you reach the fader end stop hold flash to reposition the fader So the fader is Page 62 Clarity He LS C c pe FE LX Console Controls Operator Manual V2 0 always connected giving you instant control but you can hold the Flash button down to scoot the fader See section 33 1 for User Preferences On LX consoles the color of the fader contents indicators of any faders set as extended playback controls are Cyan See below for fader contents indicators color codes 8 6 13 Releasing a Playback To release a playback tap Release All buttons of all playbacks flash Tap any button of the playback to be released The Release button lights RED when any cue is still active 8 6 14 Releasing ALL Playbacks To release ALL playbacks HOLD Function tap Release Holding Function and double tapping Release will release all
282. ster fails for any reason then the slave can be used to keep the show running Tracking Backup automatically tracks e Playback state e Cues cue lists e Groups e Presets freesets And keeps them up to date on the back up computer Any other changes in the master will require a manual back up to the slave When this is required a red warning banner will inform you A single button click will complete the back up The prompt is necessary because these back ups can cause a couple of seconds of interruption to the operation of Clarity This allows you to choose an appropriate moment that does not affect your show 32 2 SETTING UP TRACKING BACKUP e Both master and slave must exist on the same network segment and subnet e Onthe master ensure that your show is loaded or your current show is saved You cannot start tracking backup on an empty show or on a modified show e On the slave console run Clarity then select close on the load show dialog box to leave a blank new show e On both master and slave click Show Preferences and ensure that the user preferences on the slave match those of the master e On the master select Show gt Tracking Backup gt Connect to master e On the slave select Show gt Tracking Backup gt Connect to slave e On the master once the connection is established Close the Tracking Backup Master dialog You can reshow it at any time by selecting Show gt Tracking Backup gt Status e On the
283. t 30 3 3 Editing Events The contents of any event including its Timecode value can be edited by clicking on the its Playlist then clicking on the event and altering the Event Details as described in the manual entry of events above Page 182 Opera ORAN MIDI Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C Jens 30 3 4 Managing Playlists e Multiple Playlists can be created by clicking on symbol in the Playlists pane e To delete a Playlist click on the Playlist then click the symbol in the Playlists pane e To delete an Event in a Playlist click on the Playlist then click on the Event in the Playlist Contents pane then click the symbol e Deleted Playlists and Events can undone or redone by clicking Undo Del Event or Redo Del Event 30 3 5 MIDI Timecode Playback e To enable MIDI Timecode playback tick the Global Enable box e To enable a Playlist to be controlled by MIDI Timecode tick that Playlists Enable box When Clarity is receiving MIDI Timecode any enabled Playlist will play each event when the time in the Event Details box matches the Timecode being received by Clarity See also Recede below 30 3 6 Recede There are two Recede options Global Recede and Event Recede and they work together If Global Recede is not ticked no Event Recedes will work An event needs both its own recede and the global recede enabled for it to recede When Recede is enabled default events will follow the absolute value
284. t by holding Function and clicking and dragging the patch to another DMX slot number 11 6 3 Removing Multi Patches You can remove multi patch locations by clicking on their slot number s then right clicking and selecting Unpatch selected 11 7 SELECTING FIXTURES Fixtures are selected in the patch window by clicking on them Selected fixtures have a black border Multiple fixtures can be selected You can select all fixtures of the same type by right clicking on any one of the type and choosing Select all of this type from the drop down menu Right clicking on a fixture or selecting multiple fixtures then right clicking reveals a drop down box from which you can choose Select all Select all of this type Delete selected fixtures Unpatch selected Invert pan Invert tilt Swap pan tilt Set Fade profile Properties Clone These functions are described below To deselect a fixture click on it again To de select all fixtures click Select None on the menu bar or click on an un patched DMX slot 11 8 INVERTING SWAPPING ATTRIBUTES Inverting or swapping pan and or tilt is used to counter the effects of hanging some fixtures in different orientations so that they all respond in the same direction when controlled by Clarity The alignment status of each fixture is shown in the patch window by the PT Pan Tilt icons at the end of each fixture e PT shows normal pan and Tilt e If the bar is above the P
285. t flash button operation on rate faders that means you just move the fader without holding flash to adjust the value then if you reach the fader end stop hold flash to reposition the fader So the fader is always connected giving you get instant control but you can hold the Flash button down to scoot the fader See sections 3 21 and 8 6 12 for more details 2 2 15 New Cue list Options Solo on flash When this is enabled for a playback pressing it s flash button will set all other playbacks to 0 intensity unless they have Solo safe enabled Solo safe Prevents an active playback from being set to 0 by other Solo on flash playbacks Release on pause back Causes the pause back button to release the playback instead of stepping back useful for chases Page 4 eee 255M Latest Features Operator Manual V2 0 ud L S C JAREN Action button toggle When a cue list is assigned to an LX600 or LX900 Action button pressing the Action button will play the cue list If this option is ticked pressing the Action button will play the cue list and pressing the Action button again will release the cue list This option is used with cue lists that contain a single cue allowing you to fade the cue up and down using just the one button 2 2 16 Minor Changes Added ability to re order and name pages Added a confirmation dialog before deleting any palettes Allow drag n drop of multiple cues and cue lists in control booth Add
286. t had been played back e Current output values for all other attributes of the fixtures in the cue If this cue is played back in a tracking cue list it will Block any tracked values from affecting any attributes of the fixtures in the cue list This type of cue is often recorded part way through a tracking cue list at the end of a theatrical scene or the end of a musical item so that subsequent edits to earlier cues will not track through into the next scene or song e Blocking all fixtures This records hard values for all attributes of all patched fixtures It effectively takes a Snapshot of Clarity s output If this cue is played back in a tracking cue list it will Block any tracked values from affecting any fixtures 23 2 6 Keep Settings The selections that you make can be retained for future recording by selecting the Keep Settings box 23 2 Clear recorded values Selecting Clear recorded values will clear the programmer every time that a new cue is recorded e When cues are to be played back in tracking mode clearing the programmer after every recording can give unexpected results For example you turn on fixture 1 and record it as cue 1 If clear recorded values is ticked the programmer is automatically cleared so fixture 1 goes off Turn on fixture 2 You see only fixture 2 on stage and you record it as cue 2 The programmer is automatically cleared so fixture 2 goes off Now playback cue 1 and fixture 1 comes on
287. tain looks You can fire an entire row with just one button push which might contain for example a media clip and also a colour cue for your movers You can just fire a blank row to effectively release all columns If there are some columns you don t want to release then on the blank row right click the relevant cells and choose replace with blank cell 38 5 FLASHING A CUE You can achieve toggle on off very easily by recording a cue list containing a single halt cue and then setting the cue list to release at end Set the fade time and release times to O seconds Pressing the Go button will turn on the cue on the first press and release it on the second press 38 6 QUICK RECORD When you press record you can press the flash button of a playback to record the cue on that playback 38 7 SNAPPING FORWARDS OR BACKWARDS Press Function P to snap to the next cue Press Function Il to snap to the previous cue 38 8 OPERATE CLARITY LIKE A MANUAL DESK If you want to work in the same fashion as an LSC maXim console or other similar manual console then you can simply record each of your looks to separate playback Now use the faders to playback your looks and set the level of each one live on stage fora combined look To record the current on stage look press Record and select the Blocking All Fixtures option at the bottom right of the pop up box This records a snapshot of the lights on Stage just like a maXim does
288. tep time For example BPM 60 1 step per sec Xfade scale 50 Therefore Xfade time 0 5 sec 50 of 1 sec The Chase BPM and Xfade settings can both be altered by either entering a value in their respective boxes clicking the up and down arrows or by moving the wheel which provides smooth variable control Hint You can also set the rate of a chase by tapping the go button of the playback to which the chase is assigned This is known as Tap to Tempo Chase during release If ticked when the chase is released the cues keep stepping and the intensities will fade out in the release time If not ticked when the chase is released the chase will immediately stop on the current step and the intensities will fade out in the release time Lock to tempo When ticked this causes the cue list chase to use the metronome timing as set at the top of the Performance window The cue list is scaled to fit into a predetermined musical duration bars and beats The initial length is calculated automatically based on the number of cues in the cue list Chases are scaled so that each cue maps to a single beat note Cue lists are scaled so that each cue maps to a single bar Page 155 Da i i TLS CeO Operator Manual V2 0 You can manually change the length by entering a length value in the form bars beats For example 2 0 for 2 bars duration The X button returns the length to the automatically calculated value F
289. ternal universe as selected by the Universe tabs The Connections pane allows you to connect Clarity s internal universes to the DMX universes on the rear panel and also to ArtNet If any universes are connected to the Ethernet outputs they can be temporarily disabled by clicking Disable Network DMX You can enable touch patching by ticking the box at the bottom of the patch field Show Eai Programmer Palettes Control Booth Performance Levels Club Manage custom fixtures Export patch Universe View Spreadsheet View Select None Disable Network DMX Ch 5 DMX ranges in stepped mode were different in the fixture tested than in the user Ch 15 DMX 61 68 Believe this range is Fixture Wakeup Page 74 Clarity OPEN Patching Fixtures Operator Manual V2 0 A LSC CJE EAR 11 2 SPREADSHEET VIEW Clicking on the Spreadsheet View button displays the patch information in a spreadsheet view ia a pEi hen ae fH ee a A a memes Tudia im EF a 2 eins da ier th a HIL Shale Soot SALE Ghats Soot T 4 HE iioii ii N H dwie Daia i WA a PF mmi E r bee p H oes Te r G arj imi o r PEGECEEEEEUBEEEEEEEEEE E REESE a a ee Oh D A cere in The columns can be re arranged by dagging a column name The order in a column can be sorted by clicking on the column s name Click again to reverse the order 11 3 PATCHING FIXTURES Fixtures and dimmers can be patched by using your mouse to drag and drop or by using the k
290. the cues might include tracked values from previous cues Clarity s Update function can guide you through this operation by showing you which cues and presets have been overridden by the programmer It offers you options to update the current cues or if the cue list was in tracking mode you can select Trackback so that the changes are made to the earlier cue containing the hard values for the altered attributes If a preset has been used you can choose to update the preset or to update the cue that linked to the preset If some values in the programmer are new attributes and not overridden from a cue you can either ignore them or select one of the cues contributing to the current look and merge the new attributes with that cue e To update cues that are currently on stage make your changes in the programmer then click Update The Auto Update dialog box appears 9 Auto Update StdClrLooks V Preset Lead Hef Preset Yellow w W Preset Band Preset Dark Blue i Preset Green StdClrLooks 1 Cue The Destinations pane shows the cue lists cues and palettes that are contributing to the look on stage that have been overridden by the programmer Each cue list is ticked by default If you don t want to update a particular cue list deselect its tick box Each cue list has a Trackback option ticked by default This means that if this is a tracking cue list Clarity will if necessary trackback through the cues and update the
291. the metronome timing as set at the top of the Performance window The cue list is scaled to fit into a predetermined musical duration bars and beats The initial length is calculated automatically based on the number of cues in the cue list Chases are scaled so that each cue maps to a single beat 1 4 note Cue lists are scaled so that each cue maps to a single bar You can manually change the length by entering a length value in the form bars beats For example 2 0 for 2 bars duration The X button returns the length to the automatically calculated value e Mask when enabled allow you to selectively ignore parts of the cue list You can choose to ignore any combinations of I Intensity P Position C Colour or B Beam Clicking in the Detail box opens the Set mask box that allows you to or drill down for a custom selection of specific attribute types For example you could choose Position and then select Pan only e Restrict when enabled allows you to restrict playback to a specified group of fixtures Clicking the drop down arrow allows you to select any fixture group so that playback will only affect fixtures that are both in the cue list and in the selected group e Range when enabled allows you to specify a limited range of cues to playback from the cue list Clicking the Start drop down box allows you to select any cue from the cue list Clicking the End drop down arrow allows you to select any later cue from the cue list
292. the top Each view can be configured with various options e Icon style detailed Separate areas for intensity position and gobo colour or combined e Whether or not to auto add new fixtures or new groups e Background image amp background image zoom The intensity colour and position of the fixtures are also displayed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ye i T Bean Fl T Beam F2 T Seam F3 T Seam F4 T Seam FS T Beem F6 T Beam F7 T Beam F8 QuO575 1 i S SS SL E a U a Qu05752 4u05753 Q u05754 BOSS Qua57556 Qu05758 u05759 Rua575 10 Qua575 Dimme5 U L L L if Dienemer 11 U L ee Se se se E 1 i se PE se se All of the patched fixtures and all of the groups are shown in patched order The display is zoomable using the toolbar mouse wheel or by right clicking on the screen When arranging icons in Safe arrange mode you can also define a grid and optionally enable Snap to grid 12 2 ARRANGING FIXTURES You can arrange the fixtures geographically as they are rigged on stage and therefore make them much quicker to find and select If you click Safe arrange a grid appears on the background indicating Safe mode Page 83 Rig OPEN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 bill slelo Lele L Preem AoT PH e Ae eeri a pea pe a MRA coer e o a FF Te le Le a Be k mL d PEEP eee ee LLLA E E E H m ST EE lt gt View 1 Arrange W safe You can now move and organize the fixtures and groups by
293. then recorded a reference to the preset is included in the cue not the actual attribute values When the cue is played back it will automatically recall the values from the preset Multiple cues can include a link to the same preset If a preset is updated any cue that contains a reference to that preset will use the updated information For example Some Fixtures are focused onto the centre rostrum on stage and their focus position is recorded as a preset named centre rostrum You now record the cues for your show by creating different looks and recording each look as a cue If a cue is to include the fixtures focused on the centre rostrum you select the fixtures then apply the centre rostrum preset and record the cue You might program 20 different cues that include the centre rostrum preset The centre rostrum is now moved down stage by 2 meters so those 20 cues will no longer light the rostrum You grab the centre rostrum preset in the programmer and adjust the position of the fixtures to the new down stage position and update the preset All of the 20 cues that include the centre rostrum preset will now automatically recall the new position Page 116 Clarity S9 ERa c JAREN Palettes Operator Manual V2 0 Presets can also be nested That is a new preset can be constructed from other presets Presets can also contain dynamic real time effects values See section 17 Dynamics for more details 20 7 1 Fixture Specific Presets If
294. tically assigns it to that function The learn button automatically turns off in 5 seconds if no MIDI signal is detected 30 3 MIDI TIMECODE MIDI Timecode information can be received by Clarity and used to control the playback of cues at specific times This allows Clarity s playback to be perfectly synchronized with other elements of a production that are also locked to MIDI Timecode To configure MIDI Timecode select Show Timecode Configuration Patch Programmer Palettes New show Load show Save show Save show as Preferences Tracking Backup gt About LSC Clarity Simulator Exit Page 181 LSC ne Operator Manual V2 0 The Timecode Configuration dialog box opens I Timecode Configuratio Close Big Time Simulator There are three main panes Playlists Playlist Contents and Event Details Each Playlist contains a list of events Playlist Contents Each event specifies a time that a cue in a cue list will be played Events can be added to a Playlist either automatically as a show is played back or manually by selecting a cue list cue number and time for each event 30 3 1 Automatic Entry of Events If MIDI Timecode is being received by Clarity events can be automatically entered into a Playlist as they are manually played back in real time e To create a new Playlist click on the symbol in the Playlists pane e At the bottom of the Playlist Conte
295. tick in the check box you can further filter the recorded information by limiting it to include Selected Fixtures only The following four Radio Buttons are mutually exclusive Selecting one deselects all others Exclude redundant state changes only This only records the changes that have been made in the programmer since the last cue was recorded All other grabbed values in the programmer are considered as redundant and are excluded from the cue This cue is suitable for tracking playback and is automatically selected if you set a new cue list to Tracking playback mode in the Record Cue dialog box For example if intensity is set to 100 in cue 1 and you record the same intensity into cue 2 then the intensity information will not be recorded since it would already exist in the cue list and will track forward from cue 1 when cue 2 is played back in tracking mode Page 148 Clarity S9 ERa Cc JAREN Record Operator Manual V2 0 e Include unchanged information This records all grabbed values in the current programmer session This cue is suited to playback in Cue Only mode and is automatically selected if you set a new cue list to cue only playback mode in the Record Cue dialog box e Blocking incoming fixtures only This records hard values for all attributes of all fixtures that are in the cue list This includes e All grabbed attributes in the programmer e All of the tracked values that would exist if the cue lis
296. ting matrix click Matrix Settings on the Matrix tab s toolbar Editing a matrix uses the same methods as Creating a Matrix described above 18 5 1 Deleting a Matrix To delete a matrix select the tab for the matrix to be deleted then click Delete Matrix on the Matrix tab s toolbar Page 105 Matrix gt YyCOrEN Clarit S L S C ORAR Operator Manual V2 0 18 6 MATRIX CONTROL premem rentar aiae tensore rene mmen OOO eee mean f een The left hand image is a view of the source media for the selected Pixel Source and its cursor shows where the source areas transforms will be applied In the example above the cursor is full screen The right hand image shows you a preview of how the various transformations will affect the output image The transformations to the image are controlled by sliders in the centre section of the screen A default media place holder image coloured swirls is shown until you add your own media files At the bottom of the view are the available Pixel Sources for the selected Pixel Matrix Each Pixel Matrix can have one or more Pixel Sources assigned to it 18 7 TRANSFORMS In the middle of the screen are the transformation controls Source transform options allow you to isolate sections of the source area change the source aspect ratio apply rotation and control moving image playback Click and drag anywhere within each slider box to vary the setting e Source Area Adjusts the size o
297. tion 33 1 for details 8 3 ENCODER WHEEL TOUCH SCREEN The 10 4 inch encoder wheel touch screen has multiple modes of operation There are 10 virtual buttons across the top of the screen that select the different operational modes for the screen These 10 buttons are duplicated by the 10 real buttons directly above them You can use either the virtual button or the real button to select each mode Pressing and HOLDING a button momentarily displays its mode When the button is released the previous mode returns There are also 10 virtual buttons across the bottom of the screen that provide different functions for the current mode These 10 buttons are duplicated by the 10 real buttons directly below them You can use either the virtual button or the real button to make a selection Right Mouse Button modifier Right Mouse Button modifier Te tes Real a Button Real i i a Button om a aii n e F ie ____ 3 Mouse CN Buttons aml Tams z Virtual y __intensity Pan TR Encoder Pe Button Wheel Real Labels a oS aS eS SS EOS Cs_ et Ee Ss Button Encoder Wheels Page 46 Clarity S9 L S E C JAREN LX Console Controls Operator Manual V2 0 The 2 outside buttons at the top act as right mouse button modifiers for the touch screen When either button is held down a single tap on the touch screen acts as a right click Right clicking opens a drop down context menu for the item or o
298. to the new values e On the programmer toolbar click Update and the Auto Update dialog box appears Page 125 Palettes Ra LS C d C OPEN Clarity DETAR Operator Manual V2 0 Auto Update e Click Update and the changes will be tracked back to the preset See section 21 8 8 Update in the Programmer for more details Page 126 Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 OSnER Programmer 21 Programmer 21 1 OVERVIEW The Programmer window allows you to Select Fixtures Select Groups Create new Groups Renumber fixtures Control fixture attributes Adjust timing and preview moves Record cues and presets Grab the values of a DMX input Flip selected attributes 21 2 PROGRAMMER ATTRIBUTES TAB The Selection Sidebar is where you select fixtures Session Control is where you select a Programmer 2 available in which to create your looks The Programmer Tabs are where you select what you want to control Attributes Timing or Favorites When the Attributes tab is selected the Attribute Controls that appear for the selected fixtures allow all attributes of those fixtures to be controlled The Universal Control Panel at the bottom the programmer can be used to control any type of selected fixture and provides basic controls Just like Universal mode on the encoder wheel touch screen it allows you to control different types of fixtures at the same time The To Preset Record and App
299. tor can be connected via a DVI to HDMI converter plug Not supplied Touch screens are not currently supported See section 34 LX Tools for details on how to setup the external monitors Displays on the inbuilt touch screen can be undocked and dragged onto the external monitors Page 38 Clarity re ERa Cc enn LX600 Operator Manual V2 0 6 2 6 USB Four USB connectors are provided for connecting a keyboard mouse or memory device or charging your phone A single USB connector is also provided on the front panel below the power switch 6 2 7 MI DI MIDI In MIDI Thru and MIDI Out connectors are provided See section 30 for details on the LX300 s MIDI functions 6 2 8 SPMTE Timecode A female 3 pin XLR socket is provided for SMPTE Timecode input 6 2 9 Audio I n Out Two XLR connectors are provided for audio input and two for audio output See section 24 7 for details on Audio playback 6 2 10 LED Desk Lamps Two 3 pin XLR connectors are provided for LED desk lamps Each connector provides 12volts power for a LED Pins 1 and 2 are ground and pin 3 is 12 Volts The brightness of the LED desk light can be controlled from the LX Tools utility See section 34 for details on LX Tools 6 2 11 External Inputs The 9 pin D SUB connector can be used to remotely control six of the Go buttons on the button playbacks The connector is wired to accept 6 inputs in the form of contact closures The pin assignments on the 9 p
300. ttons each with a touch screen beside it There are 4 pages of Action buttons for a total of 240 actions See section 1 1 for descriptions of the Action buttons 7 5 LX900 SPLIT CROSS FADE The LX900 has a theatre style split crossfade It has individual motorised faders for the incoming up fade and outgoing down fade Go and Pause back buttons plus a dedicated touch screen for status and configuration Page 44 Opera ORAN 1x900 Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C DAA screen LX900 Split Playback To quickly assign a cuelist to the split playback double tap the touch screen then press the select button of playback containing the cuelist Currently the split playback is an extension of the master playback so is only assignable from an existing physical fader assignment To configure the split playback or assign a cuelist hold its Select button The LCD shows Assign Join Auto advance Auto loop Clear Select playback to assign e Assign Press a select button on a playback to assign that playback to the split playback e Join The In fader controls both the In fade and the Out fade The Out fader does nothing e Auto advance When enabled the cuelist will automatically advance to the next cue when the in fade and out fade both reach 100 e Auto loop When the cuelist reaches the last cue it will start again at the first cue e Clear Clears the current cuelist from the split playback The buttons
301. tween 100 volts and 240 volts 50 60 Hertz AC The maximum power consumption is 450 watts 6 2 2 Mains Outputs Two IEC mains outputs are provided for external monitors 6 2 3 DMX Outputs Four DMX universes A B C and D are available To use these outputs they must be connected in the Patch window to the internal universes within Clarity The LED below each DMX connector lights when it is connected See section 11 12 for details 6 2 4 Ethernet Two identical Ethernet connectors provide DMX output via ArtNet ArtNet is a protocol that is transmitted over Ethernet LAN Local Area Network or WAN Wide Area Network and supports up to 255 DMX Universes on a single cable If a DMX output is connected to ARTNet then it appears on both Ethernet connectors To use these outputs they must be connected in the Patch window to the internal universes within Clarity See section 11 13 for details Hint When using ArtNet you can connect both Ethernets and use them as main and back up into two independent dual redundant networks The two networks can be connected into an LSC Nexus ArtNet to DMX converter which can accept both networks and will automatically change over in the event of a loss of a network The Ethernet connectors can also be used to connect the LX300 to a network or wireless access point for remote control See section 31 for details 6 2 5 DVI Video Out Two external monitors can be connected to the DVI connectors A HDMI moni
302. uccessfully Introduction Destination Sal Installation Installation 7 j The installation was successful J g A v The software was installed 7 f F y Close 3 3 1 HASP Installation for Mac If you have purchased a Clarity license you will need to install the HASP SRM Runtime _ Clarity l afd se erted EA MR availahle en _ ees y YA wv iH HASP SRM RTF HASP SRM Uninstall apri LSZ Clarity mpkg ReadMe rtf Installer pka Double click HASP SRM RTE Installer pkg AOC Install HASP SRM RTE installer FAA r Welcome to the HASP SRM RTE Installer Installer SafeNet intreduction Sentinel HASP Runtime Environment instagation This packege enables you b netell he sobbwure comoonens requi ia uen nefwore protected wth MASP MARS Ml or HARD EAN krye Verbose aksu3dd 1 15 C 12074 huaire 17 29 2 IIn Follow the on screen instructions to install the HASP SRM Runtime If you have previously installed the HASP SRM Runtime possibly from a previous version of Clarity then you might see an error message telling you that the software cannot be installed HASP SRM RTE Installer can t be installed on this computer w lais software can t be insta led on this computer Close This only means that the version already on your computer is the same as the version you tried to install so it was not required Click Close 3 4 HASP DIAGNOSTICS You can verify that the HASP SRM Runtime is correctly installed by navigating t
303. ue dialog box allows you to choose what will be included in the cue Setting Playback to either Tracking or Cue Only will automatically select the appropriate option in the Contents Options pane 37 8 1 Content Options Exclude redundant state changes only tracking This option records cues that are suitable for tracking playback The recorded cue excludes any redundant values from the previous state The cue only contains the touched altered since last recording attribute values When this cue is played back in a cue list set for tracking playback the output will be the hard values of this new cue plus the redundant values tracked through from previous cues Include unchanged information non tracking This option records cues that are suitable for cue only playback The recorded cue includes all grabbed values in the current programmer session the entire look in the programmer When this cue is played back in a cue list set for cue only playback the values in this cue will totally replace the output from the previous cue Blocking Cues There are times when you are using tracking playback that you might want to prevent changes from tracking through to the next cue Typically this might be a change of scene in a theatrical production or the next song in a musical performance This is achieved by using a Block Cue in the cue list Just like a cue recorded using the Include unchanged information non tracking
304. ue list This is achieved by changing the status of the required channels to cue only When a cue containing cue only channels is played back in tracking mode the cue only channels values are hard values in the cue When the next cue is played back the state from the most recent non cue only cue is restored automatically plus any new values in the incoming cue In other words when the next cue is played back the output tracks the values as if the cue only channels did not exist You can select individual channels in a cue and make them cue only by right clicking on the cue in the control booth and selecting Change cue only This will bring up the Edit cue only channels dialog box y Edit Cue Only Channels Jali Maire alc valle 2 Technobeam Full 2 Pan Position 2 Technobeam Full 2 Tilt Pasition i 2 Technobeam Full 2 Colour Wheel Mode Colour 2 Technobeam Full 2 Colour Wheel Colour 2 Technobeam Full 2 Gobo Wheel Beam 2 Technobeam Full 2 Focus Beam _ 2 Technobeam Full 2 Intensity Intensity 4 Technobeam Full 4 Pan Position 4 Technobeam Full 4 Tilt Position 4 Technobeam Full 4 Colour Wheel Mode Colour 4 Technobeam Full 4 Colour Wheel Colour 4 Technobeam Full 4 Gobo Wheel Beam 4 Technobeam Full 4 Focus Beam i _ 4 Technobeam Full 4 Intensity Intensity 6 Technobeam Full 6 Pan Position 6 Technobeam Full 6 Tilt Position 6 T
305. ues because the values in cue 1 will track through to cue 50 You then decide that half way through the cue list you want to change the cyclorama to green You edit cue 25 and change the colour When the cue list is played back cue 1 sets the cyc to red and it remains unchanged until cue 25 where it changes to green It then remains green right through to cue 50 Tracking also saves memory space because only changes are saved 37 7 4 Disadvantages of Tracking Tracking can be confusing and frustrating unless it is fully understood Remember that tracking does not necessarily give you a what you see is what you get result The cues that you record only contain changes and not the entire look For example the look on stage when you record a cue might not be coming entirely from the programmer It might be that certain fixtures are getting their colour values from a playback When the cue list is played back the colour that you saw on stage when the cue was recorded might not be reproduced when the cue is played back A common mistake is to create a look record it as a cue and then clear the programmer The next look is then created in the programmer and recorded as the next cue in the cue list The programmer is cleared again and the process repeated The problem with this method is that the sequence of events that you observed on stage as you recorded the cue list will not necessarily be reproduced when the cue list is played back in tracking
306. ut image about the Y axis Z Rotation Rotates the output image about the Z axis Perspective For X amp Y rotation this controls the apparent perspective and is more noticeable with larger matrices and or higher anti alias values see below To see the effect of this zoom the output image out a little and set Perspective to full When you then apply X or Y rotation you will notice that the image has a pronounced 3D quality to it e Op Aspect Adjusts the aspect ratio of the output image e Intensity Adjusts the intensity of the output image e Opacity Adjusts the opacity of the output image Anti Alias x is not a recordable attribute This effectively multiplies the size of the output image so that each LED gets an average of a number of pixel values rather than just mapping to a single colour Generally this achieves smoother movement on the LED with higher values but at the expense of some computer processing speed This is automatically set to an appropriate value when the matrix size is set Reset sets all source image and output image controls to their default values 18 8 ADDING MEDIA TO A PI XEL SOURCE Multiple media still images or movies can be added to a pixel source and then any one of the media can be selected Many common static and FFmpeg image formats are supported To add media to a Pixel Source either e Select the Pixel Source by clicking on it then click Add Media or e Right click on the Pixel Source an
307. ved Pressing Save when editing a cue or cue list will close the edit session as well Default fade time Defines the default fade time for new parameter values in the programmer On level Defines the intensity level applied by pressing the On Full button LX or F key on the keyboard A double tap of this button will set the intensity to 100 HTP override priority LTP playbacks at this priority or higher will override HTP playbacks otherwise HTP takes precedence over LTP Run lamp on macros in parallel Normally the Lamp on command is executed sequentially for each fixture to avoid overloading the rig but in some cases this is unnecessary so this option causes all selected fixtures to be lamped on at the same time so that the operation completes quicker Invert flash button operation on rate faders If a cue list is loaded on a playback and there are un used clear playbacks to the right of the loaded playback then the unused playbacks can be linked to the loaded playback to provide greater live control of Chase Rate Playback Rate FX Rate and FX Amplitude Normally you need to hold the Flash button while moving the rate amplitude fader to adjust the value If you reach a fader end stop but you need to more range you can release the flash button and move the fader to the opposite end then hold flash and move fader to continue adjusting the value This is known as scooting the fader This new user preference Inver
308. when the bookmark is recalled Cue lists can be restored from their start or from their last position To record the Bookmark touch Record at the bottom of the touch screen Page Bookmarks are stored in the Palettes window under the Page Bookmarks tab e Touch a Page Bookmark to recall it To delete a Page Bookmark right click on it and select Delete 8 6 11 Page Groups The Clarity software has to preserve show data between different models of console and the desktop version Therefore there are there are 6 built in paging groups that are generally referred to as pairs A B or C Here s how they map to the different variants of Clarity A LHS RHS B LHS RHS C LHS RHS LX300 Fader bottom row Button top row N A LX600 LHS RHS N A LX900 Screen 1 LHS RHS Screen 2 LHS RHS The need for the C bank is because the LX300 split position is the same for the fader playbacks and the button playbacks whereas on the LX900 the two playback pairs can each have different split positions This means that playback assignments on the LX300 s main row will map to the LX600 and to the LX900 s first playback section but the LX300 s button playback assignments will not map to the LX900 s second playback section and vice versa 8 6 12 Extended Playback Controls If a cue list is loaded on a playback and there are un used clear playbacks to the right of the loaded playback then the unused playbacks can be linked to the l
309. ws to locate them on external monitors etc See section 28 for details 2 2 8 Touch Screen Input Support Several GUI sections have been redesigned to be more suitable to touch input such as the record dialog control booth cue list settings pane sort controls etc Page 3 Latest Features to L S C c J2REN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 2 2 9 Touch Mode Enabling the option Show Settings Control widget touch mode optimizes operations on touch screens so that the cursor is not hidden and makes it easier to make larger changes by flicking any parameter control so that the value will continue moving with inertia similar to scrolling on an iPhone 2 2 10 Redesigned Record Dialogue Box The record dialogue has been redesigned to incorporate recording cues groups presets freesets and page bookmarks all from one central dialogue 2 2 11 Out Timing You can now specify an optional out delay and out fade time for intensities in the Control Booth window 2 2 12 Console Emulation The desktop version of Clarity now operates in either the standard desktop mode or in console emulation modes to mimic the software configuration and control layouts on a LX300 LX600 or LX900 console See section 3 12 for details 2 2 13 Show Files Clarity has a new method of saving exporting and loading importing shows and handling media files See section 29 for details 2 2 14 New User preferences Close edit session when sa
310. xture Indication If a fixture has any of its attributes grabbed in the current session an is displayed beside the fixture name in the Selection Sidebar Studio Color 575 a at None os Even Studia Color 575 1 10 Studio Color 575 2 11 5tudio Color 575 3 12 Studio Color 575 4 13 5tudio Color 575 5 14 5tudio Color 575 6 15 5tudio Color 575 7 1 6 5tudio Color 575 8 17 Studio Color 575 9 16 Studio Color 575 10 If any attribute of a fixture in any of the unselected fixture type tabs is grabbed in the current programmer a is displayed on that fixture tab In the above example Studio Colours 9 to 16 are not currently selected but they have had some or all of the attributes grabbed altered in the current session because they have an Page 133 Ae e L S C ORAR Operator P beside their names Studio Colours 17 and 18 are selected but none of their attributes have been altered The on the T Beam F tab indicates that some or all of these fixtures are also grabbed in the current session If the same attributes are grabbed in both programmers the current session programmer has control of the attributes and the other programmer indicates Overridden If only some of its attributes have been overridden by the current programmer it shows Part OVR When you record a cue Clarity only records the contents of the currently selected programmer Typically this is only the attributes that you have
311. xtures The cue contains hard values for all attributes of all patched fixtures 24 4 3 Copy Full State If you have a cue that you want to use again later in a show and you want it to look exactly the same next time you use it then you must ensure that you copy the full state of the playback The default settings of the copy cue function in a tracking cue list will copy the tracked and hard values of a cue but it might not include a value for every attribute of the fixtures in the cue list Therefore the copy might not produce the identical output because some attributes might take on tracked values from earlier cues To copy the full state of the source cue drag the source cue and drop it in its new location as described above In the Copy Move options dialog box that opens select e Blocking incoming fixtures only e Click OK Tip If you are plotting a theatre show it might be a good idea to record your first cue with every fixture having a value This ensures that when you are copying full states later in your cue list the state of your source cue will always be reproduced correctly To do this select every fixture in your show and then in the Programmer click Grab then select Grab Active Default and record this in your cue list as cue 0 1 and make it a follow cue so that it will automatically advance to Cue 1 which could be your curtain warmers or walk in look for example 24 4 4 Undo Redo All copies and merges as wel
312. xtures were selected You can change the look of the fan by changing the selection order You can manually select fixtures in a specific order or your selection order can be stored as a group See Groups above Selection order can also be varied by using the Sort tab See 21 6 2 Sort for details 21 14 3 Fanning in the Universal Control Panel Selected fixtures can also have their attributes fanned by holding Ctrl and dragging in the Universal Control Panel Universal Control Panel showing Intensity Strobe Position and Colour all fanned Page 143 Command Line Programming Hf L S C c SEN Clarity Operator Manual V2 0 22 Command Line Programming 22 1 OVERVIEW You can use command line programming to directly select fixtures and set intensity levels and fade times If you type in a fixture unit number on the keypad the command line automatically appears at the bottom of the encoder wheel touch screen You can select multiple fixtures and enter intensity and fade time values as described below 9 15 AT 80 22 2 FIXTURE SELECTION A Fixture can be selected by keying in a fixture unit number see fixture unit numbering below followed by Enter For example 22 Enter selects fixture 22 A range of fixture unit numbers can be selected by using either the Thru key and you can also combine and subtract ranges using and For example 1 Thru 10 Enter selects fixtures 1 through 10 1
313. y Page 34 opera ORSR 1X300 Operator Manual V2 0 d L S C sar 5 4 LX300 FRONT PANEL The main areas of the LX 300 are Grand Master and DBO Dead Black Out button 10 4 inch multi function encoder wheel touch screen Encoder wheels and modifier buttons Keypad and command centre 15 fader playbacks 15 button playbacks External monitor Se a a O0000009 EGO o 8 000 CE LX300 See section 8 for descriptions of the Encoder Wheel Touch Screen Encoder wheels and modifier buttons Keypad and Command centre and the Grand Master 5 4 1 LX300 Playbacks The LX300 has 15 fader playbacks and 15 button playbacks that are used for playing back cuelists Between the fader playbacks and button playbacks are individual Playback touch screens that show the contents of each of the 30 playbacks and also allow you to assign cuelists and configure the playbacks by double tapping on a touch screen LX300 Playback Touch Screens Page 35 LX300 c ye PEN Clarity F LSC De EAR Operator Manual V2 0 See section 8 6 for details on how to assign cuelists and configure playbacks TILT i KA SH LX300 Playbacks Each Fader playback has a Flash button below the fader and gt Go Il K Pause Back buttons a coloured contents function indicator and a LCD touch screen above it Each Button playback has a Go and a Il K Pause Back button and LCD touch
314. y is available for both PC and MAC operating systems Purchased versions of Clarity desktop include a USB dongle HASP that you plug into a USB port of the Same computer that is running Clarity or into the secure compartment in the rear of a VX10 or VX20 wing When you start Clarity it reads the license from the dongle and automatically enables the channel capability that you have purchased Multiple dongles can be plugged in at the same time to increase your available DMX channels Your Clarity USB Hasp Dongle is a valuable item Without it Clarity will operate in Demo Mode as described below Therefore you should care for it as you would any other valuable piece of equipment LSC recommends that you insure your USB Hasp Dongle against loss theft or damage as LSC cannot supply a replacement in these circumstances 3 1 1 Software The Clarity software contained on the Clarity CD is also available as a download from the LSC website www sclighting com Both the CD and downloaded versions are identical although both LSC Lighting Systems Aust Pty Ltd and OpenClear Pty Ltd have a corporate policy of continuous improvement To achieve this goal we undertake to release software updates for all products on a regular basis In light of this policy the website might contain a later version of Clarity than the version on your CD Please check the web site for the latest version of Clarity software 3 2 INSTALLING CLARITY ON A PC LSC recomme

File - LSC Lighting Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents